slm-5650a manual

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

Installation and Operation Manual

For Firmware Version 1.4.8 or higher

Part Number MN-SLM-5650A Revision 10

IMPORTANT NOTE: The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published information regarding this product. Product specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Revision 10

MN-SLM-5650A

Copyright © 2017 Comtech EF Data. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 – 9 - Various updates.

10 Jan 2017

Updated formatting to reflect current company standards. Revised Appendix F. TRANSEC Module to incorporate Firmware Version 2.2.4. Added Note regarding Bridge Mode at various locations. Updated maximum frame size at various locations. Added statement that DSSS operation over WGS and DSCS has not been ARSTRAT approved. Added Appendix for Modem Options.


Table of Contents TOC-1 MN-SLM-5650A

TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE ...................................................................................................................................................... I About this Manual ........................................................................................................................................ i Conventions and References...................................................................................................................... i

Patents and Trademarks ............................................................................................................................ i Related Documents .................................................................................................................................... i Military Standards ....................................................................................................................................... ii Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and References ............................................................................................. ii Examples of Multi-Hazard Notices ............................................................................................................. ii Recommended Standard Designations ..................................................................................................... ii

Safety and Compliance .............................................................................................................................. iii Electrical Safety and Compliance ............................................................................................................. iii Electrical Installation ................................................................................................................................. iii Class I Pluggable Equipment Type A-Protective Earthing ........................................................................ iii Galvanic Isolator Use ................................................................................................................................ iii Restricted Access Location ....................................................................................................................... iii Battery Warning ......................................................................................................................................... iv Operating Environment ............................................................................................................................. iv

European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1............................................................................................................. iv European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive (2004/108/EC) ................................ iv European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC) ................................................................ v European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC) .................................................................................... v European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (91/263/EEC) ........................... vi CE Mark vi

Product Support ......................................................................................................................................... vi Comtech EF Data Headquarters ............................................................................................................... vi Warranty Policy ......................................................................................................................................... vii

Limitations of Warranty ............................................................................................................................. vii Exclusive Remedies ................................................................................................................................ viii

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1–1 1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 1–1 1.2 Functional Description ............................................................................................................... 1–2 1.3 Product Features ......................................................................................................................... 1–3

1.3.1 Operational Features ................................................................................................................ 1–4 1.3.1.1 Operating Modes ........................................................................................................... 1–4

1.3.1.1.1 Closed Networks ........................................................................................................ 1–4 1.3.1.1.2 Open Networks (Intelsat) ........................................................................................... 1–4 1.3.1.1.3 OM-73 Mode .............................................................................................................. 1–4

1.3.1.2 Secure Management Interfaces .................................................................................... 1–5 1.3.1.3 Data Interfaces .............................................................................................................. 1–5

1.3.1.3.1 TIA/EIA-530 Interface ................................................................................................ 1–5 1.3.1.3.2 TIA/EIA-613 High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) ...................................................... 1–5 1.3.1.3.3 Network Processor (NP) Module Option ................................................................... 1–6 1.3.1.3.4 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Module Option ........................................................................... 1–6 1.3.1.3.5 Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) Module Option ........................................ 1–6 1.3.1.3.6 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Module Option ..................................... 1–6

1.3.1.4 Independent Tx and Rx Function .................................................................................. 1–7 1.3.1.5 Verification ..................................................................................................................... 1–7 1.3.1.6 Firmware Updates ......................................................................................................... 1–7 1.3.1.7 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST) .................................................................... 1–8

1.3.1.7.1 FAST Accessible Options .......................................................................................... 1–8



1.3.1.7.2 Extended Temperature Option ................................................................................. 1–10 1.3.1.7.3 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) Option ................................................ 1–10

1.3.1.8 Interoperability ............................................................................................................. 1–11 1.3.1.8.1 Legacy Modems....................................................................................................... 1–11 1.3.1.8.2 Modem Switches ..................................................................................................... 1–11

1.4 Physical Features ...................................................................................................................... 1–12 1.4.1 Dimensional Envelope ............................................................................................................ 1–13 1.4.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................................. 1–14 1.4.3 Rear Panel .............................................................................................................................. 1–15

CHAPTER 2. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 2–1 2.1 Summary of Specifications ........................................................................................................ 2–1 2.2 BER Performance ........................................................................................................................ 2–7

2.2.1 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding ........................................................................... 2–7 2.2.2 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and Reed-Solomon ........................................... 2–7 2.2.3 8PSK, Trellis Decoder ............................................................................................................... 2–7 2.2.4 8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon .............................................................................. 2–8 2.2.5 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon ........................................................................... 2–8 2.2.6 Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding ....................................................................................... 2–8 2.2.7 Sequential Decoding with/without Reed-Solomon .................................................................... 2–9 2.2.8 BER Performance with Symmetrical or Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers ................................. 2–9 2.2.9 LDPC ULL Decoding ............................................................................................................... 2–11 2.2.10 LDPC LL Decoding ................................................................................................................. 2–11 2.2.11 LDPC HP Decoding ................................................................................................................ 2–11

CHAPTER 3. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 3–1 3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Shipment ............................................................................................ 3–1

3.1.1 Inspect the Shipment ................................................................................................................ 3–2 3.2 Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure ....................................................................................... 3–2

3.2.1 Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit ......................................................................... 3–4 3.2.2 Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set ....................................................................... 3–6

3.3 Connect External Cables ............................................................................................................ 3–7 3.4 Configuration and Operation ..................................................................................................... 3–7

CHAPTER 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS ..................................................................................... 4–1 4.1 Overview – Cabling Connection Types ..................................................................................... 4–1

4.1.1 Coaxial Cable Connections ...................................................................................................... 4–2 4.1.1.1 Type ‘BNC’ .................................................................................................................... 4–3 4.1.1.2 Type ‘TNC’ ..................................................................................................................... 4–3 4.1.1.3 Type ‘N’ ......................................................................................................................... 4–3 4.1.1.4 Type ‘F’ .......................................................................................................................... 4–3 4.1.1.5 Type ‘SMA’ .................................................................................................................... 4–3

4.1.2 D-Subminiature Cable Connections ......................................................................................... 4–4 4.1.3 RJ-45, RJ-48 Cable Connections ............................................................................................. 4–4 4.1.4 USB Cable Connections ........................................................................................................... 4–5

4.2 Unit Connectors .......................................................................................................................... 4–6 4.2.1.1.1 AC Operation – Replace the Fuses ......................................................................... 4–13 4.2.1.1.2 AC Operation – Apply Power ................................................................................... 4–14

4.2.1.2 Power Interface Module – Optional 24V DC Unit ........................................................ 4–15 4.2.1.2.1 DC Operation – Replace the Fuses ......................................................................... 4–15 4.2.1.2.2 DC Operation – Apply Power ................................................................................... 4–15



CHAPTER 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE ................................................................................................... 5–1 5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 5–1

5.1.1 Firmware Update Procedure Summary .................................................................................... 5–1 5.1.2 About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats ............................................................ 5–2

5.2 Prepare for the Firmware Download ......................................................................................... 5–3 5.2.1 Required User-supplied Items .................................................................................................. 5–3

5.2.1.1 Modem Connections ..................................................................................................... 5–3 5.2.2 Configure the Terminal Emulator Program ............................................................................... 5–4 5.2.3 Get the Management IP Address and Firmware Information ................................................... 5–4

5.2.3.1 Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Management IP Address ................................. 5–5 5.2.3.2 Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Firmware Information ...................................... 5–5 5.2.3.3 Use the Serial Interface to Find the Firmware Information ........................................... 5–5 5.2.3.4 Use the Base Modem HTTP Interface to Find the Firmware Information ..................... 5–6

5.2.4 Make a Temporary Folder (Subdirectory) on the User PC ....................................................... 5–6 5.2.4.1 Use Windows Desktop to Make a Folder ...................................................................... 5–7 5.2.4.2 Use Windows Explorer to Make a Folder ...................................................................... 5–8 5.2.4.3 Use the Run and Browse Windows to Make a Folder .................................................. 5–9 5.2.4.4 Use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt to Make a Folder ....................... 5–10

5.2.5 Download and Extract the Firmware Update Files ................................................................. 5–11 5.2.5.1 Use Windows Desktop to View Folder Contents......................................................... 5–13 5.2.5.2 Use Windows Command-line to View Folder Contents .............................................. 5–13

5.3 Upload the Bulk Firmware Files and Update the Modem ...................................................... 5–14 5.3.1 Important Considerations ........................................................................................................ 5–14 5.3.2 Steps to FTP Upload the Firmware Files ................................................................................ 5–14

5.4 Optional Network Processor (NP) Module Interface Firmware Update Procedure ............ 5–16 5.5 Optional TRANSEC Module Interface Firmware Update Procedure .................................... 5–20 5.6 USB Firmware Update Procedure ............................................................................................ 5–24

CHAPTER 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................... 6–1 6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 6–1 6.2 FAST Activation Procedure via the SLM-5650A Front Panel .................................................. 6–2

CHAPTER 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION ....................................................................................... 7–1 7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 7–1

7.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array ................................................................................................... 7–2 7.1.2 LED Indicators .......................................................................................................................... 7–3 7.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) .......................................................................................... 7–4

7.1.3.1 Navigating the Menu Screens ....................................................................................... 7–6 7.2 Front Panel Operation ................................................................................................................ 7–7

7.2.1 Opening Screen ........................................................................................................................ 7–7 7.2.2 SELECT: (Main) Menu .............................................................................................................. 7–7 7.2.3 (SELECT:) Configure (Configuration) Menu Branch ................................................................. 7–8

7.2.3.1 (CONFIG:) Tx ................................................................................................................ 7–9 7.2.3.2 (CONFIG:) Rx .............................................................................................................. 7–15 7.2.3.3 (CONFIG:) Mode ......................................................................................................... 7–23 7.2.3.4 (CONFIG:) AUPC ........................................................................................................ 7–25 7.2.3.5 (CONFIG:) Transec ..................................................................................................... 7–28 7.2.3.6 (CONFIG:) AntHndOvr ................................................................................................ 7–28 7.2.3.7 (CONFIG:) Ref ............................................................................................................ 7–28 7.2.3.8 (CONFIG:) Mask ......................................................................................................... 7–29 7.2.3.9 (CONFIG:) Reset......................................................................................................... 7–29 7.2.3.10 (CONFIG:) Remote ..................................................................................................... 7–30

7.2.3.10.1 (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP .................................................... 7–32 7.2.3.10.2 (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr ................................... 7–35

7.2.4 (SELECT:) Monitor Menu Branch ........................................................................................... 7–37



7.2.4.1 (Monitor:) Alarms ......................................................................................................... 7–37 7.2.4.2 (Monitor:) Event-Log ................................................................................................... 7–40 7.2.4.3 (Monitor:) Rx-Params .................................................................................................. 7–41 7.2.4.4 (Monitor:) CnC (DoubleTalk® Carrier-in-Carrier®) ...................................................... 7–41 7.2.4.5 Monitor: Stats (Statistics) ............................................................................................. 7–42 7.2.4.6 Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics ...................................................................................... 7–42

7.2.5 (SELECT:) Test Menu Branch ................................................................................................. 7–43 7.2.5.1 (TEST:) Carrier ............................................................................................................ 7–43 7.2.5.2 (TEST:) Loopback........................................................................................................ 7–43 7.2.5.3 (TEST:) BERT .............................................................................................................. 7–44 7.2.5.4 (TEST:) LampTest........................................................................................................ 7–44

7.2.6 (SELECT:) Save/Load Menu Branch ...................................................................................... 7–45 7.2.7 (SELECT:) Utility Menu Branch ............................................................................................... 7–46

7.2.7.1 (UTIL:) RT-Clk ............................................................................................................. 7–46 7.2.7.2 (UTIL:) RefAdjust......................................................................................................... 7–46 7.2.7.3 (UTIL:) ID ..................................................................................................................... 7–46 7.2.7.4 (UTIL:) Display ............................................................................................................ 7–46 7.2.7.5 (UTIL:) Temp ............................................................................................................... 7–46 7.2.7.6 (UTIL:) Agc (Automatic Gain Control) ......................................................................... 7–47 7.2.7.7 (UTIL:) Alarm ............................................................................................................... 7–47 7.2.7.8 (UTIL:) PwrCal ............................................................................................................. 7–47 7.2.7.9 (UTIL:) Firmware ........................................................................................................ 7–47 7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST ............................................................................................................... 7–49

7.2.7.10.1 Enter Modem Code (FAST Activation Procedure) ................................................... 7–50 7.2.7.10.2 FAST Demo Mode ................................................................................................... 7–51

CHAPTER 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION ....................................................................... 8–1 8.1 Ethernet Management Interfaces & Protocols ......................................................................... 8–1

8.1.1 Secure Ethernet Management Interfaces ................................................................................. 8–2 8.1.1.1 Base Modem Interface .................................................................................................. 8–2 8.1.1.2 Optional NP Interface Module ....................................................................................... 8–3 8.1.1.3 Base Modem + Optional NP Interface + Optional TRANSEC Module .......................... 8–4

8.2 SNMP Interface ............................................................................................................................ 8–6 8.2.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files .............................................................................. 8–6 8.2.2 SNMP Community Strings ........................................................................................................ 8–7 8.2.3 SNMP Traps .............................................................................................................................. 8–7 8.2.4 SNMPv3 (Base Modem) ........................................................................................................... 8–8

8.3 Telnet Interface .......................................................................................................................... 8–10 8.3.1 Using HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation ................................................... 8–10

8.3.1.1 Configure HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation ................................. 8–11 8.4 Secure Shell (SSH) Interface .................................................................................................... 8–13

8.4.1 Configure a SSH CLI Session ................................................................................................ 8–13

CHAPTER 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION ....................................................... 9–1 9.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 9–1

9.1.1 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 9–1 9.2 Base Modem HTTP Interface ...................................................................................................... 9–2

9.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces ............................................... 9–2 9.2.2 HTTP Interface User Login ....................................................................................................... 9–2 9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features .......................................................................................................... 9–4

9.2.3.1 Page Navigation ............................................................................................................ 9–4 9.2.3.2 Page Sections ............................................................................................................... 9–4 9.2.3.3 Action Buttons ............................................................................................................... 9–5 9.2.3.4 Drop-down Lists ............................................................................................................ 9–5 9.2.3.5 Text or Data Entry .......................................................................................................... 9–5



9.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 9–6 9.3 HTTP Interface Page Examples ................................................................................................. 9–7

9.3.1 Home ........................................................................................................................................ 9–7 9.3.1.1 Home | Home ................................................................................................................ 9–7 9.3.1.2 Home | Contact ............................................................................................................. 9–8

9.3.2 Administration ........................................................................................................................... 9–9 9.3.2.1 Admin | Access .............................................................................................................. 9–9 9.3.2.2 Admin | Remote ........................................................................................................... 9–10

9.3.3 Configuration Modem ............................................................................................................. 9–11 9.3.3.1 Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config) ........................................................................ 9–11 9.3.3.2 Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities) ...................................................................... 9–12 9.3.3.3 Config Mdm | Page 3 (Antenna Handover FAST Option) ........................................... 9–13 9.3.3.4 Config Mdm | CnC (FAST Option) ............................................................................... 9–13 9.3.3.5 Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Option) ...................................................................... 9–14 9.3.3.6 Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) .............................................. 9–15

9.3.4 Stats (Statistics) Pages ........................................................................................................... 9–16 9.3.4.1 Stats | Modem Status .................................................................................................. 9–16 9.3.4.2 Stats | Event Log ......................................................................................................... 9–17 9.3.4.3 Stats | Statistics ........................................................................................................... 9–17 9.3.4.4 Stats | Config Log ........................................................................................................ 9–18 9.3.4.5 Stats | Router Stats ...................................................................................................... 9–19 9.3.4.6 Stats | Ether Stats ........................................................................................................ 9–21

9.3.5 Maint (Maintenance)| Unit Info Page ...................................................................................... 9–22

CHAPTER 10. SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL .................................................................................... 10–1 10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 10–1 10.2 Remote Control Protocol and Structure ................................................................................. 10–1

10.2.1 EIA-232 ................................................................................................................................... 10–1 10.2.2 EIA-485 ................................................................................................................................... 10–2 10.2.3 Basic Serial Protocol ............................................................................................................... 10–2 10.2.4 Packet Structure...................................................................................................................... 10–3

10.2.4.1 Start of Packet ............................................................................................................. 10–3 10.2.4.2 Target Address ............................................................................................................ 10–4 10.2.4.3 Address Delimiter ........................................................................................................ 10–4 10.2.4.4 Instruction Code .......................................................................................................... 10–4 10.2.4.5 Instruction Code Qualifier ............................................................................................ 10–4

10.2.4.5.1 Controller-to-Target Rules ........................................................................................ 10–4 10.2.4.5.2 Target-to-Controller Rules ........................................................................................ 10–5

10.2.4.6 Optional Message Arguments ..................................................................................... 10–6 10.2.4.7 End of Packet .............................................................................................................. 10–6

10.3 Remote Commands and Queries............................................................................................. 10–7 10.3.1 Table Indexes .......................................................................................................................... 10–7 10.3.2 Initial Setup – Priority Commands and Queries .................................................................... 10–10 10.3.3 Modulator (Tx) Commands and Queries .............................................................................. 10–12 10.3.4 Demodulator (Rx) Commands and Queries ......................................................................... 10–20 10.3.5 Modem (Unit) Commands and Queries ................................................................................ 10–30 10.3.6 Bulk Configuration Commands and Queries ........................................................................ 10–47 10.3.7 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands and Queries ..................................... 10–51 10.3.8 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands and Queries ............................................................. 10–58 10.3.9 G.703 Interface Commands and Queries ............................................................................. 10–59 10.3.10 Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands and Queries ................................................ 10–61 10.3.11 TRANSEC Module Interface Commands and Queries......................................................... 10–63



APPENDIX A. TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................................................A–1 A.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... A–1 A.2 System Checkout ....................................................................................................................... A–1

A.2.1 Interface Checkout .................................................................................................................... A–2 A.2.2 Modulator Checkout .................................................................................................................. A–3 A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout ............................................................................................................. A–6

A.3 Fault Isolation ............................................................................................................................. A–9 A.4 System Faults/Alarms .............................................................................................................. A–10 A.5 LED Indicator Faults ................................................................................................................ A–12

APPENDIX B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES ...................................................................................B–1 B.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... B–1 B.2 Modes .......................................................................................................................................... B–2

B.2.1 OM-73 Mode ............................................................................................................................. B–2 B.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode ......................................................................................................... B–2 B.2.3 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential .................................................................................... B–4 B.2.4 IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates ................................................................................ B–5 B.2.5 IESS-308 Mode – Extended ..................................................................................................... B–8 B.2.6 IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network) ...................................................................... B–10 B.2.7 IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates ......................................................................................... B–11 B.2.8 Turbo Code Mode ................................................................................................................... B–11 B.2.9 16-QAM Mode ......................................................................................................................... B–12 B.2.10 AUPC Mode ............................................................................................................................ B–12 B.2.11 AUPC Mode – Sequential ....................................................................................................... B–13 B.2.12 AUPC Mode – Turbo ............................................................................................................... B–14 B.2.13 LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL) ................................................................................. B–14 B.2.14 LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL) ............................................................................................. B–15 B.2.15 LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP) ................................................................................... B–15

B.3 Clocking Options ..................................................................................................................... B–16 B.3.1 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master ................................................................................................ B–16 B.3.2 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave .................................................................................................. B–18

B.4 Buffering ................................................................................................................................... B–20 B.4.1 Buffer Size .............................................................................................................................. B–22

B.4.1.1 Doppler ........................................................................................................................ B–22 B.4.1.2 Plesiochronous ............................................................................................................ B–23 B.4.1.3 Frame / Multiframe Length .......................................................................................... B–24

B.4.1.3.1 Multiples of the Frame Length ................................................................................. B–24 B.4.1.3.2 Total Buffer Length ................................................................................................... B–24 B.4.1.3.3 Converting Between Bits and Seconds ................................................................... B–24

APPENDIX C. MODEM OPTIONS .......................................................................................................C–1 C.1 Forward Error Correction Options ........................................................................................... C–1 C.2 Viterbi .......................................................................................................................................... C–1 C.3 Trellis Coding (FAST Option) .................................................................................................... C–2 C.4 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec ..................................................................................................... C–3 C.5 Closed Network Mode ................................................................................................................ C–4 C.6 Turbo Product Codec ................................................................................................................. C–5 C.7 Sequential (FAST Option) .......................................................................................................... C–6 C.8 Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) Coding (FAST Option) ..................................................... C–7

C.8.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................C–7 C.8.2 LDPC versus TPC .....................................................................................................................C–8

C.9 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (FAST Option) ............................................................... C–10



APPENDIX D. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES .................................................................D–1 D.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... D–1 D.2 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module ............................................................................. D–2

D.2.1 Physical Description..................................................................................................................D–2 D.2.2 “J1” Connector Pinout ...............................................................................................................D–3 D.2.3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................D–4

D.2.3.1 General Specifications ..................................................................................................D–4 D.2.3.2 Monitor & Control ..........................................................................................................D–5 D.2.3.3 Physical and Environmental ..........................................................................................D–6

D.2.4 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation ...................................D–7 D.2.4.1.1 GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure ...............................................................D–7 D.2.4.1.2 GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure ............................................................D–7

D.3 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Data Interface Module ............................................................................... D–8 D.3.1 Physical Description..................................................................................................................D–8

D.3.1.1 G.703 Balanced “J1 | BAL DATA” Connector (DB-15F) ................................................D–9 D.3.1.2 G.703 Unbalanced “J2” through “J4” BNC Connectors ...............................................D–10

D.3.2 Specifications ..........................................................................................................................D–10 D.3.2.1 General Specifications ................................................................................................D–10 D.3.2.2 Interfaces ..................................................................................................................... D–11 D.3.2.3 Physical and Environmental ........................................................................................ D–11

D.3.3 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation ............................................D–12 D.3.3.1 G.703 Interface Module Removal Procedure ..............................................................D–12 D.3.3.2 G.703 Interface Module Installation Procedure ...........................................................D–13

D.4 Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module ................................................................ D–14 D.4.1 Physical Description................................................................................................................D–14

D.4.1.1 “J1” Connector Pinout (DB-25F) .................................................................................D–15 D.4.2 Specifications ..........................................................................................................................D–16

D.4.2.1 General Specifications ................................................................................................D–16 D.4.2.2 Physical & Environmental ...........................................................................................D–16

D.4.3 LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation ..................................................................D–17 D.4.3.1 LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure ..............................................................D–17 D.4.3.2 LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure ...........................................................D–18

APPENDIX E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE ......................... E–1 E.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... E–1 E.2 Functional Hardware Description .............................................................................................. E–3

E.2.1 Connector Pinout ...................................................................................................................... E–4 E.3 Interface Specifications .............................................................................................................. E–5

E.3.1 Physical Description.................................................................................................................. E–5 E.3.2 General Specifications .............................................................................................................. E–5

E.4 NP Interface Module Removal and Installation ........................................................................ E–6 E.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal .................................................................................................. E–6 E.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation ............................................................................................... E–6

E.5 Using Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Mode ......................................................................... E–7 E.6 Important Operational Considerations ..................................................................................... E–8 E.7 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface ...................................................................... E–9

E.7.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction ......................................................................................... E–9 E.7.1.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces ...................... E–9

E.7.1.1.1 Secure Management – NP Interface Only ............................................................... E–10 E.7.1.1.2 Secure Management – NP Interface with TRANSEC Module Interface .................. E–11

E.7.2 User Login ............................................................................................................................... E–12 E.7.3 HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features ..................................................................... E–14 E.7.4 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... E–14 E.7.5 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions ........................................................................................... E–15

E.7.5.1 Info (Information) ......................................................................................................... E–15



E.7.5.1.1 Info | Home .............................................................................................................. E–15 E.7.5.1.2 Info | Contact ............................................................................................................ E–16 E.7.5.1.3 Info | Log Off ............................................................................................................ E–17

E.7.5.2 Admin (Administration) ................................................................................................ E–18 E.7.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option) .................................................................... E–18 E.7.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features ............................................................................................ E–20 E.7.5.2.3 Admin | Security (Account Information) ................................................................... E–21 E.7.5.2.4 Admin | SNMP ......................................................................................................... E–23 E.7.5.2.5 Admin | Upgrade ...................................................................................................... E–25 E.7.5.2.6 Admin | Defaults ....................................................................................................... E–26 E.7.5.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time) ................................................................................. E–27 E.7.5.2.8 Admin | Event Log .................................................................................................... E–28 E.7.5.2.9 Admin | Reboot ........................................................................................................ E–29

E.7.5.3 Modem Pages ............................................................................................................. E–30 E.7.5.3.1 Modem | Config (Modem Configuration).................................................................. E–30 E.7.5.3.2 Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) ........................................................................... E–35 E.7.5.3.3 Modem | Events (Modem Events Log) .................................................................... E–36 E.7.5.3.4 Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) .................................................................... E–37 E.7.5.3.5 Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) ............................................................................. E–38

E.7.5.4 LAN ............................................................................................................................. E–39 E.7.5.4.1 LAN | Interface ......................................................................................................... E–39 E.7.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports ................................................................................................ E–42 E.7.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) ........................................................................................... E–43

E.7.5.5 WAN Pages ................................................................................................................. E–44 E.7.5.5.1 WAN | QoS (Quality of Service) ............................................................................... E–44 E.7.5.5.2 WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics) ...................................................... E–45 E.7.5.5.3 WAN | Loopback Test............................................................................................... E–46

E.7.5.6 Routing ........................................................................................................................ E–47 E.7.5.6.1 Routing | Routes ...................................................................................................... E–47 E.7.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF ........................................................................................................ E–49 E.7.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP ........................................................................................................ E–51

E.7.5.7 Stats (Statistics) ........................................................................................................... E–53 E.7.5.7.1 Stats | Ethernet Tx ................................................................................................... E–53 E.7.5.7.2 Stats | Ethernet Rx ................................................................................................... E–55 E.7.5.7.3 Stats | IP ................................................................................................................... E–57 E.7.5.7.4 Stats | WAN .............................................................................................................. E–60 E.7.5.7.5 Stats | Clear All ......................................................................................................... E–62

E.7.5.8 Vipersat Pages ............................................................................................................ E–63 E.7.5.9 Redundancy Page ....................................................................................................... E–64 E.7.5.10 Save ............................................................................................................................ E–65

E.8 Network Processor (NP) Telnet/SSH CLI Interface Operation ..............................................E–66 E.8.1 Important Operational Considerations .................................................................................... E–66

E.8.1.1 Telnet User Access ...................................................................................................... E–67 E.8.1.1.1 Telnet Operational Guidelines .................................................................................. E–67

E.8.1.2 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access ................................................................................ E–67 E.8.1.3 Using the Command Line Interface............................................................................. E–68

E.8.1.3.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality ............................................................... E–68 E.8.1.3.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ....................... E–68

E.8.2 Command Line Interface Pages ............................................................................................. E–70 E.8.2.1 Main Menu ................................................................................................................... E–70 E.8.2.2 Administration Menu (A) .............................................................................................. E–72

E.8.2.2.1 Administration Menu | Information (I) ....................................................................... E–74 E.8.2.2.2 Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code (F) ....................................................... E–75 E.8.2.2.3 Administration Menu | Security (A) .......................................................................... E–76 E.8.2.2.4 Administration Menu | SNMP (P) ............................................................................. E–77 E.8.2.2.5 Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults (D) ............................................... E–77



E.8.2.2.6 Administration Menu | Set Time (T) ......................................................................... E–78 E.8.2.2.7 Administration Menu | Event Log (E) ....................................................................... E–79 E.8.2.2.8 Administration Menu | Reboot Now Prompt (R) ...................................................... E–80

E.8.2.3 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) (M) .................................................... E–81 E.8.2.3.1 Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu (M) ............................................. E–82 E.8.2.3.2 Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu (D) ......................................... E–84 E.8.2.3.3 Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor (R) ............................................. E–86 E.8.2.3.4 Satellite Modem Configuration | Events (E) ............................................................. E–87 E.8.2.3.5 Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats (T) ................................................................ E–88 E.8.2.3.6 Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility (U) ............................................................... E–89

E.8.2.4 LAN Menu (N) ............................................................................................................. E–90 E.8.2.4.1 LAN Menu | Interface (I) .......................................................................................... E–91 E.8.2.4.2 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu (E) ...................................................................... E–92 E.8.2.4.3 LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A) ...................................................................................... E–93

E.8.2.5 WAN Menu (W) ........................................................................................................... E–94 E.8.2.6 Routing Table (R) ........................................................................................................ E–95 E.8.2.7 OSPF Configuration (F) .............................................................................................. E–96 E.8.2.8 IGMP Configuration (I) ................................................................................................ E–97 E.8.2.9 Vipersat Configuration (V) ........................................................................................... E–98 E.8.2.10 Redundancy Configuration (E) .................................................................................... E–99 E.8.2.11 Operations & Maintenance (O) ................................................................................. E–100

E.8.2.11.1 Operations & Maintenance | Statistics (T) ............................................................. E–101

APPENDIX F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION .......................................................... F–1 F.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... F–1 F.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface .......................................................................................... F–2

F.2.1 HTTPS Interface Introduction ................................................................................................... F–2 F.2.1.1 Secure Management – TRANSEC Module PLUS NP Interface ................................... F–2

F.2.2 User Login ................................................................................................................................. F–3 F.2.2.1 Interface Instructions for Older Browsers ...................................................................... F–5

F.2.3 HTTPS Interface – Operational Features ................................................................................. F–5 F.2.4 HTTPS Menu Tree .................................................................................................................... F–6

F.3 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions .......................................................... F–7 F.3.1 Configure Pages ....................................................................................................................... F–7 F.3.2 Monitor Page ........................................................................................................................... F–13 F.3.3 Log .......................................................................................................................................... F–15 F.3.4 Firmware ................................................................................................................................. F–17 F.3.5 Upload ..................................................................................................................................... F–19

F.4 TRANSEC Module Update Procedure ..................................................................................... F–20 F.5 Command Line Interface (CLI) ................................................................................................. F–25

F.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. F–25 F.5.1.1 Secure Shell (SSH) User Access ................................................................................ F–26

F.5.2 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality .............................................................................. F–27 F.5.2.1 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features ........................... F–27

F.5.3 Command Line Interface Pages ............................................................................................. F–29 F.5.3.1 Main Menu ................................................................................................................... F–29 F.5.3.2 Configuration Menu [C] ............................................................................................... F–30

F.5.3.2.1 Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu [A] ...................................................... F–31 F.5.3.2.2 Configuration | Future Encryption Key [F] ............................................................... F–32 F.5.3.2.3 Configuration | Encryption [E] .................................................................................. F–33 F.5.3.2.4 Configuration | Network [N] ...................................................................................... F–34 F.5.3.2.5 Configuration | Crypto Officer Credentials [C] ......................................................... F–35 F.5.3.2.6 Configuration | Key Generation Method Menu [K] ................................................... F–36 F.5.3.2.7 Configuration | SSH Console Menu [S] ................................................................... F–37 F.5.3.2.8 Configuration | HTTPS Configuration [H]................................................................. F–38



F.5.3.3 Module Status [M] ........................................................................................................ F–39 F.5.3.4 Event Log [E] ............................................................................................................... F–40 F.5.3.5 Firmware [F] ................................................................................................................ F–41

APPENDIX G. OPTIONAL DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-CARRIER ................................................. G–1 G.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... G–1

G.1.1 What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier? .................................................................................... G–2 G.2 Application Requirements ......................................................................................................... G–3

G.2.1 Operational Recommendations ............................................................................................... G–4 G.3 System Functionality and Operational Considerations ......................................................... G–6

G.3.1 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process ................................................................ G–8 G.3.2 Margin Requirements............................................................................................................. G–10 G.3.3 Carrier-in-Carrier Latency ...................................................................................................... G–10 G.3.4 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design ................................................................................................ G–10

G.3.4.1 Symmetric Data Rate Link .......................................................................................... G–11 G.3.4.2 Asymmetric Data Rate Link ........................................................................................ G–13 G.3.4.3 Power Limited Links ................................................................................................... G–15

G.3.5 Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment ............................................................... G–17 G.3.6 Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance ............................................................................. G–18

G.4 Operational References ........................................................................................................... G–20 G.4.1 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation ............................................................................. G–20 G.4.2 Estimating PSD Ratio ............................................................................................................ G–21

G.4.2.1 Estimating PSD Ratio from LST ................................................................................. G–21 G.4.2.2 Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster ....................................................................... G–22 G.4.2.3 Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer ....................................................... G–22

G.5 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications ........................................................................ G–23 G.6 Carrier-in-Carrier Summary ..................................................................................................... G–24 G.7 Glossary of Terms .................................................................................................................... G–24

APPENDIX H. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES ...................................................H–1 H.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... H–1 H.2 OSPF v2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network.................................................................. H–2

H.2.1 Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview .........................................................................H–2 H.2.2 OSPF Basics .............................................................................................................................H–3 H.2.3 OSPF Challenges .....................................................................................................................H–3 H.2.4 OSPF Maritime Use Cases .......................................................................................................H–3

H.2.4.1 OSPF Use Case: At Shore ............................................................................................H–4 H.2.4.2 OSPF Use Case: At Sea ...............................................................................................H–5

H.2.5 OSPF Deployment Solution ......................................................................................................H–6 H.2.5.1 OSPF Test Network .......................................................................................................H–6 H.2.5.2 OSPF Test Solution .......................................................................................................H–7 H.2.5.3 OSPFv2 Summary ........................................................................................................H–8

H.3 Network Processor (NP) Interface Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Mode ........................ H–9 H.3.1 BPM Mode Functional Description ...........................................................................................H–9

H.3.1.1 Glossary of Terms ....................................................................................................... H–11 H.3.2 BPM Mode Configuration ........................................................................................................H–12 H.3.3 BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks ...............................................................................H–13 H.3.4 Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration ......................................H–15 H.3.5 Remote Data Traffic Handling .................................................................................................H–16



APPENDIX I. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS .................................................. I–1 I.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... I–1 I.2 Processing Flow and Symbol Rate Calculation ........................................................................ I–2 I.3 Sources of Overhead ................................................................................................................... I–4

I.3.1 Framing Overhead ..................................................................................................................... I–4 I.3.1.1 Reed–Solomon/Outside FEC Codec Framing Factor .................................................... I–4 I.3.1.2 AUPC/ASYNC (ESC) and ACPC Channel Framing ....................................................... I–4 I.3.1.3 TRANSEC Framing ........................................................................................................ I–4

I.3.2 Total Framing Overhead ............................................................................................................. I–5 I.3.3 IP Traffic Encapsulation Overhead ............................................................................................. I–5

I.4 Product Support ........................................................................................................................... I–6



LIST OF TABLES Table 1-1. Modem Switches .................................................................................................................... 1–11 Table 1-2. Front Panel Item Descriptions ................................................................................................ 1–14 Table 1-3. Rear Panel Item Descriptions ................................................................................................ 1–15 Table 2-1. Summary of Environmental and Physical Specifications ......................................................... 2–1 Table 2-2. Summary of General Specifications ......................................................................................... 2–2 Table 2-3. Summary of Modulator Specifications ...................................................................................... 2–3 Table 2-4. Summary of Demodulator Specifications ................................................................................. 2–4 Table 2-5. Summary of Coding Options .................................................................................................... 2–4 Table 2-6. Summary of Open Network Options ........................................................................................ 2–5 Table 2-7. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements ................................................................ 2–5 Table 2-8. Doppler Requirements ............................................................................................................. 2–6 Table 2-9. Data Quality Performance Specification .................................................................................. 2–6 Table 2-10. Viterbi Decoder BER .............................................................................................................. 2–7 Table 2-11. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance ................... 2–7 Table 2-12. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance .............................................................................. 2–7 Table 2-13. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance ............................................ 2–8 Table 2-14. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance ........................................ 2–8 Table 2-15. TPC Decoder BER Performance ........................................................................................... 2–8 Table 2-16. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance ................................ 2–9 Table 2-17. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2...................................................... 2–10 Table 2-18. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance ............................................................................... 2–11 Table 2-19. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance .................................................................................. 2–11 Table 2-20. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance ................................................................................. 2–11 Table 3-1. Optional Rear Support Bracket Kit Parts List ........................................................................... 3–4 Table 9-1. Router Stats Page – Drop-down “Feature Select” Items ........................................................ 9–20 Table 10-1. Controller-to-Target Packet Structure ................................................................................... 10–3 Table 10-2. Target-to-Controller Packet Structure ................................................................................... 10–3 Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0Chart .......................................................................................... A–4 Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree ...........................................................................................................A–10 Table C-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary ..................................................................................................... C–2 Table C-2. 8-PSK/TCM Coding Summary ................................................................................................ C–3 Table C-3. Open Network Modes ............................................................................................................. C–4 Table C-4. Concatenated RS Coding Summary ...................................................................................... C–4 Table C-5. Available TPC Modes ............................................................................................................. C–5 Table C-6. Sequential Decoding Summary .............................................................................................. C–6 Table D-1. “J1” Connector Pinout ............................................................................................................. D–3 Table D-2. “J1 | BAL. DATA” DB-15F Connector Pinout .......................................................................... D–9 Table D-3. G.703 Unbalanced Connectors ............................................................................................. D–10 Table D-4. “J1” DB-25F Connector Pinout ............................................................................................. D–15 Table E-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical) ............................................................................... E–4 Table E-2. HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree ......................................................................................................E–14 Table F-1. Event Log Message Types ..................................................................................................... F–16 Table F-2. Main Menu Options ................................................................................................................ F–29 Table F-3. Configuration Menu Options .................................................................................................. F–30 Table F-4. Active Encryption Key Menu Options ..................................................................................... F–31 Table F-5. Future Encryption Key Menu Options .................................................................................... F–32 Table F-6. Encryption Menu Options ....................................................................................................... F–33 Table F-7. Network Menu Options .......................................................................................................... F–34 Table F-8. Crypto Officer Credentials Menu Options .............................................................................. F–35 Table F-9. Key Generation Menu Options ............................................................................................... F–36 Table F-10. SSH Console Menu Options ................................................................................................ F–37 Table F-11. HTTPS Menu Options .......................................................................................................... F–38 Table F-12. Event Log Menu Options ..................................................................................................... F–40



Table F-13. Firmware (Unit Info) Menu Options ...................................................................................... F–41 Table G-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ......................................................... G–8

LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem .................................................................................................. 1–1 Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 1–2 Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope ...................................................................................... 1–13 Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View ................................................................ 1–14 Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Rear Panel View ................................................................. 1–15 Figure 3-1. Unpack and Inspect the Shipment .......................................................................................... 3–1 Figure 3-2. Unit Rack Enclosure Installation ............................................................................................. 3–3 Figure 3-3. Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit Installation ..................................................................... 3–4 Figure 3-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation ................................................................... 3–6 Figure 4-1. Coaxial Connector Examples ................................................................................................. 4–2 Figure 4-2. D-Subminiature Connector Examples .................................................................................... 4–4 Figure 4-3. RJ-45/RJ-48 Connector Example ........................................................................................... 4–4 Figure 4-4. USB Connector Examples ...................................................................................................... 4–5 Figure 4-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View ................................................................................................. 4–6 Figure 4-6. AC Fuse Replacement .......................................................................................................... 4–13 Figure 4-7. AC Power to the Unit ............................................................................................................ 4–14 Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View .................................................................. 7–1 Figure 8-1. IP Traffic Isolation When Using Bridge Modes ....................................................................... 8–4 Figure 8-2. Telnet Interface Example – Windows Command-line ........................................................... 8–10 Figure 8-3. Telnet Interface Example – HyperTerminal ........................................................................... 8–11 Figure 8-4. Configure HyperTerminal ...................................................................................................... 8–11 Figure 8-5. Configure PuTTY for CLI Operations ................................................................................... 8–13 Figure 8-6. CLI Session Examples ......................................................................................................... 8–14 Figure 9-1. HTTP Interface Page Example ............................................................................................ 9–3 Figure 9-2. Home | Home Page ................................................................................................................ 9–7 Figure 9-3. Home | Contact Page ............................................................................................................. 9–8 Figure 9-4. Admin | Access Page ........................................................................................................... 9–9 Figure 9-5. Admin | Remote Page ........................................................................................................... 9–10 Figure 9-6. Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config) Page ....................................................................... 9–11 Figure 9-7. Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities) Page ...................................................................... 9–12 Figure 9-8. Config Mdm | Page 3 (Modem Config/Antenna Handover) Page ........................................ 9–13 Figure 9-9. Config Mdm | CnC Page ....................................................................................................... 9–13 Figure 9-10. Config Mdm | Spreading Page ............................................................................................ 9–14 Figure 9-11. Config Mdm | AUPC Page .................................................................................................. 9–15 Figure 9-12. Stats | Modem Status Page ................................................................................................ 9–16 Figure 9-13. Stats | Event Log Page ....................................................................................................... 9–17 Figure 9-14. Stats | Statistics Page ......................................................................................................... 9–17 Figure 9-15. Stats | Config Log Page ...................................................................................................... 9–18 Figure 9-16. Stats | Router Stats Page .................................................................................................... 9–19 Figure 9-17. Router Statistics Drop-down List ........................................................................................ 9–19 Figure 9-18. Stats | Ether Stats Page ...................................................................................................... 9–21 Figure 9-19. UDP Stats Statistics Example ............................................................................................. 9–21 Figure 9-20. Maint | Unit Info Page ......................................................................................................... 9–22 Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup ....................................................................................................... A–2 Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise ................................................................................... A–5 Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise .............................................................................. A–5 Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – with Noise ........................................................................... A–7



Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – without Noise ..................................................................... A–8 Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram ................................................................B–17 Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram ..................................................................B–19 Figure B-3. Clock Slip .............................................................................................................................B–20 Figure B-4. Doppler Shift .........................................................................................................................B–21 Figure C-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit) ........................................... C–8 Figure D-1. SLM-5650A Data Interface Module Slot (Empty) .................................................................. D–1 Figure D-2. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11984) ..................................................... D–2 Figure D-3. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................. D–3 Figure D-4. GbE Interface Module Removal or Installation ..................................................................... D–7 Figure D-5. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown) .................................................... D–8 Figure D-6. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram ...................................................... D–8 Figure D-7. G.703 Interface Module Removal or Installation ................................................................. D–12 Figure D-8. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1) ........................................ D–14 Figure D-9. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................... D–14 Figure D-10. LVDS Interface Module Removal or Installation ............................................................... D–17 Figure E-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module ............................................................................ E–1 Figure E-2. NP Interface Block Diagram ................................................................................................... E–3 Figure E-3. NP Interface Module Removal or Installation ......................................................................... E–6 Figure E-4. Info | Home Page .................................................................................................................E–15 Figure E-5. Info | Contact Page ...............................................................................................................E–16 Figure E-6. Info | Logoff Page .................................................................................................................E–17 Figure E-7. Admin | Vipersat Mode Page ................................................................................................E–18 Figure E-8. Admin | FAST Features Page ...............................................................................................E–20 Figure E-9. Admin | Security (Management Security) Page ...................................................................E–21 Figure E-10. Admin | SNMP Page ...........................................................................................................E–23 Figure E-11. Admin | Upgrade Page .......................................................................................................E–25 Figure E-12. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) Page ...................................................E–26 Figure E-13. Admin | Time (Date & Time) Page ......................................................................................E–27 Figure E-14. Admin | Event Log Page .....................................................................................................E–28 Figure E-15. Admin | Reboot Page .........................................................................................................E–29 Figure E-16. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) Page ..................................................................E–30 Figure E-17. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) Page ............................................................................E–35 Figure E-18. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) Page ......................................................................E–36 Figure E-19. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) Page .....................................................................E–37 Figure E-20. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) Page ..............................................................................E–38 Figure E-21. LAN | Interface Page ..........................................................................................................E–39 Figure E-22. LAN | Ethernet Ports Page .................................................................................................E–42 Figure E-23. LAN | ARP Page .................................................................................................................E–43 Figure E-24. WAN | Quality of Service Page ..........................................................................................E–44 Figure E-25. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics Page ...........................................................................E–45 Figure E-26. WAN | Loopback Test Page ...............................................................................................E–46 Figure E-27. Routing | Routes Page .......................................................................................................E–47 Figure E-28. Routing | OSPF Page .........................................................................................................E–49 Figure E-29. Routing | IGMP Page .........................................................................................................E–51 Figure E-30. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics Page .....................................................................................E–53 Figure E-31. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics Page .....................................................................................E–55 Figure E-32. Stats | IP Statistics Page ....................................................................................................E–57 Figure E-33. Stats | WAN Statistics Page................................................................................................E–60 Figure E-34. Stats | Clear All Statistics Page ..........................................................................................E–62 Figure E-35. Vipersat Pages ...................................................................................................................E–63 Figure E-36. Redundancy Page ..............................................................................................................E–64 Figure E-37. Save Page ..........................................................................................................................E–65 Figure F-1. Security Alert Page ................................................................................................................. F–3 Figure F-2. TRANSEC Login Page ........................................................................................................... F–4 Figure F-3. Tools | Internet Options | Advanced | Security Settings .......................................................... F–5



Figure F-4. Configure Page....................................................................................................................... F–7 Figure F-5. Monitor Page ........................................................................................................................ F–13 Figure F-6. Log Page .............................................................................................................................. F–15 Figure F-7. Event Log Page Cleared ...................................................................................................... F–16 Figure F-8. Firmware Information Page .................................................................................................. F–17 Figure F-9. Upload Page ......................................................................................................................... F–19 Figure F-10. PuTTY Examples ................................................................................................................ F–26 Figure F-11. Main Menu Page ................................................................................................................. F–29 Figure F-12. Configuration Menu Page ................................................................................................... F–30 Figure F-13. Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu Page ............................................................. F–31 Figure F-14. Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu Page ............................................................ F–32 Figure F-15. Configuration | Encryption Menu Page............................................................................... F–33 Figure F-16. Configuration | Network Menu Page .................................................................................. F–34 Figure F-17. Configuration | Crypto Officer Credentials Menu Page ...................................................... F–35 Figure F-18. Key Generation Menu Page ............................................................................................... F–36 Figure F-19. Configuration | SSH Console Menu Page .......................................................................... F–37 Figure F-20. Configuration | HTTPS Menu Page .................................................................................... F–38 Figure F-21. SSL Certificate Reset ......................................................................................................... F–38 Figure F-22. Module Status (Encryption Parameters) Page ................................................................... F–39 Figure F-23. Event Log Menu Page ........................................................................................................ F–40 Figure F-24. Firmware (Unit Info) Menu Page ........................................................................................ F–41 Figure G-1. Conceptual Block Diagram ................................................................................................... G–4 Figure G-2. Conventional FDMA Link ...................................................................................................... G–6 Figure G-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ......................................... G–7 Figure G-4. Duplex Link Optimization ...................................................................................................... G–7 Figure G-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals ................................................................................... G–9 Figure G-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram ............................................................ G–9 Figure H-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network...................................................................................... H–2 Figure H-2. OSPF Support at Shore ........................................................................................................ H–4 Figure H-3. OSPF Support at Sea ........................................................................................................... H–5 Figure H-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network ............................................................................................ H–6 Figure H-5. OSPF Test Solution ............................................................................................................... H–7 Figure H-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode ............................................................................ H–9 Figure H-7. Hub Data Traffic Network .................................................................................................... H–13 Figure H-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages ................................................... H–15 Figure H-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network ................................................................................ H–16 Figure I-1. SLM-5650A – Feature Block Diagram ...................................................................................... I–2



Acronym List Acronym Description

AC Alternating Current ACI Adjacent Channel Interface

ACPC Automatic CnC Power Control AGC Automatic Gain Control AO Assignment Operator

ASBR Autonomous System Boundary Router AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control

BER Bit Error Rate

BERT Bit Error Rate Test

BIST Built-in Self Test

BPM Bridge Point-to-Multipoint

BUC Block Up Converter

CDMA Code-Division Multiple Access

CLI Command Line Interface

CnC Carrier-in-Carrier

COTS Commercial Off-the-Shelf

CR Carriage Return

DC Direct Current

DCE Data Circuit-termination Equipment

DoD Department of Defense

DSCS Defense Satellite Communications System

DSSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum

DVB Digital Video Broadcast

EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ET Earth Terminal

FAST Fully Accessible System Topology

FDMA Frequency Division Mulitple Access

FEC Forward Error Correction

FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GbE Gigabit Ethernet

GBEI Gigabit Ethernet Interface



Acronym Description

HDLC High-level Data Link Control

HP High Performance

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

IAW In Accordance With

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IESS Intelsat Earth Station Standards

IF Intermediate Frequency

LAN Local Area Network

LDPC Low Density Parity Check

LED Light Emitting Diode

LL Low Latency

LVDS Low Voltage Differential

M&C Monitor and Control

MIB Management Information Base

NMS Network Management System

NP Network Processor

OID Object Identifier

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OW Order Wire

PC Personal Computer

PCB Printed Circuit Board

Pps Packets per second

QO Query Operator

QoS Quality of Service

R-S Reed-Solomon

RTS Request to Send

SCPC Single Carrier per Channel

SCT Serial Clock Transmit

SLEP Satellite Life Enhancement Program

SNMP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SSH Secure Shell

SSL Secure Sockets Layer

STDMA Space Time Division Multiple Access

TCC Turbo Convolution Codes



Acronym Description

TCM Trellis Coded Modulation

TDM Time-Division Multiplexing

TPC Turbo Product Code (or Coding)

TRANSEC Transmission Security

TTL Transistor-toTransistor Logic

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter

ULL Ultra Low Latency

USB Universal Serial Bus

VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VNMS Vipersat Network Management System

VSAT Very Small Apeture Terminal

WAN Wide Area Network

WGS Wideband Global Satcom


Preface i MN-SLM-5650A

PREFACE

About this Manual

This manual describes the installation and operation for the Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Satellite Modem. This is a document intended for the persons responsible for the operation and maintenance of the SLM-5650A.

Conventions and References

Patents and Trademarks

See all of Comtech EF Data's Patents and Patents Pending at http://patents.comtechefdata.com.

Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the trademark owners.

• DoubleTalk® is licensed from “Raytheon Applied Signal Technology”.

• DoubleTalk® is a registered trademark of “Raytheon Applied Signal Technology”.

• Carrier-in-Carrier® is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.

Related Documents

The following documents are referenced in this manual:

• Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits

• Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability and Performance Standards for SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (FDMA Operation) (dated November 2005)

• INTELSAT Earth Station Standards IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315

• EUTELSAT SMS

http://patents.comtechefdata.com/


Preface ii MN-SLM-5650A

Military Standards

References to “MIL-STD-188” apply to the 114A series (i.e., MIL-STD-188-114A), which provides electrical and functional characteristics of the unbalanced and balanced voltage digital interface circuits applicable to both long haul and tactical communications. Specifically, these references apply to the MIL-STD-188-114A electrical characteristics for a balanced voltage digital interface circuit, Type 1 generator, for the full range of data rates. For more information, refer to the Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits.

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and References

A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

A CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other unsafe practices or risks of property damage.

A NOTE: gives you important information about a task or the equipment.

A REFERENCE directs you to important operational information or details furnished elsewhere, either in the manual or in adjunct Comtech EF Data publications.

Examples of Multi-Hazard Notices

Recommended Standard Designations

The Electronic Industries Association (EIA) designations supersede the Recommended Standard (RS) designations. References to the old designations may be shown when depicting actual text (e.g., RS-232) displayed on front panel menus, Web Server pages, serial remote interfaces, Telnet Command Line Interfaces (CLIs), or unit rear panels. All other references in the manual refer to EIA designations.


Preface iii MN-SLM-5650A

You should carefully review the following information.

Safety and Compliance

Electrical Safety and Compliance

The unit complies with the EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment (Including Electrical Business Machines) safety standard.

Electrical Installation

Connect the unit to a power system that has separate ground, line and neutral conductors. Do not connect the unit without a direct connection to ground.

Class I Pluggable Equipment Type A-Protective Earthing

The cable distribution system/telecommunication network of this product relies on protective earthing and the integrity of the protective earthing must be ensured

In Finland:

"Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan"

In Norway:

“Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt”

In Sweden:

“Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag”

Galvanic Isolator Use

Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via annan utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i visa fall medfőra risk főr brand. Főr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av utrustningen till kabel-TV nät galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen och kabel-TV nätet.

Restricted Access Location

In Nordic Countries, equipotential bonding should be applied using the permanently connected ground stud by a qualified service person.


Preface iv MN-SLM-5650A

Battery Warning

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

Operating Environment

DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT IN ANY OF THESE EXTREME OPERATING CONDITIONS: • Ambient temperatures less than 0°C (32°F) or more than 50°C (122°F) for standard

unit. For units with the extended temperature option, ambient temperatures less than -32°C (-25°F) or more than 50°C (122°F).

• Precipitation, condensation, or humid atmospheres of more than 95% relative humidity.

• Unpressurized altitudes of more than 2000 metres (6561.7 feet). • Excessive dust. • Flammable gases. • Corrosive or explosive atmospheres.

European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1

Independent testing verifies that the unit complies with the European Union R&TTE Directive, its reference to EN 301 489-1 (Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters [ERM]; ElectroMagnetic Compatibility [EMC] standard for radio equipment and services, Part 1: Common technical requirements), and the Declarations of Conformity for the applicable directives, standards, and practices that follow:

European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive (2004/108/EC)

• Emissions: EN 55022 Class B – Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.

• Immunity: EN 55024 – Information Technology Equipment: Immunity Characteristics, Limits, and Methods of Measurement.

• EN 61000-3-2 – Harmonic Currents Emission • EN 61000-3-3 – Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker. • Federal Communications Commission Federal Code of Regulation FCC Part 15,

Subpart B.


Preface v MN-SLM-5650A

To ensure the unit complies with these standards, obey the following instructions::

• Use coaxial cable that is of good quality for connections to the L-Band Type ‘N’ Rx (receive) female connector.

• Use Type 'D' connectors that have back-shells with continuous metallic shielding. Type ‘D’ cabling must have a continuous outer shield (either foil or braid, or both). The shield must be bonded to the back-shell.

• Operate the unit with its cover on at all times.

European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)

Symbol Description

<HAR> Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.

CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing

ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung

International Symbols

Symbol Definition Symbol Definition

Alternating Current Protective Earth

Fuse Chassis Ground

For additional symbols, refer to Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and References listed earlier in this Preface.

European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)

This unit satisfies (with exemptions) the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EU RoHS, Directive 2002/95/EC).

!


Preface vi MN-SLM-5650A

European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (91/263/EEC)

In accordance with the European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC, the unit should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications Network.

CE Mark

Comtech EF Data declares that the unit meets the necessary requirements for the CE Mark.

Product Support

For all product support, please call:

+1.240.243.1880

+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA)

By email:

[email protected]

Comtech EF Data Headquarters

http://www.comtechefdata.com

Comtech EF Data Corp.

2114 West 7th Street

Tempe, Arizona USA 85281

+1.480.333.2200


Preface vii MN-SLM-5650A

Warranty Policy

Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a specific period from the date of shipment, and this period varies by product. In most cases, the warranty period is two years. During the warranty period, Comtech EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective. Repairs are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty, whichever is longer. Contact Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased.

For equipment under warranty, the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related customs, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the owner. Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express, Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.

All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging. Comtech EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging.

Comtech EF Data Corporation’s obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or replacement of failed parts, and the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or replaced parts.

Limitations of Warranty

The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed, altered, repaired, or misused in any way that, in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation, would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any part of the product, or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been previously approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation.

The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or the serial number of any of its parts has been altered, defaced, or removed.

The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product. The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation, such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime environments.

The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on site, or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement.

The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or products, or for any inability to use them either separate from or in combination with any other equipment or products.

A fixed charge established for each product will be imposed for all equipment returned for warranty repair where Comtech EF Data Corporation cannot identify the cause of the reported failure.


Preface viii MN-SLM-5650A

Exclusive Remedies

Comtech EF Data Corporation’s warranty, as stated is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser, lessee, or other user of Comtech EF Data Corporation’s products, the aforementioned warranty, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser, lessee, or user based upon allegations that the buyer, its agents, or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to product preference or use.

The remedies provided herein are the buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.


Introduction 1–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Overview

Figure 1-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem (Figure 1-1) satisfies the requirements for government and military communications system applications that require state-of-the-art modulation and coding techniques to optimize satellite transponder bandwidth usage, while retaining backward compatibility.

The SLM-5650A:

• Supports baseband data rates up to 155.52 Mbps, and its flexible modulation and Forward Error Correction (FEC) capabilities ensure that the throughput and BER over the satellite is optimized.

• Is compliant with the provisions of Department of Defense (DoD) Standard MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability of SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems (Frequency Division Multiple Access [FDMA] Operation).

• Is fully interoperable with legacy OM-73 modems and other Government owned Commercial Off-the-Shelf (COTS) and International Telecommunications Satellite Organization (Intelsat) compatible PSK modems.

• Can be controlled and monitored from a variety of platforms, including its own front panel controls and indicators, a co-located Personal Computer (PC), and remote control systems such as the Vipersat Network Management System (VNMS).



1.2 Functional Description

Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram

Figure 1-2 shows the functional block diagram for the SLM-5650A. The modem has been designed to accommodate a wide range of currently required features, and to support both near- and far-term advances in software-defined radio technology as well as advances in FEC technology. It is designed for installation in fixed or mobile Earth Terminal (ET) facilities (sites) using Defense Satellite Communications System III (DSCS III), DSCS III/Satellite Life Enhancement Program (SLEP), Wideband Gap filler System (WGS), and commercial satellites.

The user has the ability to:

• Add or change modular data interfaces and FEC assemblies;

• Utilize an extensive array of built-in test capabilities;

• Easily upgrade the modem’s operational capabilities in the field;

• Easily update the modem’s firmware in the field;

• Use a wide range of flexible remote control options.

As shown in Figure 1-2, the modem accepts signals from a selected digital signal source and modulates either a 70/140 MHz or L-Band Intermediate Frequency (IF) carrier with these signals. The demodulator receives the Rx signal from either the 70/140 MHz or L-Band IF input interface, then demodulates the IF carrier. Clock and data are recovered and output on a selected data interface.

The Tx and Rx functions are independent with respect to coding, interleaving, overhead, and scrambling. The modem does not allow simplex operation in the 70/140 and the L-Band IF interfaces at the same time. The modem allows duplex operation in either one of the two IF interfaces.



1.3 Product Features

The SLM-5650A incorporates the following features:

• MIL-STD-188-165A compliance (Types A, B, D, E, F)

• Intelsat IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315

• A rugged, one-rack unit (1RU) enclosure

• Low weight and low power dissipation

• Selectable 70/140 MHz or L-Band (950 to 2000 MHz) IF interfaces

• EIA-530/422 Data Interface (built-in, to 20 Mbps)

• EIA-613/HSSI Data Interface (built-in, to 51.84 Mbps)

• EIA-485/EIA-232 Interface for serial remote control

• Ethernet Interface for remote control using Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, HTTPS, and SSH

• Plug-in Data Interface supporting the optional Gigabit Ethernet, Network Processor (NP), G.703, and Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) interface modules

• Asymmetrical Loop Timing

• Data Source Bit Synchronization (Clock recovery for input data without an associated transmit clock)

• Full-featured, built-in BER test-set

• Electrical and Ethernet Rx constellation monitor

• Adaptive Equalizer for high order modulation types

• 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps (Modulation-, code rate-, and interface-dependent)

• BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, and 16QAM

• FEC Rates: 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 21/44, 5/16, 17/18, .378, .451, .541, and 1/1

• Viterbi and Reed-Solomon Codec

• Turbo Product Codec (Optional)

• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding in three block sizes: ULL, LL, and HP (optional)

• Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) (optional with LDPC)

• Sequential FEC (optional)

• Static Bridge, Router, and Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Modes (via the optional NP Interface)

• TRANSEC Encryption (optional)

• Firmware updating capability



1.3.1 Operational Features

1.3.1.1 Operating Modes

The SLM-5650A supports Closed Network, Open Network and OM-73 modes of operation.

1.3.1.1.1 Closed Networks

Closed Networks refer to private networks with modem operational parameters that do not need to interoperate with modems developed for commercial open networks (as specified in accordance with (IAW) Intelsat Earth Station Standards (IESS) -308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).

A Comtech EF Data overhead channel is provided to allow the modem to operate in such closed networks over commercial satellite IAW Intelsat requirements for use during closed network operation.

1.3.1.1.2 Open Networks (Intelsat)

Open Networks refer to networks that must meet Intelsat specifications for Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP), EIRP stability, spurious emissions, intermodulation products, adjacent carrier interference, frequency tolerance, equalization, and modem parameters such as modulation, FEC, and scrambling.

The SLM-5650A meets Intelsat certification requirements and is capable of operating in such open networks over commercial satellites (as specified under IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).

The modem supports the overhead framing integral to those modems, in order to be fully compatible with commercial modems complying with IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310.

The rear panel ‘P1 Overhead’ I/O port does not support the Open Network Backward Alarms.

1.3.1.1.3 OM-73 Mode

The OM-73 Mode allows the SLM-5650A to be compatible with Linkabit’s original OM-73 modem. This modem and its operational capabilities have become a de facto standard when operating over DSCS satellites. All OM-73 modes listed in MIL-STD-188-165A are supported.



1.3.1.2 Secure Management Interfaces

Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION

Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INERFACE OPERATION

Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE

Appendix F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION

The SLM-5650A supports secure management interfaces, as part of its Management Security option, when the optional NP Interface Module and/or the TRANSEC Encryption card are installed either individually or in tandem. To enable such interoperational considerations, the internal systems of the SLM-5650A are interconnected with an internal Ethernet bus.

The SLM-5650A’s use of the Secure Management interfaces, in combination with the modem’s use of Router Mode, (Static) Bridge Mode, and BPM Mode – and their functional association with the Base Modem, NP Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module – is addressed in detail in the following sections of this manual:

1.3.1.3 Data Interfaces

Appendix D. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES


The SLM-5650A supports only one data interface at a time. The modem features two native data interfaces (TIA/EIA-530/422 and TIA/EIA-613 [HSSI]), plus an option slot for installation of a modular data interface. The optional modular interfaces available at this time are the Network Processor, G.703, LVDS, and Gigabit Ethernet.

1.3.1.3.1 TIA/EIA-530 Interface

The native TIA/EIA-530 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-530. It also supports the TIA/EIA-422 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 20 Mbps.

1.3.1.3.2 TIA/EIA-613 High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI)

The native TIA/EIA-613 interface supports the physical layer requirements for TIA/EIA-613. It also supports the TIA/EIA-612 electrical interface specification. This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps.



1.3.1.3.3 Network Processor (NP) Module Option

The optional NP Interface is Comtech EF Data’s third generation IP router, Ethernet Bridge, and BPM device. The interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or Brouter mode of operation. The NP Interface supports the following operating modes:

• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode

• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet Brouter Mode

• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat Brouter Mode

• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode

• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode

• Extended Temperature Range: -25 to 50°C

1.3.1.3.4 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Module Option


The optional G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 interface is designed for full duplex capability and is automatically configured for simplex transmit or simplex receive operation. The interface operates at the digital hierarchy bit rates of 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 Mps as defined by ITU-T G.703.

1.3.1.3.5 Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) Module Option


The optional LVDS interface provides a physical and electrical interface between an SLM-5650A modulator and demodulator and signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics.

1.3.1.3.6 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Module Option


The optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) interface performs a simple bridge function and passes IP packets, unaltered, in each direction between the Local Area Network (LAN) (10/100/1000 BaseT interface) and Wide Area Network (WAN) (SLM-5650A modulator/demodulator).

IP packet traffic is framed via High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) encapsulation by the SLM-5650A logic, and the SLM-5650A is both the origination and termination point for HDLC encapsulation. HDLC CRC-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames.



1.3.1.4 Independent Tx and Rx Function

The Tx (modulator) and Rx (demodulator) sides of the modem are functionally independent and separately controllable. The baseband Tx and Rx sides of a communications channel passing through the modem are independently configurable, including the ability to select different parameters (to include data rate, modulation, and coding) in support of asymmetrical operation.

Data interfaces and IF interfaces are not independent.

Example: If the TIA/EIA-530 interface is selected, DO NOT USE TIA/EIA-530 to transmit and a HSSI interface to receive. The same principle applies to the IF interfaces: If 70/140 is selected, DO NOT USE 70/140 to transmit and the L-Band interface to receive.

1.3.1.5 Verification

The SLM-5650A includes test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct functioning of the modem. Of particular note is the IF loopback, which permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. During the loopback, the receive frequency is temporarily changed to match the Tx side, and an internal RF switch connects a sample of the modulator to the demodulator input. When normal operation is again selected, the previous value is restored.

1.3.1.6 Firmware Updates

Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE

The SLM-5650A stores its firmware in flash memory, which allows the modem to upload firmware downloads from an external PC once you establish Ethernet connectivity. Firmware updates for the base modem, GbE Interface Module, and NP Interface Module may be obtained free from Comtech EF Data via the CEFD Web site, or via e-mail from Comtech EF Data Product Support during normal business hours. (Note that TRANSEC Module firmware updates must be requested directly from Comtech EF Data Product Support.)



1.3.1.7 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)

Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, you may purchase the unit with only the desired features enabled. If, at a later date, you wish to upgrade the functionality of a unit, Comtech EF Data provides Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), a technology that permits the purchase and installation of options through special authorization codes.

These unique FAST Access Codes may be purchased from Comtech EF Data during normal business hours, and then loaded into the unit using the front panel keypad.

FAST System Theory FAST allows an operator to order a unit precisely tailored for the initial application. When service requirements change, FAST allows the operator to upgrade the topology of the unit on-location, within minutes, and without having to remove the unit from the setup. This accelerated upgrade is possible due to FAST’s extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data products.

FAST Implementation Comtech EF Data’s FAST system is factory-implemented in the modem. All FAST options are available through the basic platform unit at the time of order. FAST allows immediate activation of available options – first, upon entry of the FAST Access Code through the front panel keypad, and then by setting the desired operational parameters via the front panel, remote control, or Web Server interfaces.

1.3.1.7.1 FAST Accessible Options

SLM-5650A hardware options can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. The following FAST-accessible hardware options are available for the SLM-5650A:

• Extended Temperature Range -32 to 50°C

• (Network Processor option provides range from -25 to 50°C)

• (see Section 1.3.1.7.2 for more information)

• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC Option (chassis-installed card and FAST)

• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC-2 Option (chassis-installed card and FAST)

• Network Processor (NP) Plug-in Interface Module

• TRANSEC Module (chassis-installed card and FAST)

• Gigabit Ethernet Plug-in Interface Module

• G.703 Plug-in Interface Module

• LVDS Plug-in Interface Module



In the field, the operator can select FAST options that can be easily activated, depending on the current hardware configuration of the unit. The unique FAST Access Code that is purchased from Comtech EF Data enables configuration of the installed optional hardware. The available firmware-based FAST Options, as listed on the SLM-5650A Front Panel Utility: FAST View Options screens, are as follows:

FAST Option

No. Description

01 Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps. 02 8PSK/8QAM modulation 03 16QAM modulation 04 16APSK/32APSK Modulation 05 AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead 06 ASYNC ESC 07 Reed-Solomon Coding 08 Turbo FEC Option 09 Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps. 10 Network Processor (NP) I/F Card (Module) 11 Sequential Encode/Decoder 12 TRANSEC (Transmission Security) Module

13 Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate: Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 15 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, <70 Mbps

14 NP QoS (Quality of Service) 15 NP Management Security 16 NP Vipersat 17 Demodulator Only 18 Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps. 19 TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps. 20 Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps. 21 NP OW (Order Wire) Serial Commands 22 NP BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode 23 Customer Options 24 NP Antenna Handover 25 LDPC FEC Option 26 Extended Temperature Range 27 Spectrum Spreading 28 DSSS-MA 29 IESS-308v2 30 Enhanced Spreading Features



1.3.1.7.2 Extended Temperature Option

Extended temperature range is -32 to 50°C. When operating from -32 to 0°C (the Network Processor option range is -25 to 50°C), Tx power accuracy is ∀1.5 dB. A heater is installed on the bottom of the chassis. This 300-Watt heater operates at 120 or 240 VAC.

When temperatures are below 0°C, a 10-minute warm up period is required upon power-up before the modem boots. Comtech EF Data recommends that you allow an additional 15 minutes, for a total of 25 minutes of recommended warm-up time, to ensure performance to specifications.

1.3.1.7.3 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) Option

DSSS operation over WGS and DSCS has not been ARSTRAT approved.

As On-The-Move systems with very small dishes (e.g., VSATs) become more popular, there is an increased interest in Spectrum Spreading. To meet this need, DSSS is optionally available in the SLM-5650A.

DSSS works by modulating the normal carrier with a pseudo-random PN sequence (chips) at a much higher chip rate. The chip rate is determined by the carrier’s symbol rate and a multiplying (spreading) factor.

The SLM-5650A offers spreading in the following LDPC MODCODs:

• LDPC ULL BPSK 1/2

• LPDC LL BPSK .378



• LDPF HP BPSK 1/2

The Spreading Factors currently supported are 1 (Spreading Off), 2 through 512 up to a maximum chip rate of 23 Mcps. You can select between four built-in pseudo-random PN sequences so that multiple spread carriers can occupy the same bandwidth in a Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) fashion.

When using large spreading factors, the SLM-5650A also exhibits a large tolerance to jamming – up to 24 dB – and a Low Probability of Detection and Interception. With DSSS enabled, the lower data rate limit has been reduced to 8 kbps.

The SLM-5650A Base Modem Web Server Interface provides a Web page to facilitate anti-jamming applications. This page allows you to configure the modem parameters so that a fixed occupied bandwidth can be maintained.

Lastly, there is no loss in performance with spreading enabled.



1.3.1.8 Interoperability

1.3.1.8.1 Legacy Modems

The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable with all specified modes of operation of the following legacy modems:

• OM-73 (V);

• MD-1352 (P)/U (BEM-7650);

• MD-1340 (OM-73 interoperable mode only; orderwire not required);

• MD-1030B;

• SLM-3650;

• SLM-5650;

• SLM-8650;

• SLM-7650.

The serial interface remote control protocol is NOT backwards compatible.

1.3.1.8.2 Modem Switches

To ensure operational reliability, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem may be incorporated into a number of Comtech EF Data switching products. These switches are compatible only with Comtech EF Data modems; this switch/modem compatibility is further defined for the SLM-5650A as follows:

Table 1-1. Modem Switches

Compatible Non-compatible

• CRS-300 1:10 Redundancy Switch • CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch • CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch

• SMS-300 Series Redundancy Switches • SMS-450 Series Satellite Switches

For detailed information on using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in 1:1 or 1:N redundancy or Antenna Handover applications, refer to your pertinent switch Installation and Operation Manual.



1.4 Physical Features

Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION

The SLM-5650A is constructed as 1RU-high rack-mounting chassis. Handles at the front allow easy removal from and placement into a user-supplied rack cabinet. The unit can be free-standing, if desired.

Optional Rack Cabinet Support Kits are available from Comtech EF Data:

• KT/6228-2 4” Rear-Mounting Support Brackets Kit

• KT/6228-3 10” Rear-Mounting Support Brackets Kit

• FP/SL0006 26” Bearingless Rack Slide Set



1.4.1 Dimensional Envelope

Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope

SLM-5650A Chassis Features (Figure 1-3) Feature Description For detailed information see…

A Front Panel Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION B Rear Panel Chapter 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS C Air Inlets

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION D Exhaust Fan (2X)



1.4.2 Front Panel

Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View

Table 1-2. Front Panel Item Descriptions

Item No. Name Description

1 USB Port This is currently non-functioning. It is reserved for future software support.

2 6-button keypad This array is used for local control via menu navigation. 3 12-button keypad This array is used for local control via manual data entry. 4 10-Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) This provides overall status monitoring at a glance 5 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) This provides viewing of two lines (at 40 characters per line) of

messages, menus, and prompts. 6 On/Off Switch This switch powers the unit on/off. 7 Rack Handles These afford ease of installation into and removal from a

customer-supplied rack.



1.4.3 Rear Panel

Chapter 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Rear Panel View

Table 1-3. Rear Panel Item Descriptions


1 AC Power Connector Power interface: 90-264VAC (standard)l 24V DC (optional). 2 Press-fit Fuse Holder 3 Unit Ground Connection Grounding lug. 4 ‘J1 Ext Ref’ (TNC-F) Utility Connector TNC-F connector for master external reference input. 5 ‘J5 Ethernet’ (RJ-45) Utility Connector 10/100 BaseT RJ-45 port for Ethernet-based remote monitor and

control (M&C). 6 ‘J6 EIA530’ (DB-25F) Data Interface

Connector DB-45F data interface connector.

7 ‘P1 Overhead Data’ (DB-25M) Interface DB-25M data interface connector. 8 ‘J7 HSSI’ Interface 50-pin female SCSI-2 data interface connector. 9 ‘J8 Alarms’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector DB-9F utility connector for Form C alarms.

10 ‘J9 Auxiliary’ (HD-15F) Utility Connector

HD-15F utility connector for redundancy switch operations.

11 ‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector DB-9F utility connector for serial-based remote monitor and control (M&C).

12 Data Interface Module Slot Interface module slot for installation of the optional Gigabit Ethernet, NP, G.703, or LVDS interface modules.

13 ‘J2 TX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’) Type ‘N’ female connector for L-Band IF transmit output. 14 ‘J4 RX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’) Type ‘N’ female connector for L-Band IF receive input. 15 ‘J11 TX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector

(BNC) BNC female connector for 70/140 MHz IF transmit output.

16 ‘J3| RX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)

BNC female connector for 70/140 MHz IF receive input.



Notes:


Specifications 2–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 Summary of Specifications

Table 2-1. Summary of Environmental and Physical Specifications

Environmental and Physical Specifications

Parameter Specifications

Prime Power 90 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 130W (maximuim), 90W (typical) 24VDC optional

Mounting 1RU Optional Rear Support Brakets kits, Bearingless Rack Slide Set kits available

Dimensions 1.72H x 19 W x 20W inches (43.7W x 482.6W x 508D mm) Weight ≤12 lbs (5.5 kg) Temperature Operating:

Standard: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) Extended: -25 to 122°F (-40 to 70°C)

Storage: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)

Humidity 0 to 95%, non-condensing



Table 2-2. Summary of General Specifications

General Specifications


Operating Frequency Range 52 to 88 104 to 176 950 to 2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps)

Modulation Types BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, 16QAM Digital Data Rates • 64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)

• 64 kbps to 5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613) • 64 kbps to 10 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613) • 64 kbps to 20 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613) • 64 kbps to 51.840 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-613, LVDS) • 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (GBEI, Network Processor)

Symbol Rate Range 32 Ks/s to 64 Ms/s EXT REF Input TNC female connector, 1, 5, or 10 MHz selectable

Functions in accordance with MIL-STD-188-115. Accuracy and stability in compliance with MIL-STD-188-165, Para. 5.4.

INT REF Stability 1 x 10-7

Scrambling V.35, OM-73, and Synchronous IDR/IBS Framing Compatibility Support for IBS and IDR framing. Allows basic IBS/IDR Open Network capable

operation. Built-in Test (BIT) Fault and status reporting, BER performance monitoring, IF Loop-back,

programmable test modes, built-in Fireberd emulation with all comprehensive BER measurements.

Summary Faults Reported via: • Front Panel LEDs • Rear panel “Alarm” DB-9F connector, relay contacts for Tx, Rx, Common

equipment faults, and Tx and RX alarms. Open collector faults available. • Rear panel “AUX” DB-15F connector. Open collector faults available.

Monitor and Control EIA-485, EIA-232, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet with HTTP, Telnet, and SNMP



Table 2-3. Summary of Modulator Specifications

Modulator Specifications


Output Power +10 to -40 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps. In Extended Temperature Range of -32° to 0°C, TX Power accuracy is ∀1.5 dB,

Output Return Loss • 70/140 MHz: -14 dB • L-Band: -9 dB

Output Impedance 50 Ω Spurious From Carrier ± Tx SR to 500 MHz -51 dBc (measured in a 10 kHz bandwidth). Harmonics From Carrier (CW) to the greater of the 12th harmonic or 4000 MHz -60 dBc. Tx Clock Source • Rx

• INT • Tx Terrestrial • Data Source Sync

Output Connectors • 70/140 MHz: o TNC for 52 to 88 MHz o 104 to 176 MHz

• L-Band: Type ‘N’ for 950 to 2000 MHz Modulation Timing Jitter < 3% of the modulation symbol period Modulation Phase Error < 2° Modulator Spectral Inversion The modem can invert the modulated spectrum. Transmit Clock and Data Inversion

The modem can invert the Tx clock and data independently of each other (EIA-530, EIA-613).



Table 2-4. Summary of Demodulator Specifications

Demodulator Specifications


Input Carrier Power • 70/140MHz: +10 to –55 dBm • L-Band: o +10 to –55 dBm carrier (SR > 3.2 Msps) o +10 to [–55 - 10log10(3.2/SR)], (SR ≤ 3.2 Msps)

Maximum Composite Power +20 dBm or +40 dBc Input Impedance 50 Ω Input Connectors • 70/140 MHz:

o TNC for 52 to 88 MHz o 104 to 176 MHz

• L-Band: Type ‘N’ for 950 to 2000 MHz Carrier Acquisition Range ± 30 kHz, selectable Input Return Loss • 70/140 MHz: –14 dB

• L-Band: –9 dB Buffer Clock Internal, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite Doppler Buffer 32 to 16,777,216 bits, selectable Demodulator Spectral Inversion The modem can invert the demodulator spectrum.

Table 2-5. Summary of Coding Options

Coding Options

Parameter Specifications Uncoded 1/1 Viterbi (rates) • K=7

• 1/2 • 3/4 • 7/8

Viterbi + Reed-Solomon Closed Network per IESS-308 and IESS-309 Trellis IESS-310 Trellis+Reed-Solomon IESS-310 Turbo Turbo Product Coding (TPC) per IESS-315 LDPC: ULL, LL, and HP Closed Network



Table 2-6. Summary of Open Network Options

Open Network Options


IDR • INTELSAT IESS-308 (Framing only) • INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only)

IBS • INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only) • INTELSAT IESS-309 (Framing only)

Table 2-7. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements

Parameter Specification

The following reference Eb/N0 is defined as the required Eb/N0 corresponding to a BER of IE-3 with Reed-Solomon FEC not enabled. Initial Acquisition The modem achieves initial acquisition within the times as specified within ± 30 kHz

at the reference Eb/N0 For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and ≤ 128 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 500 seconds. For Baseband data rates between 128kbps and ≤ 1544 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 30 seconds. For baseband data rates > 1544 kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 1.5 seconds.

Reacquisition Reacquisition is achieved, as follows, after a period of up to 15 minutes of the absence of signal when the carrier returns to within 500 Hz of its original frequency. For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and 128 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 45 seconds. For baseband data rates between 128 kbps and 1544 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 20 seconds. For baseband data rates greater than 1544 kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 1 second.

BCI With Tx and Rx random data, the mean time to loss of BCI due to falsely adding or deleting bits is at least 3 days at the reference Eb/N0. In addition, the modem maintains BCI over 50 consecutive bits of all ones or zeros, which occur no more than once in 10,000 bits, without employing data scrambling.

System Retention Synchronization and BCI are maintained for all Eb/N0 above the reference Eb/N0 (BPSK / QPSK / OQPSK / 8PSK) for signal loss of up to 50 modulation symbol periods, with a probability of at least 90 percent.

Receive Timing Jitter The Rx output clock peak timing jitter cannot exceed ± 5 percent at the reference Eb/N0 when the modulated signal meets the modulation timing jitter requirement.

Doppler The modem meets the requirements with a Doppler shift, rate of change, and acceleration for satellite inclination up to ± 7° as presented in Table 2-8, and an additional 0.5 dB added to the reference Eb/N0.



Table 2-8. Doppler Requirements

Parameter C-Band X-Band Ku-Band Ka-Band

Doppler Shift in Hz ±2475 ±3535 ±6045 ±11,810

Doppler Rate of Change in Hz/sec ±226 ±270 ±490 ±1046

Doppler Acceleration in Hz/sec2 ±243 ±290 ±526 ±1124

Table 2-9. Data Quality Performance Specification

Data Quality Performance Specification

Parameter Specification

OM-73 Compatible Mode Operating in the OM-73-compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance with differential encoding and data scrambling enabled does not exceed values shown in Table 2-10 through Table 2-15.

MIL-STD-188-165A Compatible Mode

Operating with BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK modulation in the MIL-STD-188-165A compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance, with differential encoding and data scrambling enabled, will be equal to or better than the values shown in Table 2-10 (without Reed-Solomon) or Table 2-11 (with Reed-Solomon) as tested in an IF back-to-back configuration over the BER range 5 x 10-3 to 1 x 10-7. Operating with 8PSK modulation and rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding (without Reed-Solomon outer coding), SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is less than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-12 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration. Operating with 8PSK modulation, rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding, and Reed-Solomon (219,201) outer coding, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-13 when tested in an IF back-to-back configuration.

IESS-308 Compatible Mode

When operating in the IESS-308 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is as specified in IESS-308.





16QAM Coding Mode The SLM-5650A operating in the 16QAM mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown inTable 2-14 when using the modulation formats indicated.

Turbo Coding Mode The SLM-5650A operating in the Turbo Code Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-15 when using the modulation formats indicated.

Sequential Mode The SLM-5650A operating in the Sequential Mode provides back-to-back BER vs. Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-16 when using the modulation formats indicated.

LDPC Coding Mode The SLM-5650A operating in an LDPC Mode provides back-to-back BER vs Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-18 through Table 2-20 when using the indicated block size and modulation formats.



2.2 BER Performance

2.2.1 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding

Table 2-10. Viterbi Decoder BER

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Viterbi Decoder

BER 1/2 3/4 7/8 Uncoded 10-3 3.8 5.0 6.3 10-4 4.7 5.9 7.1 10-5 5.3 6.6 7.8 10.8 10-6 5.9 7.2 8.4 11.6 10-7 6.5 7.8 9.0 12.4 10-8 7.1 8.3 9.5 13.0

2.2.2 BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and Reed-Solomon

Table 2-11. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon

BER 1/2 3/4 7/8 10-6 4.1 5.6 6.7 10-7 4.4 6.0 7.1 10-8 5.0 6.3 7.5

2.2.3 8PSK, Trellis Decoder

Table 2-12. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Trellis Decoder

BER 2/3 5/6 10-3 6.5 8.7 10-4 7.3 9.4 10-5 8.1 10.1 10-6 8.9 10.8 10-7 9.6 11.6 10-8 10.2 12.3



2.2.4 8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon

Table 2-13. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon

BER 2/3 5/6 10-6 6.2 8.2 10-7 6.5 8.5 10-8 6.7 8.9 10-9 6.9 9.3 10-10 7.2 9.7

2.2.5 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon

Table 2-14. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon

BER 3/4 7/8 10-6 8.2 9.5 10-7 8.4 9.8 10-8 8.6 10.1 10-9 8.8 10.3 10-10 9.0 10.6

2.2.6 Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding

Table 2-15. TPC Decoder BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Turbo Product Code Decoder

BER BPSK QPSK/OQPSK 8PSK 16QAM

21/44 5/16 21/44 3/4 7/8 17/18 3/4 7/8 17/18 3/4 7/8 10-6 3.3 2.5 3.3 3.9 4.3 6.8 6.5 7.1 10.0 7.6 8.2 10-7 3.4 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.4 7.1 6.9 7.2 10.6 8.0 8.4 10-8 3.5 3.1 3.5 4.3 4.5 7.4 7.2 7.3 11.2 8.4 8.5 10-9 3.6 3.4 3.6 4.8 4.6 7.7 7.5 7.4 11.8 8.7 8.7 10-10 3.7 -- 3.7 -- 4.7 -- 7.8 7.5 -- 9.0 8.8



2.2.7 Sequential Decoding with/without Reed-Solomon

Table 2-16. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance

Eb/No (dB) Specifications Sequential Decoder with / without Reed-Solomon

DESCRIPTION BER BPSK QPSK/OQPSK

1/2 1/2 3/4 7/8

Sequential – 64 kbps

10-5 4.8 4.8 5.8 7.0 10-6 5.2 5.2 6.4 7.5

10-7 5.6 5.6 6.9 8.0

Sequential – 1544 kbps

10-5 5.2 5.2 5.9 7.2 10-6 5.7 5.7 6.5 7.7

10-7 6.1 6.1 7.0 8.3

Sequential+RS (225,205)

10-6 4.4 4.4 5.0 5.6 10-7 4.6 4.6 5.3 6.0 10-8 4.8 4.8 5.6 6.4

2.2.8 BER Performance with Symmetrical or Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers

Symmetrical Adjacent Carriers

Operating in the presence of two adjacent symmetrical carriers (one lower in frequency and one higher in frequency with same modulation, data rate, and coding), the modem performance is not degraded more than as indicated in Table 2-17 Column 3, and a) and b) in this section. This performance is measured with the adjacent carrier’s center frequencies offset XRs Hz from the center frequency of the carrier under test, where X is the spacing factor and Rs is the modulation symbol rate in Hz of the symmetrical carriers.

The BER of the test carrier is measured at the specified carrier Ratio of Energy per Symbol to Noise Power Density in a 1 Hz Bandwidth (Es/N0) Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) without the adjacent carriers. The adjacent carriers are applied at the specified center frequencies and Es/N0 and the BER of the test carrier is measured. The change in BER is equal to the change in Eb/N0 based on the characterization curve of the test carrier and the amount of Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) degradation. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply.

For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, the symmetric degradation shall be IAW one of the values in Table 2-17 Column 3, and corresponding test carrier Es/N0 in Column 1. Select a test carrier Es/N0 that will yield timely results based on modulation and coding used in the test configuration. The adjacent carriers Es/N0 shall be set to corresponding value in Column 2.

For the case of X (spacing factor) = 1.4, the degradation is less than 0.2 dB.



Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers

Operating in the presence of two adjacent asymmetrical carriers, one lower in frequency and one higher in frequency, and each adjacent carrier symbol rate (R"s) = 2.0 R's, the modem performance is not degraded more than indicated in Table 2-17 Column 4, and a) and b) in this section. Performance is measured with the adjacent carriers center frequencies offset (X/2) times (R's + R"s) Hz from the test carrier center frequency, where X is the spacing factor and R's is the modulation symbol rate in Hz of the test carrier, and R"s is the modulation symbol rate in Hz of each adjacent carrier. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply.

For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, and R"s = 2.0 R's, the asymmetric degradation shall be IAW one of the values in Table 2-17 Column 4, and the corresponding test carrier Es/N0 in Column 1. Select a test carrier Es/N0 that will yield timely results based on modulation and coding used in the test configuration. The adjacent carriers Es/N0 are set to the corresponding value in Column 2.

For the case of (1.4/2)(R's + R"s) Hz carrier spacing, the degradation is < 0.2 dB.

Table 2-17. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2

Test Carrier Es/N0 (dB)

Adjacent Carriers Es/N0 (dB)

Eb/N0 Degradation (dB) Symmetric Case

Eb/N0 Degradation (dB) Asymmetric Case

5.5 18.5 < 0.36 < 0.41

6.0 19.0 < 0.38 < 0.43

8.0 21.0 < 0.48 < 0.56

8.4 21.4 < 0.51 < 0.60

10.0 23.0 < 0.64 < 0.77

12.0 25.0 < 0.88 < 1.10

12.7 25.7 < 0.99 < 1.21



2.2.9 LDPC ULL Decoding

Table 2-18. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance

Eb/N0 (dB) Specification

BER BPSK QPSK

1/2 1/2 2/3 3/4 10-5 3.1 3.1 3.6 4.1 10-8 3.7 3.7 4.2 4.7

2.2.10 LDPC LL Decoding

Table 2-19. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance


BER BPSK QPSK 8QAM 16QAM

.378 .451 .541 1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 2/3 3/4 7/8 2/3 3/4 7/8 10-5 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.5 6.1 6.8 8.0 10-8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 3.3 3.9 5.0 5.4 5.9 7.1 6.5 7.1 8.4

2.2.11 LDPC HP Decoding

Table 2-20. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance


BER BPSK (O)QPSK 8QAM 16QAM

1/2 1/2 2/3 3/4 2/3 3/4 3/4 10-5 2.0 2.0 2.3 3.0 4.6 5.6 6.8 10-9 2.3 2.3 2.7 3.3 5.0 6.0 7.1



BLANK PAGE


Installation 3–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION

3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Shipment

THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SENSITIVE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). USE ESD PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING THE EQUIPMENT.

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, its optional Installation and Operation Manual (otherwise available online at http://www.comtechefdata.com), and its power cord were packaged and shipped in a reusable cardboard carton containing protective foam spacing (Figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1. Unpack and Inspect the Shipment



3.1.1 Inspect the Shipment

Do these steps:

1. Keep all shipping materials.

2. Check the packing list to make sure the shipment is complete.

3. Inspect the equipment for damage. If damage exists, immediately contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data to submit a damage report.

4. Read the manual.

3.2 Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure

CORRECT GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED – Connect the ground stud, located on the rear panel of the unit, to a power system that has separate ground, line and neutral conductors. Do not operate the unit without a direct connection to ground.

The rack must be connected to a suitable earthing connection at all times. You must connect the rack ground bar to a suitable earthing demarcation point.

CORRECT AIR VENTILATION IS REQUIRED – In a rack system where there is high heat discharge, provide forced-air cooling with top- or bottom-mounted fans or blowers.

Make sure there is adequate clearance inside the enclosure, especially at the sides, for air circulation and ventilation.

Air temperature inside the rack enclosure should never exceed 50°C (122°F).

If there is any doubt, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support during normal business hours.

Install the unit in its assigned position in a rack enclosure (Figure 3-2). You must install the rack in a location with a controlled environment. Failure to obey this requirement can cause damage to the equipment, and denial of subsequent warranty claims. You may use:

• A standard rack-mounted shelf

• User-supplied screws to secure the front panel to the rack enclosure threaded front mounting rails

• Comtech EF Data’s optional KT/6228-2 (4”) or KT/6228-3 (10”) Rear Support Brackets Kit (Figure 3-3)

• Comtech EF Data’s optional FP/SL0006 26” Bearingless Rack Slide Set (Figure 3-4)

For information about custom rack enclosures, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support.



Feature Description

1 Custom Rack Enclosure 2 SLM-5650A chassis 3 Standard Rack Shelving 4 Rack Enclosure Threaded Front Rail (typical) 5 Unit Front Panel 6 User-supplied Screws

Figure 3-2. Unit Rack Enclosure Installation



3.2.1 Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit

Feature Description 1 Back of Unit 2 Rack Enclosure Threaded Rear Mounting Rail (typical)

Figure 3-3. Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit Installation

Table 3-1. Optional Rear Support Bracket Kit Parts List

KT/6228-X Rear Support Bracket Kit

Item Quantity

CEFD Part Number Description KT/6228-2 KT/6228-3

1 2 2 HW/10-32SHLDR Screw, #10 Shoulder 2 4 4 HW/10-32FLT Washer, #10 Flat 3 2 2 HW/10-32SPLIT Washer, #10 Split 4 2 2 HW/10-32HEXNUT Nut, #10 Hex 5 4 4 HW/10-32x1/2RK Bolt, #10 Rack Bracket

6 2 – FP/6138-2 Bracket, Rear Support – 4” – 2 FP/6138-3 Bracket, Rear Support – 10”



Do these steps to install the brackets kit (Figure 3-3):

Tools needed to install the optional KT/6228-2 (4”) or KT/6228-3 (10”) Brackets Kit:

• A medium Phillips screwdriver • A 5/32-inch SAE Allen Wrench • An adjustable Crescent wrench.

1. Assemble the #10 Shoulder Screws (Item 1) through the Adapter Plate mounting slots using the #10 Flat Washers (Item 2), #10 Split Washers (Item 3), and #10 Hex Nuts (Item 4).

2. Mount the Rear Support Brackets (Item 6) to the rack enclosure threaded rear mounting rails (Feature 2) using the #10 Rack Bracket Bolts (Item 5).

3. Slide the unit into the front of the rack enclosure. Make sure that the #10 Shoulder Screws (Item 1) properly engage into the slots of the Rear Support Brackets (Item 6).



3.2.2 Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set

CEFD Part Number Description

FP/SL0006 Bearingless Rack Slide Set – 26”

Figure 3-4. Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set Installation

You may install the optional FP/SL0006 Bearingless Rack Slide Set into the equipment rack cabinet and onto the sides of the SLM-5650A, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Do these steps: 1. Use the provided hardware (not shown) to install one slide onto each side of the

SLM-5650A chassis. 2. Use the provided hardware (not shown) to install the slide rail components into each interior

side of the equipment rack cabinet. 3. Install the unit into the front of the equipment rack. Ensure that the slides properly engage

the cabinet-mounted slide rails. 4. Continue to slide the modem into the equipment rack to its final operating position. Then,

use four user-provided screws to secure the modem to the equipment rack’s right and left threaded front rails (through the front panel slots).



3.3 Connect External Cables


Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.

3.4 Configuration and Operation

If you encounter any problems with installation or initial operation, make sure to read Appendix A. SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING for possible solutions.

Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION Appendix A. TROUBLESHOOTING

Before attempting to operate your modem, make sure that:

• You have made all the necessary cable, power, and ground connections.

• You are operating with the latest available firmware load from Comtech EF Data.

• You have installed all FAST Options or otherwise enabled all FAST features on your modem. Refer to Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE.

Do these steps:

1. Make to read and become familiar with Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION before proceeding.

2. Connect the supplied power cable between your power source and the SLM-5650A rear panel.

3. Set the power switch to ON.

The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any adjustments.

4. Do a check for the correct transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) output signal levels and spectrums.

5. Use the fronbt panel keypad and display to configure the modem.



Notes:


Rear Panel Connectors 4–1 MN-SLM-5650A


4.1 Overview – Cabling Connection Types

Comtech EF Data’s SLM-5650A Satellite Modems use a number of different cables. Each cable type is typically dedicated to a specific mode of operation.

Not all of these operational interface types may be available.

The European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1) requires using properly shielded cables for DATA I/O. These cables must be double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a continuous ground shield.



4.1.1 Coaxial Cable Connections

(TOP) Bayonet Coupling Plug and Jack (Type ‘BNC’ Shown)

(BOTTOM) Threaded Coupling Plug and Jack (Type ‘N’ Shown)

Figure 4-1. Coaxial Connector Examples

The types of coaxial cables used by Comtech EF Data are ‘BNC’, ‘TNC’, ‘N’, ‘F’, and ‘SMA’. Coaxial cables (plugs) and their mating connectors (jacks/sockets) are available in two coupling styles – Bayonet or Threaded:

Bayonet Coupling Style

The jack has a pair of guideposts that accommodate the plug’s lockdown slots. This lockdown design provides secure assembly without over-tightening the connection.

Threaded Coupling Style

The jack features external threads. The plug shell features internal threads, and has either a knurled outer surface to permit hand-tightening of the connection, or hex flats to accommodate torqued installation.

Connection Instructions:

Bayonet Coupling Connections

Use the plug slots to guide, and then slide the plug onto the jack posts. Then, turn the plug clockwise until the jack posts are fully seated within the plug slot.

Threaded Coupling Connections

Engage the plug onto the jack threads, and then turn the plug clockwise until it is fully threaded onto the jack. Do not over-tighten the connection.



BNC plugs and jacks feature a Bayonet Coupling design.

Type ‘N’ connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type ‘TNC’, Type ‘F’, and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.

Type ‘F’ connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type ‘TNC’, Type ‘N’, and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.

Type ‘SMA’ connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type ‘TNC’, Type ‘N’, and Type ‘F’ connectors.

TNC plugs and jacks feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type ‘N’, Type ‘F,’ and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.

4.1.1.1 Type ‘BNC’

4.1.1.2 Type ‘TNC’

4.1.1.3 Type ‘N’

4.1.1.4 Type ‘F’

4.1.1.5 Type ‘SMA’



4.1.2 D-Subminiature Cable Connections

Type ‘D’ Cable with Jack Screws (Female Shown)

Type ‘D’ Chassis Receptacles with Jack Nuts: (TOP) Female

(BOTTOM) Male

Figure 4-2. D-Subminiature Connector Examples

D-Subminiature connectors are also called Type ‘D’ or ‘D-Sub’ connectors. The cable plug and chassis receptacle each feature a D-shaped profile that interlock to ensure proper pin orientation and connector seating. The connector pair features multiple rows of pins (male side) coupled to mating sockets (female side).

Whether the gender is male or female, the cable plug features two jack screws for secure connection to the jack nuts provided on the mating chassis receptacle.


Orient the plug to the receptacle in the proper position. Press firmly into place. Hand tighten, or use a standard flat-blade screwdriver, to secure the plug jack screws to the receptacle jack nuts. Do not over-tighten.

About connector pinout tables:

Figure 4-2 identifies the Pin 1 location for either gender connector. The connector pinout tables provided in this manual base the order of information (i.e., the “Pin #” column) on this orientation, except where noted.

4.1.3 RJ-45, RJ-48 Cable Connections

Figure 4-3. RJ-45/RJ-48 Connector Example

The plug for an RJ-45 or RJ-48 cable features a flexible tab. The RJ-45 or RJ-48 receptacle features a mating slot. This design configuration ensures a secure installation.

Connection Instructions (Figure 4-3):

Press down the tab on the cable plug and then insert the plug into the receptacle. The connection is complete when the tab ‘clicks’ into position inside the receptacle.



4.1.4 USB Cable Connections

(TOP) Type ‘A’ USB Plug and Receptacle (BOTTOM) Type ‘B’ USB Plug and Receptacle

Figure 4-4. USB Connector Examples

A Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection is used as a bus-type communications or power interface between peripheral devices. The connector pair (Figure 4-4) features a plug (male side) coupled to its mating receptacle (female side).


Type ‘A’ Connections – Slide the plug firmly into the chassis receptacle.

Type ‘B’ Connections – Orient the plug to the receptacle and push in firmly. The Type ‘B’ cable plug and chassis receptacle each feature a D-shaped profile that interlock to ensure proper orientation and connector seating. By design, it is impossible to incorrectly insert the plug into the receptacle.



4.2 Unit Connectors

Figure 4-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View

External cables are attached to connectors provided on the rear panel of the unit (Figure 4-5). These connectors serve power and ground, modem utility, terrestrial data interface, and IF functions.


1 AC Power Connector This connector is an IEC-60320 Type C14 (male) three-prong connector, for connection with an IEC-60320 Type C13 (female) three-prong plug. Note the following:

• Input Power: 130W maximum • Input Voltage: 90 to 132 V or 175 to 254 VAC. The unit switches voltage

ranges automatically. 2 Press-fit Fuse Holder The fuse holder is press-fit into the body of the IEC power module. Two 5mm 1

Amp Slo-Blo type fuses are installed here for line and neutral fusing. 3 Unit Ground

Connection

PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. You must connect the equipment to the protective earth connection at all times. Use this ground stud during installation, configuration, and operation.

The AC power interface provides the safety ground.

Use this #10-32 stud, located adjacent to the power interface module, for connecting a common chassis ground among equipment.

4 ‘J1 Ext Ref’ (TNC-F) Utility Connector

This type TNC female connector supplies a master external reference to the entire chassis. Functional features include:

• Frequency selectable at 1MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz • Input impedance to 50Ω unbalanced • Voltage up to 3 V (rms) • Sine or square waveform (50% duty cycle)

5 ‘J5 Ethernet’ (RJ-45) Utility Connector

This 8-pin 'RJ-45' 10/100 BaseT port provides access to the Ethernet Interface for remote control of the modem using using SNMP, HTTP/HTTPS or Telnet.




6 ‘J6 EIA530’ (DB-25F) Data Interface Connector

This Type ‘D’ 25-pin female (DB-25F) connector conforms to the EIA-530 pinout for EIA-422 operation only.

Pin # Signal Function 13 CS_B 25 NOT USED 12 ST_B 24 TT_A 11 TT_B 23 NOT USED 10 RR_B 22 DM_B 9 RT_B

21 DMD FLT OC 8 RR_A

20 NOT USED 7 GROUND

19 RS_B 6 DM_A

18 MOD FLT OC 5 CS_A

17 RT_A 4 RS_A

16 RD_B 3 RD_A

15 ST_A 2 SD_A

14 SD_B 1 GROUND




7 ‘P1 Overhead Data’ (DB-25M) Interface

This Type ‘D’ 25-pin male (DB-25M) connector allows for connection of the EIA-422, EIA-485 and EIA-232 data interfaces used with overhead framing. It also supports signaling for tactical applications.

Pin # Signal Function Name 1 EIA-422 Transmit Data “A”, Input TX Data A

14 EIA-422 Transmit Data “B”, Input TX Data B 2 EIA-422 Transmit Clock “A”, Output TX Clk A

15 EIA-422 Transmit Clock “B”, Output TX Clk B 3 EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “A”, Output TX Sync A

16 EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “B”, Output TX Sync B 4 EIA-422 Receive Data “A”, Output RX Data A

17 EIA-422 Receive Data “B”, Output RX Data B 5 EIA-422 Receive Clock “A”, Output RX Clk A

18 EIA-422 Receive Clock “B”, Output RX Clk B 6 EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “A”, Output RX Sync A

19 EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “B”, Output RX Sync B 7 Shield Ground

20 EIA-485 Transmit Data “-“ 485 TX Data - 8 EIA-485 Transmit Data “+” 485 TX Data +

21 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “A”, Input THS A 9 EIA-485 Receive Data “-“ 485 RX Data -

22 EIA-485 Receive Data “+” 485 RX Data + 10 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “B”, Input THS B 23 EIA-232 Clear to Send 232 CTS 11 EIA-232 Receive Data 232 RX Data 24 EIA-232 Request to Send 232 RTS 12 EIA-232 Transmit Data 232 TX Data 25 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “A”, Input THC A 13 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “B”, Input THC B

* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation, only two wires are required • Tie pins 8 and22 together (both +) • Tie pins 9 and 20 together (both -)




8

‘J7 HSSI’ Interface This is a 50-pin SCSI-2 female connector. Pins 21 and 45 are non-HSSI defined signals. On Cisco routers, there is no connection to these pins.

Fault Open No Fault Ground

Pin # Name

50 Ground 25 Ground 49 Not Used 24 Not Used 48 Not Used 23 Not Used 47 Not Used 22 Not Used 46 Not Used 21 MOD Fault – See Note 2 45 DEMOD Fault – See Note 2 20 Not Used 44 Not Used 19 Not Used 43 Not Used 18 Not Used 42 Not Used 17 Not Used 41 Not Used 16 Not Used 40 Not Used 15 Not Used 39 Not Used 14 Not Used 38 Ground 13 Ground 37 Not Used 12 Not Used 36 SD- 11 SD+ 35 Not Used 10 Not Used 34 TT- 9 TT+

33 TA- 8 TA+



8 (cont)

32 Ground 7 Ground

31 ST- 6 ST+

30 Not Used 5 Not Used

29 RD- 4 RD+

28 CA- 3 CA+

27 RT- 2 RT+

26 Ground 1 Ground

9 ‘J8 Alarms’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector

This Type ‘D’ 9-pin female (DB-9F) connector provides Form ‘C’ contact closures for alarm reporting. The three Form ‘C’ summary fault contacts are Modulator, Demodulator, and Common Equipment.

Pin # Signal Function Name 5 RX Alarm is faulted NC 9 RX Alarm is not faulted NO 4 RX Alarm Common COM 8 TX Alarm is faulted NC 3 TX Alarm is not faulted NO 7 TX Alarm common COM 2 Unit Alarm is faulted NC 6 Unit Alarm is not faulted NO 1 Unit Alarm Common COM




10 ‘J9 Auxiliary’ (HD-15F) Utility Connector

This Type ‘HD’ 15-pin female (HD-15F) connector is used for redundancy switch operations. It provides TTL (Transistor-to-Transistor Logic) open collector faults for the modulator and demodulator; a TTL input for external transmit carrier mute; an analog demodulator Q and I constellation monitor; and a programmable DC voltage monitor for the demodulator’s Automatic Gain Control (AGC).

Pin # Signal Function Name 1 Demod ‘I’ Channel I 2 Spare -- 3 Spare -- 4 Reserved for Redundancy Switch -- 5 Chassis Ground GND 6 Demod ‘Q’ Channel Q 7 AGC Monitor Test Point AGC 8 Spare -- 9 Reserved for Redundancy Switch --

10 Ext Carrier OFF EXT 11 Reserved for Redundancy Switch -- 12 Reserved for Redundancy Switch -- 13 Tx TTL Fault TxFLT 14 Rx TTL Fault RxFLT 15 Reserved for Redundancy Switch --

11 ‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector

This Type ‘D’ 9-pin female (DB-9F) connector interfaces the M&C functions to a remote location; the remote location can be an M&C computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485.

EIA-232 EIA-485

Pin # Name Pin # Name

2-Wire 4-Wire 5 GND 5 - TX/ RX - TX 9 -- 9 - TX/ RX - RX 4 -- 4 + TX/ RX + TX 8 CTS 8 + TX/RX + RX 3 TD 3 -- -- 7 RTS 7 -- -- 2 RD 2 -- -- 6 DSR 6 -- -- 1 -- 1 GND GND

* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation, only two wires are required • Tie pins 4 and 8 together (both +) • Tie pins 5 and 9 together (both -)




12 Data Interface Module Slot

Appendix D. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES (includes the optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet (GbE), G.703, and LVDS modules) Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE

Install optional data interface modules into this rear panel option slot. 13 ‘J2 TX’ L-Band IF

Connector (Type ‘N’) This Type ‘N’ female connector handles L-Band (950 MHz to 2000 MHz) Transmit (TX) output from the unit.

14 ‘J4 RX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’)

This Type ‘N’ female connector handles L-Band (950 MHz to 2000 MHz) Receive (RX) input into the unit.

15 ‘J11 TX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)

This type BNC female connector handles 70/140 MHz (52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 175 MHz) Transmit (TX) output from the unit.

16 ‘J3| RX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)

This type BNC female connector handles 70/140 MHz (52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 175 MHz) Receive (RX) input into the unit.



4.2.1.1.1 AC Operation – Replace the Fuses

DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY BEFORE PROCEEDING!

FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.

Figure 4-6. AC Fuse Replacement

Do these steps to replace the AC fuses (Figure 4-6):

1. Unseat the fuse holder from the IEC power module.

a. Use the slot to pry the holder outward from the IEC power module.

b. Pull the holder straight out, and then swing the holder away from the module.

2. Remove and replace the fuses as needed. Use T1.00A 5mm fuses for 115V and 230V AC operation.

3. Re-seat the fuse holder in the IEC power module.



4.2.1.1.2 AC Operation – Apply Power

Figure 4-7. AC Power to the Unit

Do these steps to apply AC power to the unit (Figure 4-7):

1. Plug the provided AC power cord female end into the unit.

2. Plug the AC power cord male end into the user-supplied power source.

3. Switch the unit ON.



4.2.1.2 Power Interface Module – Optional 24V DC Unit

Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for detailed information about connecting and supplying power, and replacing the fuses for the optional DC-powered SLM-5650A.

4.2.1.2.1 DC Operation – Replace the Fuses

DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY BEFORE PROCEEDING!

FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.

For DC operation, the fuses are located on the rear panel in individual screw-in receptacles found adjacent to the terminal block.

Do these steps to replace the DC fuses:

1. Disconnect the power supply leads.

2. Unscrew either fuse holder from its receptacle.

3. Remove and replace the fuses as needed.

4. Screw the fuse holder back into its receptacle.

4.2.1.2.2 DC Operation – Apply Power

Do these steps to apply DC power to the unit:

Number 18 AWG minimum wires are recommended.

1. Connect the user-supplied (+) and (–) DC power leads to their respective terminals.

2. Connect the user-supplied DC power leads to the user power source.

3. Energize the power source.

4. Switch the unit ON.



Notes:


Firmware Update 5–1 MN-SLM-5650A


5.1 Overview

Make sure to operate the Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Satellite Modem with its latest available firmware.

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is factory-shipped with the latest version of operating firmware. If you need to update the firmware, you can apply the update to the modem without having to remove it from operation. You may directly acquire the download from Comtech EF Data’s web site or receive the archive file by e-mail from Comtech EF Data Product Support.

5.1.1 Firmware Update Procedure Summary

• Download the firmware update archive file to a user-supplied PC. The User PC must be Microsoft Windows® compatible.

• Make sure the User PC is connected to the base modem rear panel ‘J5 Ethernet’ 10/100 Base-T Ethernet M&C port.

• Use the modem front panel or the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface to configure the modem to operate using the updated firmware image.

• You may FTP automatically if using the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module HTTP/HTTPS or TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interfaces.



5.1.2 About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats

Comtech EF Data’s Web site catalogues its firmware update files by product type (e.g., modem, converter, etc.) and specific model/optional configuration. The SLM-5650A files are provided under “Home | Support | Software Downloads | Flash & Software Update Files |Satellite Modems | SLM-5650A”. Typical for all names, ‘X’ is the revision letter, and ‘###’ represents the firmware version number – e.g., V148 = Version 1.4.8:

• The firmware download hyperlink for the BASE MODEM SLM-5650A BULK FIRMWARE appears as F0000030XX_V###X.

• These optional configurations require separate firmware update: • The firmware download hyperlink for the GBEI (GIGABIT ETHERNET INTERFACE)

MODULE INTERFACE appears as F0000401X_V###. • The firmware download hyperlink for the NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) MODULE

INTERFACE appears as F0000051X_V###. • The firmware download for the TRANSEC is FW-0020567x.

You must contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to obtain the firmware update for the optional TRANSEC Module Interface.

Comtech EF Data provides its archive download files in two compressed formats as *.exe (self-extracting) and *.zip (compressed):

• The self-extracting *.exe file does not require use of a third-party utility program. • Some firewalls do not allow the download of self-extracting *.exe files. You must instead

download the *.zip file, and extract the firmware files from the download with a user-supplied third-party file archiver and compression utility program such as PKZIP for Windows, WinZip, ZipCentral, etc. (PKZIP for DOS is not supported due to file naming conventions). Comtech EF Data does not provide this utility program.

For detailed information on handling archived files, read your archive utility program’s Help documentation.



5.2 Prepare for the Firmware Download

5.2.1 Required User-supplied Items

You will need:

• A Microsoft Windows-based PC, equipped with available serial and Ethernet ports. • A 9-pin serial cable and an RJ-45 CAT5 Ethernet cable to connect the User PC to the

modem. • A terminal emulator program (e.g., Tera Term or HyperTerminal). • A compatible Web browser (e.g., Internet Explorer).

5.2.1.1 Modem Connections

Connect the User PC to the modem:

• Use the 9-pin serial cable to connect the modem ‘P10 Remote’ port to a serial port on the User PC.

• Use an Ethernet hub, switch, or direct cable connection to connect the modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port to the Ethernet port on the User PC.

BASE MODEM firmware can only be loaded via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C port; do not use the Ethernet Traffic ports available on the GBEI or NP Module Interfaces.



5.2.2 Configure the Terminal Emulator Program

On the User PC – Open the terminal emulator program, and then configure the program’s serial port communication and terminal display operation:

• Baud Rate = 38400 bps • Data Bits = 8 • Stop bits = 1 • Parity = NO • Local Echo = ON • Port Flow Control = NONE • Display New Line Rx/Tx = CR

Read your terminal emulator program user guide or HELP feature for operating and configuration instructions.

5.2.3 Get the Management IP Address and Firmware Information

Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION Chapter 10. SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 On the modem – Apply power to the unit. Your power connection varies depending on your ordered unit (i.e., AC vs. DC operation).

2 Identify your default Management IP Address. You will not be able to access the HTTP/HTTPS (non-secure or secure Web Server) Interface without this information. See Section 5.2.3.1.

3 Get the firmware information using one of these methods: • To use the modem Front Panel, see Section 5.2.3.2 • To use the Serial Remote Interface, see Section 5.2.3.3 • To use the HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces, see Section 5.2.3.4



5.2.3.1 Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Management IP Address

Ethernet IP Address/Range: 192.168.001.001/24 (E)

You may view the assigned Management IP Address on the SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig IP Address/Range screen.

5.2.3.2 Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Firmware Information

You may view the base modem running M&C version at the top level screen. Press the CLEAR key several times to view this information.

The detailed firmware information can be found within the SELECT: Utility Firmware Information Image#1 or Image#2 Bulk nested submenus.

Examples of these screens are as follows:

Comtech SLM-5650A Modem State: GO Firmware Version x.x.x Mode: TURBO

Bulk #1: FW-0000030XX,MM/DD/YY,1.4.X

5.2.3.3 Use the Serial Interface to Find the Firmware Information

Use your terminal emulator to execute remote queries with the modem. Use the “SWR” remote query to find the firmware information:

<0/SWR?CR (returns the firmware version numbers running under Boot, Bulk1, and Bulk2, in the form Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz)



5.2.3.4 Use the Base Modem HTTP Interface to Find the Firmware Information

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 The ‘Firmware Information’ section of the ‘Maint | Unit Info’ page provides the Firmware Information details as Boot, Bulk1, and Bulk2 as shown in this example:

2 Write down your firmware information for further reference or to provide to Comtech EF Data Product support.

5.2.4 Make a Temporary Folder (Subdirectory) on the User PC

The temporary folder is where you store the firmware archive download. There are several ways you can make a temporary folder on a Windows PC:

• To use the Windows Desktop, see Section 5.2.4.1. • To use Windows Explorer, see Section 5.2.4.2. • To use the Run and Browse windows, see Section 5.2.4.3. • To use Windows Command-line or the Command Prompt, see Section 5.2.4.4.

After you make the temporary folder, proceed to Section 5.2.5 to download and extract the firmware files.

These examples specify drive letter “c:”. You can use any valid, writable drive letter. Typical for many of the tasks that follow, type the command as instructed and then press Enter.



5.2.4.1 Use Windows Desktop to Make a Folder

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Right-click anywhere on the desktop to open the popup submenu.

2 Select New > Folder to make the new, temporary folder on the desktop.

3 Right-click on the new folder and then select Rename from the popup submenu. Rename this folder to “temp” or some other convenient, unused name.



5.2.4.2 Use Windows Explorer to Make a Folder

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Left-double-click the Windows Explorer icon on the Windows Desktop.

2 Depending in your Windows OS version: select File > New > Folder, or click your Folder Destination (e.g., Windows (C:) and then New Folder to make the new, temporary folder in the active location.

3 Right-click the New Folder folder name, and then Rename this folder to “temp” or some other convenient, unused name.



5.2.4.3 Use the Run and Browse Windows to Make a Folder

Select Start on the Windows taskbar and then do these steps:

Step Task

1 Click Run… to open the Run window.

2 Click Browse… to open the Browse window.

3 Click New Folder. This can be an icon or a text label, depending on the Windows OS version.

4 Right-click the New Folder folder name, and then Rename this folder to “temp” or some other convenient, unused name.



5.2.4.4 Use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt to Make a Folder

Select Start on the Windows taskbar and then do these steps:

Step Task

1 Click Run... to open the Run window (or, depending on Windows OS version prior to Windows 95, click the MS-DOS Prompt icon from the Main Menu)

2 Open a Command-line window: • For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – type “command”. • For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – type “cmd” or “command”. • Alternately, from Start, select the All Programs > Accessories popup submenu, and

then select Command Prompt:

3 From the c:\> prompt, type either “mkdir temp” or “md temp” (both “mkdir” and “md” mean “make directory”), and then press Enter.

There will now be a “temp” folder created and available for placement of the firmware file download.



5.2.5 Download and Extract the Firmware Update Files

The example figures in this section are provided for reference only. Your firmware information will be different.

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Go online to www.comtechefdata.com.

2 On the Main page – Under Support Information or the Support tab, select the Software Downloads hyperlink.

3 On the Flash Updates Index page – Select the (Select a Product Line) Satellite Modems hyperlink.

4 On the Modems product page – Select the SLM-5650A product hyperlink.

5 Select the appropriate firmware archive EXE or ZIP file download hyperlink.

6 Once you select the EXE or ZIP hyperlink, the File Download dialogue opens on your browser and prompts an action. You may otherwise click [Cancel] to quit the file download process. Note the following:

For EXE files:

Click [Run] to open the self-extractor dialogue window. Use [Browse] to select your destination folder. Click [Unzip] to extract the files. Your results display as per this example – click [OK] to close. Your files are now available for transfer to the modem.

http://www.comtechefdata.com/



Click [Save] to download the EXE file to your Downloads folder. Once the download is complete the dialogue prompts you to either [Run] the self-extracting file, or to open or view the Windows Downloads folder for further action.

For ZIP files

Click [Open] to open the archive file. Use the WinZip features to select the files for extraction to your destination folder. Click [Save] to download the ZIP file to your Windows Downloads folder. Once the download is complete the dialogue prompts you to either [Open] the archive file, or to open or view the Windows Downloads folder for further action

7 If not already done with File Download > Open, you must extract, at a minimum, these files (filenames are subject to change)

• FW-0000030XX_EBULK_v###X.BIN (bulk image file). • SLM-5650A_ReleaseNotes_v###X.pdf (firmware release notes).

8 Confirm availability of the firmware files in the temporary folder. There are several ways you can view the contents of the temporary folder on a Windows-based PC:

• To use the Windows Desktop, see Section 5.2.5.1. • To use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt, see Section 5.2.5.2. • After you confirm the firmware files are in the folder, proceed to Section 5.3 to upload the

firmware update to the modem.



5.2.5.1 Use Windows Desktop to View Folder Contents

From the Windows Desktop:

Step Task

1 Double-left-click the Windows Explorer icon, and then double-left-click as needed to locate, and then open, the “temp” folder (directory) created earlier on the Windows Desktop.

2 Use the Browse window (Start > ...Run > Browse) to locate, and then double-click to open, the “temp” folder.

5.2.5.2 Use Windows Command-line to View Folder Contents

Using Command-line or Command Prompt:

Step Task

1 Type “cd c:\temp” at the Windows Command-line prompt to change to the temporary folder (directory) created earlier using Command-line.

2 Type “dir” to list the files extracted to the temporary folder from the downloaded archive file.



5.3 Upload the Bulk Firmware Files and Update the Modem

5.3.1 Important Considerations

Before you proceed with the firmware update, make sure that:

• You connect the modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C port to the User PC as described in Section 5.2.1.1.

The BASE MODEM firmware MUST be loaded only through the 10/100 BaseT ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C port. Do NOT use the Gigabit Ethernet Interface (GbE) Module or Network Processor (NP) Module Interface traffic or Console ports.

• Your PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the modem Serial or Ethernet Telnet interfaces.

• You have noted your modem Management IP Address. • Your PC is running a compatible Web browser for operation of the modem HTTP

Interface. • You download or otherwise have Comtech’s latest firmware files available on the User

PC in an accessible temporary folder.

5.3.2 Steps to FTP Upload the Firmware Files

Typical for all steps: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the assigned unit Management IP Address. Type all commands without quotes, and press Enter to execute.

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Use Windows Command-line to send a ping command. To ping the unit, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” at the Windows Command-line prompt. The response should confirm whether the unit is connected and communicating correctly with the User PC.

2 Use Windows Command-line to transfer the files from the User PC to the modem via FTP. a. Type “ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” to open the FTP session. b. Type “bin” to set the binary transfer mode. c. Type “prompt". d. Type “hash”. e. To begin the file transfer, type “put FW-0000030XX_EBULK_v###X.bin ebulk:".

The destination “ebulk:” must be all lower-case.



The process sequences through several blocks – this may take several minutes for the transfer to occur. The modem front panel reports the status as follows:

Programming flash sector #xx Please wait…

If you stop the transfer before the “PROGRAMMING FLASH SECTOR#xx PLEASE WAIT” messaging sequence is complete, this could lead to an incomplete download, and you must repeat the “put” command (Step 2e). You must make sure to update both images with the same firmware version for the unit to function properly. The update from an earlier version to FW Ver. 1.4.8B is a one-way update path. Once you complete an update to FW Ver. 1.4.8B or later, it is no longer possible to revert to earlier versions. If you attempt to update to an earlier firmware version, the modem will detect and disallow this as a protective measure. The unit will also disallow an attempt to switch to an image that contains an earlier version of firmware.

f. Wait for the file transfer to end.

If you receive the “Connection closed by remote host” message, wait anothe minute before continuing. The modem update sometimes takes longer than FTP client allows.

g. Type “bye” to close the FTP session. h. Close the Command-line window.

3 Select the alternate Boot Slot (Image) from the modem front panel: SELECT: UtilityFirmware Select, and then use the keypad (LEFT) and (RIGHT) arrows to select the alternate image:

Current Active Image: #2 Next Reboot Image: #1 #2

4 Power down the modem, and then power up to reboot.

5 To verify that the PC-to-unit FTP file transfer was successful, find the current firmware information via the front panel, or the HTTP or Serial interface (see Sections 5.2.3.2, 5.2.3.3, or 5.2.3.4).

The base modem is now operating with its latest firmware. The firmware update process is now complete.



5.4 Optional Network Processor (NP) Module Interface Firmware Update Procedure


Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Find the current firmware information via the front panel, or the HTTP or Serial interface (see Sections 5.2.3.2, 5.2.3.3, or 5.2.3.4).

To aid identification, when using the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface, the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware loads may be viewed from the Admin (Administration) | Upgrade page.

2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC as instructed previously in Section 5.2.4.

3 Download the correct firmware file to your temporary folder. The NP Module firmware for the modem is FW-0000051x, where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter. See Section 5.1.2 for more information about firmware file naming and archive file formats.

4 Extract the firmware files, and confirm the availability of the files in the temporary folder as per the steps provided in Section 5.2.5.

5 Enable the NP Module. From the modem front panel: SELECT: Configure Mode Interface NetworkProc.

6 Send a “ping” command – either to the NP Module’s Traffic IP Address when in single mode, or to its Management IP Address when in dual mode – to verify the connection and communication:

• If in single address mode, to determine the IP Address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel, go to the SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Traffic IP menu, and then select Yes.

• If in dual address mode, to determine the IP Address of the NP Module, from the modem front panel, go to the SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Mgmt IP menu, and then select Yes.

• Use Command-line to ping the modem: At the prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ is the NP Module’s IP Address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is connected and communicating.

7 Initiate a Web browser session with the NP Module using the PC and a supported Web browser.

The Web interface is disabled in Bridge Mode. The browser and page examples that follow use Internet Explorer Version 7.0. NP HTTP/HTTPS pages are shown with optional FAST Features installed.

From the User PC, type the NP Module’s IP Address into the browser’s Address box (where “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the NP Module’s IP Address).



Depending on the NP Module’s security level setting: • Type “http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” for non-secure access (Low Security Mode); • Type “https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” for SSH (Secure Shell) access (High Security Mode). When

prompted, enter the User Name and Password to log in: o Factory Default User Name is comtech; o Factory Default Password is comtech.

8 To update the Network Processor Bulk firmware: a. Open the Admin | Upgrade page:

b. In the Upgrade section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the User PC temporary folder:

• Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open. • Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to

open the folder. c. Select the update file, and then click [Open]. The filename should appear in the Upgrade

Image File text box. d. Click [Upload] to begin the Image Upgrade process.

9 Wait while the file transfers. a. After [Upload] is clicked, the Image Upgrade page appears while the Network Processor

first transfers, and then uploads, the update file from the PC. Allow sufficient time for the file to be loaded into the NP Module – uploading will take approximately five minutes.

It is not necessary to wait five minutes before clicking [OK], but you MUST wait five minutes before rebooting the modem.



b. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait… displays:

c. Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads 100%, and the Image Upgrade Complete message displays:

d. Click [OK] to exit the Image Upgrade page and return to the Admin | Upgrade page.

10 Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper Network Processor Firmware Info Image slot. If not, open the Admin | Reboot page and then, in the Network Processor Boot From section, use the drop-down menu to select Newest as needed to force the NP Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date. Click [Submit] when done.

Save all settings before rebooting to prevent loss of configuration settings. Go to the Save Configuration page, then click [Save Now]:



After saving, return to the Admin | Reboot page, then click [Reboot Now] to boot the NP Module with the new firmware:

To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 10.



5.5 Optional TRANSEC Module Interface Firmware Update Procedure


Firmware updates for the TRANSEC Module (also referred to in front panel menu screens as the “Option Card”) are not available from the Comtech EF Data Web site, but they may be obtained from Comtech EF Data on an as-needed basis. To obtain these updates, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to request access to the modem firmware update files online FTP site. The Product Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.

Do these steps:

Step Task

1 Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support during normal business hours to request delivery of the SLM-5650A’s TRANSEC Module firmware update files. The Product Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.

To aid identification, when using the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware loads may be viewed from the Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info page.

2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC as instructed previously in Section 5.2.4.

3 Download the correct firmware file to your temporary folder. The TRANSEC Module firmware for the modem is FW-0000058x, where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter. See Section 5.1.2 for more information about firmware file naming and archive file formats.

4 Extract the firmware files, and confirm the availability of the files in the temporary folder as per the steps provided in Section 5.2.5: Fw-0000058x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.

5 Send a “ping” command to the TRANSEC Module to verify the connection and communication: • To determine the IP Address of the TRANSEC Module, from the modem front panel, go to

the SELECT: ConfigureTransecModule IP Address screen. • Use Command-line to ping the modem: At the prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where

‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ is the TRANSEC Module’s IP Address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is connected and communicating.

6 Initiate a secure Web browser session with the TRANSEC Module via its HTTPS Interface. a. From the User PC, type the TRANSEC Module’s secure IP Address into the browser’s

Address box (where “https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the TRANSEC Module’s IP Address):



b. To log in to the secure interface, select Crypto Officer from the navigation list that is provided in the upper left-hand corner of each page, then click [Go!].

c. When prompted, enter the User Name and Password at the Login page:

• Factory Default User Name is comtech • Factory Default Password is comtech

7 Update the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware: a. Open the Admin | Update Firmware page. b. In the Bulk Firmware Upload section of the page, locate the update file downloaded

earlier to the User PC temporary folder: • Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open • Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name

to open the folder. c. Select the update file, and then click [Open]. The filename should appear in the Upgrade

Bulk File text box. d. Click [Upload] to begin the Firmware Application Process.

8 Wait while the file transfers. a. After [Upload] is clicked, the Firmware Application Process page appears while the

TRANSEC Module transfers, then uploads, the update file from the User PC. b. Allow sufficient time for the file to be uploaded – approximately five minutes is required

for the process to be completed. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait… displays:



Any power failure during this process will result in failure of the TRANSEC Module.

c. In the event that an error occurs during the Firmware Application Process, the following message is displayed:

For troubleshooting purposes, three common reasons for disruption of the Firmware Application Process are:

• Power Failure; • Loss of Ethernet signal (e.g., disconnection of Ethernet cable); • Attempting to load firmware other than the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware

(i.e., FW-0000058x.bin). d. Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads 100%, and the Image

Upgrade Complete message displays:

9 Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper Security Module Bulk Info slot. If not, update the Active Boot Slot Configuration – use the drop-down menu to select Newest. (This forces the TRANSEC Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date.) Click [Submit] when done.



10 Click [Reboot Now!] to boot the TRANSEC Module with the new firmware:

The modem will reboot with the new firmware loaded as configured:

11 Restart the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface browser session once the modem returns online.

12 To load the alternate image, repeat Steps 7 though 9.



5.6 USB Firmware Update Procedure

Use of the front panel USB port for the firmware update process is not available in this firmware release. Please contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for this feature’s release schedule.


FAST Activation Procedure 6–1 MN-SLM-5650A


6.1 Overview

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, you may purchase the unit enabled with only the desired features.

If you wish to upgrade the functionality of a unit at a later date, Comtech EF Data provides Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), which permits the purchase and activation of options through special authorization codes. You may contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to purchase these unique, register-specific Fast Access Codes, and then load these codes into the unit using the front panel keypad.

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION, Sect. 1.3.1.7.1 FAST Accessible Options Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION, Sect. 7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST for listings of the available FAST and FAST-accessible hardware options.

FAST System Theory

FAST facilitates on-site upgrade of the operating feature set without removing a unit from the setup. FAST technology allows you to order a unit precisely tailored for the initial application. When your service requirements change, you can upgrade the topology of the unit to meet these requirements within minutes. This accelerated upgrade is possible because of FAST’s extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data products.

FAST Implementation

Comtech EF Data implements the FAST system in the modem at the factory. All FAST options are available through the basic platform unit at the time of order – FAST allows immediate activation of available options, after confirmation by Comtech EF Data, through the SLM-5650A front panel.

FAST Accessible Options

You may order hardware options for installation either at the factory, or you can install and activate them on-site. The FAST Access Code that you purchase from Comtech EF Data enables configuration of the available hardware.


FAST Activation Procedure 6–2 MN-SLM-5650A

6.2 FAST Activation Procedure via the SLM-5650A Front Panel

Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for complete information about using this interface.

Do these steps:

1. Before contacting Comtech EF Data Product Support to order FAST feature upgrades, obtain and record the modem’s motherboard serial number:

a. From the front panel main SELECT: menu, select UtilityFAST, and then press [ENT].

b. The modem’s 9-digit motherboard “S/N” is displayed on the UtilityFAST screen top line, to the right.

c. Record the Serial Number:

______________________________________ 2. View the currently installed features. Proceed as follows:

a. From the front panel main SELECT: menu, select UtilityFAST, and then press [ENT].

b. From the SELECT: Utility FAST menu, select View Options, and then press [ENTER].

c. Use the up and down arrow keys () to scroll through the list of available FAST options – 01 through 30. Options are identified on each screen as ‘Installed’ or ‘Not Installed’. Any that are ‘Not Installed’ may be purchased as a FAST upgrade.

3. Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to order features: a. Provide the unit Serial Number to the Product Support representative. b. Identify and purchase the desired FAST option(s). c. Obtain the invoice, the 20-digit FAST Access Code(s), and the FAST option

activation instructions. 4. Enter the FAST Access Code (each FAST Access Code is submitted separately):

a. Depending on the FAST option, press [CLR] until you return to the SELECT: UtilityFAST menu.

b. Use the arrow keys to select Enter Modem Code, and press [ENT].

c. Use the arrow keys ( ) to carefully enter each register-specific 20-character FAST Access Code.

d. Press [ENT]. The modem responds with “Configured Successfully” if the FAST upgrade is accepted; the modem then resets to its newly-incorporated default configuration. However, if an invalid code is entered, the following message displays:

That FAST code has been rejected.

(ENTER or CLEAR) Repeat the FAST Access Code entry procedure. Should the code entry error persist, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for further assistance.


Front Panel Operation 7–1 MN-SLM-5650A


7.1 Overview

Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View

The front panel USB 1.1 port is non-functional.

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem allows you to locally monitor the modem operating status (including clocking information) and to control modem configuration parameters. The front panel (Figure 7-1) provides these operational features:

• Item 1 – This is the backlit Power On/Off switch. • Item 2 – This six-button keypad array is used for local control via menu navigation. • Item 3 – This 12-button keypad array is used for local control via manual data entry. • Item 4 – These 10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) provide overall status monitoring at a

glance. • Item 5 – This Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) provides viewing of two lines (at 40

characters per line) of messages, menus, and prompts.



7.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array

The front panel keypad (Figure 7-1, items 2 and 3) controls the local operation of the modem. Enter data via the keypad. Data, prompts, and messages appear on the VFD.

The buttons (keys) have a positive ‘click’ action that provides tactile feedback.

The modem responds with audible ‘beeps’ whenever you press a key:

• A single ‘beep’ indicates that an entry was valid and provides you with confirmation that a proper action was taken;

• A double ‘beep’ indicates that an entry was either invalid, or that a feature or parameter is not available for operation.

The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If you hold a key down for more than three seconds, the key action repeats automatically at the rate of seven keystrokes per second. This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields with many digits, such as Frequency or Data Rate.

Each of the 18 keys provide one or more logical functions:

• Use the [ENT] (Enter) key to select a displayed function or to execute a unit configuration change.

• Use the [CLR] (Clear) key to back out of a selection or to cancel a configuration change that has not been executed using [ENT]. Pressing [CLR] generally returns the display to the previous selection.

• Use the (LEFT) and (RIGHT) keys to move to the next selection or to move the cursor functions. At times, they may also used to move from one section to another.

• Use the (UP) and (DOWN) keys to change configuration data (numbers). You may also use these keys to move from one menu section to another.

• Use the 12 alphanumeric keys as follows:

COLUMN 1 COLUMN 2 COLUMN 3 COLUMN 4

1 (Space) 2 (ABC) 3 (DEF) +/-

4 (GHI) 5 (JKL) 6 (MNO) .

7 (PQRS) 8 (TUV) 9 (WXYZ) 0



The first three columns of keys are multi-function in purpose. Number-to-character assignment for this array means that each successive push of key 1 through 9 selects the nested choices. For example, the first time the ‘2’ key is pushed, it selects a ‘2’; the second time, an ’A’; the third time, a ‘B’; the fourth time, a ‘C’. Pushing the key a fifth time would start over with a ‘2’.

The last column of keys in this array function as follows:

o Use the ‘+/-’ key to change signs (positive/negative); o Use the ‘.’ key to enter a decimal point; o Use the ‘0’ key to enter a zero.

7.1.2 LED Indicators

The 10 LED indicators (Item 4 in Figure 7-1) convey operational states as follows:

• General modem summary fault information • Status • Alarms

The behavior of the individual front panel LED indicators is as follows:

Item Description

Unit Status • Lights GREEN when there are no Unit Faults or Stored Faults. • Lights AMBER when a Unit Fault exists. The fault is stored in the Event Log

memory. • Lights RED when a Unit Alarm currently exists. The fault is stored in the Event

Log memory. Tx Status • Lights GREEN when there are no Tx Traffic Faults or Alarms.

• Lights AMBER when a Tx Traffic Alarm exits. • Lights RED when a Traffic Fault exists. • Remains OFF when the unit is DEMOD ONLY.

Rx Status • Lights GREEN when there are no Rx Traffic Faults or Alarms. • Lights AMBER when an Rx Traffic Alarm exits. • Lights RED when an Rx Fault exists. • Remains OFF when Demod Faults are MASKED.

Tx ON • Lights GREEN when the Transmitter is currently ON (this LED reflects the actual operating state of the transmitter, and not its programmed setting).

• Remains OFF when the Transmitter is OFF. Stored Events • Lights AMBER when Stored Events are logged.

• Remains OFF when there are no Stored Events.



Item Description

IF Lock • Lights GREEN if the Demodulator has constellation lock. • Remains OFF when there is no constellation lock.

Data Lock • Lights GREEN if the Decoder is locked. • Remains OFF when there is no Decoder lock.

Remote • Lights GREEN if the modem is in Remote Communication Mode. • Remains OFF when the unit is in Local Mode (remote monitoring is possible,

but there is no remote control). Test Mode • Lights AMBER when a Test Mode (e.g., IF Loopback) is active.

• Remains OFF when no Test Modes are active. Encryption ON • Lights GREEN when Encryption is ENABLED.

• Remains OFF when Encryption is DISABLED.

7.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)

The SLM-5650A features a VFD (Item 5 in Figure 7-1). The VFD is an active display showing two lines of 40 characters each. It produces a blue light with adjustavle brightness. Compared to a LCD, it has superior viewing characteristics and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.

The opening screen displays once you apply power to the unit. The top line identifies the unit model (i.e., Comtech SLM-5650A Modem). The bottom line displays the running Firmware Version (this number may vary) and the current operating mode for the modem.

Press any key to display the top-level Select menu. On most menu screens, you will see a flashing, solid-block cursor that blinks at a once-per-second rate. This indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field: SELECT: Configure Monitor Test

Save/Load Utility (E)

Where this solid block cursor obscures the item under edit (e.g., a numeric field), the cursor automatically changes to an underline cursor: Tx Frequency: 1955.0000 MHz

Spectrum: Normal (E)



To prevent the display from becoming burnt by a constant image, the unit employs a screen saver feature that activates after 15 minutes. This message constantly scrolls and wraps across the screen. Sandwiched between the product display message “Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Modem” and the user prompt “Press any key to continue”, the screen saver provides the following operating statistics:

Modem Status Code Description

01 Circuit Identification

02 Demodulator receive frequency offset from the nominal

03 Buffer fill status (%)

04 Receive signal level (dBm)

05 Estimated Eb/No

06 Estimated Corrected Bit Error Rate

07 Bit Error Rate reported by the internal Bit Error Rate Test set

Press any key to exit the screen saver mode and restore the previously active screen.



7.1.3.1 Navigating the Menu Screens

Both single-function and multi-function menu screens are used throughout the front panel SELECT: menu interface. Both screen types display all available options and prompt the user to carry out a required action.

For the top-tiered menu screens, such as the SELECT: Configure menu branch screen and its nested SELECT: CONFIGTx menu screen, use the arrow keys to first select a menu item. Press [ENT] to open the nested submenu screen.

Nested submenu screens, such as the SELECT: CONFIGTx Mod submenu, provide multiple functional selections on a single screen, and therefore require additional navigation steps:

First, you must first use the arrow keys to navigate to an available option on the active screen. Press [ENT] to enable selection of that option’s available settings. Note that the cursor jumps from the select option name to its editable/selectable setting.

Then, unless otherwise noted, you must use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Once the desired setting is selected, you must then press [ENT] to save that option setting. Note that the cursor jumps from the setting back to its select option name.

Repeat these steps as needed for each available option. Once all option settings are configured via the arrow keys and the [ENT] key, press [CLR] to exit the active menu screen and return to the previously selected menu.



7.2 Front Panel Operation

7.2.1 Opening Screen

The front panel menu screens provide the visual means to fully control and monitor operation of the SLM-5650A. The first screen to display, after the modem power switch is turned ON (Item 1 in Figure 7-1), is the read-only opening screen:

Comtech SLM-5650A Modem State: GO

Firmware Version x.x.x Mode: TURBO

The top line identifies the product and its operational state. The bottom line displays the currently running firmware version, and the selected mode of operation. Press any key to continue to the SELECT: (Main) menu screen.

You must first use the (CONFIG:) MODE submenu to set the MODEM type, the FREQBAND, and the INTERFACE type before proceeding with the rest of the modem configuration.

7.2.2 SELECT: (Main) Menu SELECT: Configure Monitor Test

Save/Load Utility (E)

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired choice. Press [ENT]. The function of each menu branch is as follows:

Menu Branch Sect. Function

Configure 7.2.3 Use to fully configure the modem.

Monitor 7.2.4 Use to monitor or clear the alarm status of the unit, to view or clear the log of stored events, and to display the Rx Parameters screen.

Test 7.2.5 Use to configure the modem into one of several available Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) modes (e.g., CW or Loopback).

Save/Load 7.2.6 Use to save (store) and retrieve (load) up to 10 different modem configuration.

Utility 7.2.7 Use to configure various unit operation functions, such as setting the Real-Time Clock, adjusting the display brightness, loading FAST options, etc.



7.2.3 (SELECT:) Configure (Configuration) Menu Branch CONFIG: Tx Rx Mode AUPC Transec

AntHndOvr Ref Mask Reset Remote (E)

Use the arrow keys to select a configuration submenu. Press [ENT].

The Configure Menu Branch provides submenus for configuring the following modem operations:

Menu Branch Sect. Function

Tx (Transmit) 7.2.3.1 Use to configure, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the Tx operation of the unit. For example, use these submenus if you wish to change only the Tx Frequency. This submenu is not accessible if modem operation has been set to Demod Only.

Rx (Receive) 7.2.3.2 Use to configure, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the Rx operation of the unit. For example, use these submenus if you wish to change only the Rx Frequency.

Mode 7.2.3.3 Use to configure the modem operational mode, frequency band, interface types and their associated operating modes.

AUPC 7.2.3.4 Use to configure the Automatic Uplink Power Control functions. This menu is selectable only if the “Modem Type” has been set to AUPC.

TRANSEC 7.2.3.5 Use to configure the optional TRANSEC (Transmission Security) Module features.

AntHndOvr 7.2.3.6 Use to configure the Antenna Handover features (when the SLM-5650A is used with the CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch). This menu is selectable only if the Antenna Handover FAST option is installed.

Ref (Reference) 7.2.3.7

Use to configure the internal 10 MHz Reference or allow the unit to phase lock to an External Reference of 1, 5, or 10 MHz. The unit reverts to Internal if the External Reference is not present or is faulted.

Mask 7.2.3.8 Use to configure how the modem handles alarms and faults.

Reset 7.2.3.9 Use to reset the modem to its factory configurastion settings.

Remote (Remote Control)

7.2.3.10 Use to configure whether the unit is being controlled locally or remotely.

The modem may be monitored over the remote control bus at any time. When in Local mode, however, configuration parameters may only be changed through the front panel. Conversely, when in Remote mode, the unit may be monitored from the front panel, but configuration parameters may only be changed via the remote control bus.



7.2.3.1 (CONFIG:) Tx Tx: Mod DataRate Overhead Frequency

Power Clocking Misc Spreading (E)

Use the arrow keys to select a Tx configuration submenu. Press [ENT]:

Submenu Option Mod Select: FEC; Type; Rate; RS; Diff; Scrambler.

DataRate Enter a selected data rate and view the symbol rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES).

Overhead

Select the Overhead Type; view the Overhead Rate; select the Reed-Solomon Code Word; set the Depth.

See Appendix J. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS for information about Overhead bandwidth.

Frequency Select the desired frequency and spectral inversion. Power Select desired output power level and state of the output. Clocking Select the transmit clock source and SCT reference. Misc Select CLK/DataPhase and BPSK Bit Ordering.

Spreading Select the Tx spreading factor and equation. View the Tx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable only if the “Modem Type” has been set to LDPC.



(CONFIG:) Tx Mod

Mod: FEC:VIT Type:QPSK Rate:1/2

RS:Off Diff:On Scram:OM-73 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Scram. Press [ENT]. For any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Setting FEC Standard settings:

• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder. • NONE – Uncoded.

Optional settings: • TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code. • SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder. • ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC • LL – Low Latency LDPC • HP – High Performance LDPC

Type (Modulation)

Standard settings: • BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying. • QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying. • OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.

Optional settings: • 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying. • 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation • 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.

Rate • Viterbi – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 5/6; 7/8 • Uncoded – 1/1 • Turbo – 5/16; 3/4; 7/8; 17/18; 21/44 • Sequential – 1/2; 3/4; 7/8 • ULL – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4 • LL – .378; .451; .541; 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 7/8 • HP – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4

RS Reed-Solomon Encoder: On or Off Diff Differential Encoder: On or Off Scram Scrambling (for energy dispersal):

• V.35 – ITU standard. • MOD-V.35 (Modified V.35) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed- Solomon

compatible . • IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation. • Turbo – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block. • OM73 – Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode. • Synch – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon. • Off – Scrambling is disabled.

When changing modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.



(CONFIG:) Tx DataRate

Tx Data Rate: 020000.000 kbps

Sym Rate: 0266666.666 ksps(E)

Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Data Rate (in kilobits per second):

Method Procedure

1 Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate. Press [ENT]. (See Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES.)

2 Use the arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed. Press [ENT].

When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account: If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data rate allowed is

256 kbps. When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or

256 kbps. The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the

occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.

(CONFIG:) Tx Overhead

Tx: Overhead:None Rate: N/A RS-CW:N/A Depth:N/A (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth. Press [ENT]. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Setting

Overhead Standard settings: IESS-308; IESS-309 Optional setting: AUPC

Rate 96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (None).

See Appendix J. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS for Overhead rate information.

RS-CW Reed-Solomon Code Word, N/K: 126/112; 194/178; 208/192; 219/201; 220/200; 225/205.

Depth Interleaving depth: 4; 8; 16.

Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.



(CONFIG:) Tx Frequency

Tx Frequency: 1955.0000 MHz


Use the arrow keys to select Tx Frequency or Spectrum. Press [ENT]. Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Frequency:

Method Procedure

1 Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT].

2 Use the arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

For 70/140 MHz – the valid range is 52-88 or 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps). For L-Band – the valid range is 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).

When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.

Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Tx Power

Tx Power: State:On Level:-20.0

Control: Normal (E)

Use the arrow keys to select State, Level, or Control. Press [ENT].

Option Setting State Use the arrow keys to select On or Off. Press [ENT]. Level Edit the Power Level from –40 dBm to +10 dBm in 0.1 dB steps:

1. Key in the desired number using the keypad –or– 2. Select the digit to be edited using thearrow keys, and then change the value of that digit

by using the arrow keys. 3. Press [ENT].

Control Use the arrow keys to select Normal, RTS, or VSAT. Press [ENT]. • RTS (Request to Send) is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to

control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or HSSI interface.

• When VSAT is selected, the output state of the modulator is controlled by the demodulator carrier detect status. Modulator output will be enabled when the demodulator is detected, and disabled otherwise.



(CONFIG:) Tx Clocking

Tx Clocking: CLK Source: SCT (E)

SCT Ref: Reference

Use the arrow keys to select Clk Source or SCT Ref. Press [ENT].

Option Setting Clk Source Use the arrow keys to select SCT or Tx-Terr. Press [ENT].

• SCT (Send Clock Timing) – Select as an output to provide a clock reference for the user. • Tx-Terr – Provides transmit clock input on the selected data interface.

SCT Ref Use the arrow keys to select Reference, DataSrcSync, or LoopTiming. Press [ENT]. • Reference – SCT will be generated from the modem’s 10 MHz reference (this could be

derived from and external reference if selected). • DataSRCSync (Data Source Synchronization) – No clock is provided on the interface and a

clock is generated such that it is phase locked to the incoming data stream. • LoopTiming – The clock generated from the received carrier is used as a reference for

generating SCT.

(CONFIG:) Tx Misc

Tx Misc: Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase or BitOrdering. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Tx Misc Clk/DataPhase

Tx Clock Phase: Normal

Data Phase: Normal (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Tx Clock Phase or Data Phase. Press [ENT]. For either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Tx Misc BitOrdering

BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard

Non-Standard (E)

Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as Standard or Non-Standard. Press [ENT].



(CONFIG:) Tx Spreading

Tx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1

Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation. Press [ENT].

Option Setting Factor Tx Spreading Factor (1-512), where 1=Spreading OFF. Equation Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.

Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure either option:

Method Procedure

1 Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].




7.2.3.2 (CONFIG:) Rx Rx: Demod DataRate Overhead Frequency

Acq Buffer Misc CnC Spreading (E)

Use the arrow keys to select an Rx configuration submenu. Press [ENT]:

Submenu Option Demod Select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descrambler. DataRate Enter a selected data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES).

Overhead

Select the Overhead Type; view the Overhead Rate; select the Reed-Solomon Code Word; set the Depth.

See Appendix J. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS for information about Overhead bandwidth.

Frequency Select desired frequency and spectral inversion. Acquisition Select acquisition range and reacquisition time period.

Buffer Select buffer reference clock source, recenter, the buffer size, Bit mode or millisecond mode and external Framing for Plesiochronous operation.

Misc Select Clk and Data Phase, BPSK Bit Ordering, and Eb/No Threshold. CnC Select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay.

Spreading Select the Rx spreading factor and equation; view the Rx Chip Rate. This menu is selectable only if the modem type has been set to LDPC.

Framing is applicable only when using externally framed data with the following formats: T1 or E1 G.704; T2 G.743, G.704, G.707; and E2 G.742, G.704, G.745.



(CONFIG:) Rx Demod

Demod: FEC:VIT Type:BPSK Rate:3/4

RS:N/A Diff:On Descram:OM-73 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descram. Press [ENT]. For any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Settings FEC Standard settings:

• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder. • NONE – Uncoded.

Optional settings: • TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code. • SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder. • ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC • LL – Low Latency LDPC • HP – High Performance LDPC

Type (Modulation)

Standard settings: • BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying. • QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying. • OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.

Optional settings: • 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying. • 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation • 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.

Rate • Viterbi – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 5/6; 7/8 • Uncoded – 1/1 • Turbo – 5/16; 3/4; 7/8; 17/18; or 21/44 • Sequential – 1/2; 3/4; 7/8 • ULL – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4 • LL - .378; .451; .541; 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 7/8 • HP – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4

RS Reed-Solomon Decoder: On or Off. Diff Differential Decoder: On or Off. Descram Descrambling:

• V.35 – ITU standard; • MOD-V.35 (modified V.35) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed-Solomon

compatible; • IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation; • Turbo – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo block; • OM-73 – OM-73 Linkabit modem compatibility mode; • Synch – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon frame. • Off – Descrambling is disabled.

When changing Modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type, or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.



(CONFIG:) Rx DataRate

Rx Data Rate: 020000.000 kbps

Sym Rate: 0266666.666 ksps(E)

Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Data Rate (in kilobits per second):

Method Procedure

1 Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES).

2 Use the arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates, the symbol rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.

When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account: • If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the minimum data rate allowed

is 256 kbps. • When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps

or 256 kbps. • The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the

occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead

(CONFIG:) Rx Overhead

Rx: Overhead:None Rate: N/A RS-CW:N/A Depth:N/A (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth. Press [ENT]. For each option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Settings Overhead (IESS-308, IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional).

Rate 96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (none).

See Appendix J. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS for Overhead rate information.

RS-CW Reed-Solomon Code Rate, N/K: 126/112; 194/178; 208/192; 219/201; 220/200; 225/205. Depth De-interleaving depth: 4; 8; 16

Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.



(CONFIG:) Rx Frequency

Rx Frequency: 1955.0000 MHz


Use the arrow keys to select Rx Frequency or Spectrum. Press [ENT]. Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Frequency:

Method Procedure

1 Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT].


For 70/140 MHz – the valid range is 52-88 or 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz steps). For L-Band – the valid range is 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).

When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead, and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.

Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum. Use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Rx Acquisition

Acquisition: Range: 0001.000 KHz

Reacq: 000 Seconds (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq. Press [ENT].

Option Settings Range Demodulator Acquisition range:

0-60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps). Reacq Holdoff time before the demodulator reverts to normal acquisition:

0 to 999 seconds. During the holdoff, the demodulator will stay centered on the last known frequency position of the carrier for faster reacquisition.

Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:

Method Procedure

1 Key in the desired frequency using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].




(CONFIG:) Rx Buffer

Buffer: Src:RX-Sat Center: Y/N ExtClk

Size:00001024 Mode:Bits Framing (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Src, Center, ExtClk, Size, Mode, or Framing. Press [ENT]. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Settings Src Select Rx-Sat, Int, Tx-Terr, or ExtClk:

• Rx-Sat is the recovered clock from the received carrier. • Int is a clock synthesized from the modems reference (internal or external). • Tx-Terr is the transmit clock supplied by the user. • ExtClk is the external clock supplied by the user when using the optional G.703 interface.

Center Select Yes or No. By selecting Center, the buffer can be manually centered – the buffer is automatically centered when the demodulator locks.

ExtClk Sets the frequency of the external G.703 clock: Select RxDataRate, 5MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz.

Size • If Mode is set to Bits, the valid range is 128-4194304 (in 16 bit steps). • If Mode is set to mSec (milliseconds), the valid range is 2-60 (in 1 mSec steps).

Mode Buffer size format: Set to Bits or mSec. Framing Select T1, E1, T2, or E2:

• T1 – G704 or None. • E1 – G704 or None. • T2 – G704, G743, G747, or None. • E2 – G704, G742, G745, or None.

If selected, permits buffer to operate in a plesiochronous mode when running externally framed data. If Mode is set to mSec and Rx data rate is 1544 kbps (T1), 2048 (E1), 6312 kbps (T2), or 8448 kbps (E2), then the selected framing card is used to calculate the required buffer size so that the buffer will slip properly.

While the framing selections show up in the menus regardless of which interface is plugged in, they will only have effect if the Buffer Mode is set to mSec.



(CONFIG:) Rx Misc

Rx Misc: Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering Eb/No Threshold (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase, BitOrdering, or Eb/No Threshold. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Rx Misc Clk/DataPhase

Rx Clock Phase: Normal

Data Phase: Normal (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Rx Clock Phase or Data Phase. Press [ENT]. For either, use the arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Rx Misc BitOrdering

BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard

Non-Standard (E)

Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK compatibility) as Standard or Non-Standard. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Rx Misc Eb/No Threshold

Eb/No Threshold: 00.1 dB

(E)

This sets an Eb/No threshold. When the received carrier Eb/No is less than the threshold value, the Rx threshold alarm is set.

Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. The valid range is 0.1-20 dB (in 0.1 dB steps). Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Rx CnC

Carrier-in-Carrier(CnC): Mode:Off Acquisition SearchDelay (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay. Press [ENT]. If Mode is selected, use the arrow keys to select either On or Off. Press [ENT].



(CONFIG:) Rx CnC Acquisition

CnC Acquisition: Range: 60.000 KHz

Reacq: 120 Sec (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq. Press [ENT].

Option Settings Range CnC Interfering Carrier Frequency Offset Search Range:

0-60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps). Reacq Holdoff time before the demodulator starts a new search.

Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:

Method Procedure



(CONFIG:) Rx CnC SearchDelay

CnC Search Delay: Min: 000 mSec

Max: 290 mSec (E)

Set the Minimum Delay and Maximum Delay values to use when searching for the Interfering Carrier. Use the arrow keys to select Min or Max. Press [ENT].


Method Procedure





(CONFIG:) Rx Spreading

Rx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1

Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Factor or Equation. Press [ENT].

Option Settings Factor Rx Spreading Factor (1-512), where 1=Spreading OFF. Equation Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.


Method Procedure





7.2.3.3 (CONFIG:) Mode Mode: Modem:TURBO FreqBand:L-Band

Interface:EIA-530 Mode:N/A (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Modem Type, FreqBand, Interface, or (when applicable) the Network Processor Working Mode. Press [ENT]. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Settings

Modem:

• OM-73 – Select Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode. • MIL-165A – Select functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A. • IESS-308 – Select functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate

standard. • IESS-309 – Select functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard. • IESS-310 – Select functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate

standard. • TURBO – Select functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode

interoperability. • 16QAM – Select 16-QAM as a modulation type. • AUPC – Select Automatic Uplink Power Control. • RXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to

“Standard.” • TXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem. • TURBO-FA – Select when unit is in Vipersat SCPC operation. • RXBRSTFA – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to

“Long”. • LDPC – Select Low Density Parity Check and Spreading.

FreqBand • 70/140 MHz (52-88 MHz, 104-176 MHz); • L-Band (950-2000 MHz).

Interface • EIA-530 – Base modem native interface • HSSI – Base modem native interface • Network Processor – Optional data interface • GigaBit Ethernet – Optional data interface • G.703 (BAL) – Optional data interface • G.703 (UNBAL) – Optional data interface • LVDS – Optional data interface.

Mode The menu is fixed at N/A if the optional Network Processor is not present. Otherwise, select the Network Processor Working Mode:

• RtrVSHub • RtrVSHEx • RtrVSRem • RtrVSREx • RtrMPHub • RtrMPRem • RtrPtoP • Bridge



Option Settings

Vipersat mode should not be selected from the front panel under most circumstances. Refer to the supplementary Vipersat User Guide (CEFD P/N MN-0000035) for detailed information on configuring the Vipersat features. When selecting an IF frequency band, both transmit and receive operate in the selected band. Operation of transmit in one IF frequency band and the receive in the other IF frequency band is not permitted. When selecting a data interface type, a native interface can be selected even if an optional interface is installed, but an optional interface can only be selected if it is installed. Both transmit and receive must use the selected interface type. Transmitting using one interface type and receiving using another interface type is not permitted.



7.2.3.4 (CONFIG:) AUPC

You must first go to the (CONFIG:) MODE submenu and set the modem type as AUPC in order to select this menu.

AUPC: Local Remote ASYNC

Logging (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Local, Remote, ASYNC, or Logging. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) AUPC Local

Local AUPC: Enable: Off Power Settings

Target Setting Carrier Loss Action (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Enable, Power Settings, Target Setting, or Carrier Loss Action. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) AUPC Local Enable

Use the arrow keys to select to enable AUPC on the local modem as On or Off. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) AUPC Local Power Settings

Local AUPC Power: Nominal: -10.0 dBm

Min: -30.0 dBm Max: -05.0 dBm (E)

Use thearrow keys to select Nominal:, Min:, or Max:. Press [ENT].

Typical for each setting, use thearrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT] to finish.

Setting Valid Operational Range Nominal: Nominal Output Power:

-40 to +10 dB. Min: Minimum Output Power:

-40 to +10 dB. Max: Maximum Output Power

-40 to +10 dB.



(CONFIG:) AUPC Local Target Settings

Target Settings: Eb/No: 0.60 dB

RateOfChange: 1.0 dB/Minute (E)

Use thearrow keys to select Eb/No or RateOfChange. Press [ENT].

Typical for either setting, use thearrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT] to finish.

Setting Valid Operational Range Eb/No To set the Target Eb/No for AUPC:

3.2 to 16.0 dB. RateOfChange To set the maximum tracking rate:

0.5 to 6.0 dB per minute (in 0.5 dB increments)

(CONFIG:) AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action

Carrier Loss: Local: HOLD

Remote: HOLD (E)

Use thearrow keys to select Local or Remote. Press [ENT].

Option Function Local Sets the action of the local modem when it loses carrier detect. Remote Sets the action of the local modem when the remote modem loses carrier detect.

For either option, use the arrow keys to select HOLD, NOMINAL, or MAXIMUM. Press [ENT] to finish.

(CONFIG:) AUPC Remote

Remote AUPC: Enable: Off BasebandL: Off

Tx Pattern: Off BER: Loss (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Enable, BasebandL, Tx Pattern, or BER. Press [ENT].

Option Function Enable View or modify the status of the remote modem’s AUPC Enable. BasebandL View or modify the status of the remote modem’s I/O Loopback #1 setting.

Tx Pattern View or modify the status of the remote modem’s Tx pattern substitution. Note: In order to maintain compatibility with older Comtech EF Data modems, only 2047 pattern substitution is supported.

BER Monitor BER of the remote modem. The remote modem must have Tx Pattern set to On and the local modem must be transmitting a 2047 pattern.

Typical for all options, use the arrow keys to select operation as On or Off. Press [ENT] to finish.



(CONFIG:) AUPC ASYNC

ASYNC: TxBaud:1200 TxFormat:7E2 (E)

Type:232 RxBaud:1200 RxFormat:7E2

Use thearrow keys to select TxBaud, TxFormat, Type, RxBaud, or RxFormat. Press [ENT]. Typical for each option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.

Option Settings

TxBaud Select the Async Channel Tx Baud Rate: 110; 150; 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400.

TxFormat Select the Async Channel Tx Character Format: 7N1; 7E1; 7O1; 7N2; 7E2; 7O2; 8N1; 8E1; 8O1; 8N2; 8E2; 8O2.

Type Select the Async Channel communications protocol: 232; 485-2W; 485-4W.

RxBaud Select the Async Channel Rx Baud Rate: 110; 150; 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400.

RxFormat Select the Async Channel Rx Character Format: 7N1; 7E1; 7O1; 7N2; 7E2; 7O2; 8N1; 8E1; 8O1; 8N2; 8E2; 8O2.

Max Tx or Rx baud rate is limited to 1.875% of the primary data rate.

(CONFIG:) AUPC Logging

AUPC Statistics: View Clear-All

Config (E)

Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config. Press [ENT].

Option Settings

View Use the arrow keys to view/scroll through the stored AUPC statistics. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to return to the previous menu.

Clear-All Use the arrow keys to select No or Yes to clear all stored AUPC statistics. Press [ENT].

Config Use the arrow keys to set the interval that the statistics are stored. Valid settings are 10 minutes through 90 minutes (in 10-minute increments), or Disabled. Press [ENT].



7.2.3.5 (CONFIG:) Transec TRANSEC: State: Encrypted

Module IP Address Gateway (E)

Use the arrow keys to select State, Module IP Address, or Gateway. Press [ENT].

Option Settings State Select Encrypted or Bypass.

Module IP Address Set the TRANSEC Module’s Management IP Address and subnet mask length.

Gateway Set the TRANSEC Module’s IP Gateway.

7.2.3.6 (CONFIG:) AntHndOvr AntHndOvr: Mode: Off State: ONLINE

PwrOffset: +01.2 Delay: 040ms (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Mode, State, PwrOffset, or Delay. Press [ENT].

Option Function Mode Select the Antenna Handover Mode as Off, Man, or Auto. State Select the current modem state as ONLINE or OFFLINE. PwrOffset Select the offset that is added to the Tx power level to compensate for system loss. Delay Select the size of the buffer used during Handover events.

7.2.3.7 (CONFIG:) Ref Reference: Internal Ext-1Mhz

Ext-5Mhz Ext-10Mhz (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Internal, Ext-1Mhz, Ext-5Mhz or Ext-1Mhz. Press [ENT].

Option Function

Internal Select the Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator.

Ext-1Mhz Select an external 1 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz).





7.2.3.8 (CONFIG:) Mask Mask: TxData RxData Eb/No Threshold DemodFaults (E)

Use the arrow keys to select TxData, RxData, Eb/No Threshold, or DemodFaults. Press [ENT].

Option Settings

TxData This alarm monitors data activity on the transmit data interface: Use the arrow keys to select Masked, Activity, or AIS. Press [ENT].

RxData This alarm monitors the received data activity: Use the arrow keys to select Masked, Activity, or AIS. Press [ENT].

Eb/No Threshold

This alarm monitors the receive Eb/No of the demodulator and compares it to the Eb/No threshold value: Use the arrow keys to select Masked or Active. Press [ENT].

Demod Faults This alarm will mask all demod faults and alarms: Use the arrow keys to select Masked or Active. Press [ENT].

When selecting masked for a given alarm, if the condition occurs the alarm will not be set. Activity or Active means the alarm is enabled. AIS (Alarm Indication Signaling) will put out all ones, allowing the connected equipment to recognize that there is an alarm condition.

7.2.3.9 (CONFIG:) Reset Are you sure that you want to default the modem configuration? No Yes (E)

Use the arrow keys to select No to retain all current configuration settings and return to the (CONFIG:) menu. Press [ENT]. Otherwise, select Yes to immediately reboot the modem with is factory-shipped settings.

• The default Base Modem Management IP Address is 192.169.1.1/24. o The default User Name is comtech. o The default Password is comtech.

• This Reset selection only resets the Base Modem. The NP Card and TRANSEC (if installed) are not reset using this Reset selection.



7.2.3.10 (CONFIG:) Remote Remote Control: Mode:Serial

SerialConfig EthernetConfig (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Mode, SerialConfig, or EthernetConfig. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote Mode

Use the arrow keys to select Local, Serial, or Serial+Ethernet. Press [ENT].

Local mode limits your access to remote operations. You may only monitor the status of the modem.

(CONFIG:) Remote SerialConfig

Remote Control: Interface Format Baudrate (E)

For serial communications, use the arrow keys to select Interface, Format, or Baudrate. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote SerialConfig Interface

M&C Bus Interface: RS232 RS485-2W

RS485-4W TTL(Switch) CRS-500 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select RS232, RS485-2W (2-wire), RS485-4W (4-wire), TTL (Switch), or CRS-500. Press [ENT].

When you select RS-232, the local M&C Bus Address displays 0000. Addressing is not supported by RS-232 or TTL (Switch) because they are not multi-drop communication standards.

If you select RS-485, the display will show address 0001 to 9999. This address can be changed using the front panel. The most significant digit is for Comtech EF Data redundancy switches.

If you select TTL (Switch), this enables interoperation with the CRS-311 (1:1) or CRS-300 (1:N) redundancy switches.

With RS-232 Selected: Local M&C Bus Address:

0000

With RS-485 Selected: Local M&C Bus Address:

0001



(CONFIG:) Remote SerialConfig Format

Local M&C Bus Format: 8N1

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select the character format 7N1, 7E1, 7O1, 7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1 (default), 8E1, 8O1, 8N2, 8E2, or 8O2. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote SerialConfig Baudrate

Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:

38400 Baud (E)

Use the arrow keys to select a Baud Rate of 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 (default), 57600, or 115200. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig

Ethernet Config: IP Address/Range MAC Gateway

SNMP Option Card Addr (E)

Use the arrow keys to select IP Address/Range, MAC, Gateway, SNMP, or Option Card Addr. Press [ENT].

See Sections 7.2.3.10.1 and 7.2.3.10.2 for detailed information about using the (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP and (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr menu screens.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig IP Address/Range

Ethernet IP Address/Range:

192.168.001.005/24 (E)

To enter the IP Address and range (subnet mask), use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig MAC

Modem MAC Address: 00-00-B09-000-FC-00

(E)

The modem’s MAC address is programmed at the factory and is not user changeable. If installed, the Gigabit Ethernet Interface’s MAC Address also displays on this screen.



(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Gateway

Ethernet Default Gateway IP Address:

192.168.001.001 ()

The IP Gateway Address is the default address that the modem will send all IP responses when the message originated from a source outside the modems local attached network. To enter the Gateway IP Address, use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

7.2.3.10.1 (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP

SNMP is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.

For modems running Base Modem Firmware Version 1.4.6 or higher, the base modem management can be changed to secure mode by changing the SNMP Version setting from SNMPv1/v2c to SNMPv3. Make sure to carefully read the operational restrictions described in this section when selecting your SNMP Version as SNMPv3.

SNMP: Version Communities Traps

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select Version, Communities, or Traps. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Version

SNMP Version: SNMPv1v2c SNMPv3

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select SNMPv1v2c or SNMPv3. Press [ENT].

After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, access to the HTTP and Telnet interfaces will be blocked. This operational change also forces the Trap Version to be SNMPv3. Change of the management mode to SNMPv3 is allowable via the HTTP (non-secure) interface, but you should be aware that, after the modem reboot, HTTP access will no longer be available. SNMPv3 operation uses the Base Modem’s IP Address via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem HTTPS (secure) Interface is accessible by the TRANSEC IP Address.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Communities

SNMP Communities: Read Write

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select Read or Write. Press [ENT].



(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Read

SNMP Read Community:

public (E)

To edit the SNMP Read Community string: Use thearrow keys to select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that character.

• Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available. • All printable ASCII characters are available with the exception of the backslash ‘/’

(ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’ (ASCII code 126).

Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed from the Read Community string upon entry.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Communities Write

SNMP Write Community:

private (E)

To edit the SNMP Write Community string: Use the arrow keys to select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that character.



Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed from the Write Community string upon entry.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Traps

SNMP Traps: Address #1 Address#2

Port Community Version (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Address #1, Address #2, Port, Community, or Version. Press [ENT].



(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Address #1/#2

SNMP Traps IP Address #X:

000.000.000.000 (E)

Where X indicates IP Address #1 or IP Address #2:

To edit the SNMP Trap Destination IP Address: Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

To disable the Traps, set both Trap IP Addresses to 000.000.000.000

CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Port

SNMP Trap Port:00164

To edit the SNMP Trap Port: Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit.

If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or higher, you must make sure to only use port values that are not already in use by other services. The standard port value is 164.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Community

SNMP Trap Community:

comtech

To edit the SNMP Trap Community string: Use the arrow keys to select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that character.



Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed from the SNMP Trap Community string upon entry.



(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig SNMP Traps Version

SNMP Trap Version: SNMPv1 SNMPv2

SNMPv3 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select SNMPv1, SNMPv2, or SNMPv3. Press [ENT].

The Trap Version selection is forced to SNMPv3 if you select SNMPv3 as your SNMP Version.

7.2.3.10.2 (CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Option Card Addr: Gigabit Ethernet

Network Proc (E)

Use this menu to edit the IP Address and subnet mask (range) for either optional interface. Use the arrow keys to select Gigabit Ethernet or Network Proc. Press [ENT].

When Network Proc is selected, the submenu also provides configuration options for this optional module.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Gigabit Ethernet

Option Card Ethernet IP Address/Range:

192.168.001.002/24 (E)

To edit the Gigabit Ethernet Interface Management IP Address and Range: Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc

NP Card: AddrMode:Dual Security: Low

BPM:Off Traffic IP Mgmt IP (E)

Use the arrow keys to select AddrMode, Security, BPM, Traffic IP, or Mgmt IP . Press [ENT].



(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc AddrMode

Use the arrow keys to select the Address Mode as Local or Dual. Press [ENT].

• When in Single Address Mode: Select Traffic IP to edit the NP Module Ethernet IP Address and Range

• When in Dual Address Mode: Select Mgmt IP to edit the NP Module Ethernet IP Address and Range

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Security

Use the arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled Management Security level as Low or High. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc BPM

Changing the Bridge Mode will leave QOS On. QOS should be turned Off prior to setting the Bridge Mode.

Use the arrow keys to select the BPM (Bridge Point to Multipoint) mode as On or Off. Press [ENT].

When the BPM Mode FAST feature is On, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic. The ‘J5 Ethernet’ port can be used for Routed IP Traffic and is isolated from the Bridged traffic network. NP HTTPS management is only available using the Base Modem’s ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Traffic IP


192.168.001.054/24 (E)

To edit the Network Processor Module Traffic IP Address and Range (when the module is in Single Address Mode): Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Mgmt IP


192.168.002.072/16 (E)

To edit the Network Processor Module Management IP Address and Range (when the module is in Dual Address Mode): Use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].



7.2.4 (SELECT:) Monitor Menu Branch Monitor: Alarms Event-Log Rx-Params CnC Stats GigaBit I/F Stats

The Monitor Menu Branch provides submenus that permit you to monitor the alarm status of the unit, to view the log of stored events, and to display the Rx Parameters screen. Use the arrow keys to select Alarms, Event-Log, Rx-Params, CnC, Stats, Gigabit I/F, or Stats. Press [ENT].

7.2.4.1 (Monitor:) Alarms Live Alarms: Transmit Receive Unit

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select Transmit, Receive, or Unit. Press [ENT].

(Monitor:) Alarms Transmit

Mod: ---- Press <ENT> for

Intf: -+-+-- detailed status

Press [ENT] to enable access to the available read-only Modulator and Intf (Interface)Tx alarm status screens. Use the arrow keys to then page through the available Modulator and Interface character positions (Mod#1 through #4, and Tx Intf#1 through #4). The status message to the right changes based on the current position, as follows:

Transmit (Tx) Alarm Position Description Top row Mod #1

Mod #2 Mod #3 Mod #4

Modulator symbol clock Phase Lock Loop status. Modulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status. Modulator IQ activity status. Modulator Nyquist filter Over range.

Bottom row Tx Intf #1 Tx Intf #2 Tx Intf #3 Tx Intf #4

Tx data interface clock Phase Lock Loop status. Tx data interface terrestrial clock activity status. Tx data interface SCT (send clock timing) Phase Lock Loop status. Tx data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.

The examples that follow depict alarm status screens displayed for the Mod 1st and Intf Tx 1st character positions. If the Mod 1st character position is selected: Mod: +--- Mod symbol clk

Intf: ---- not locked.

If the Intf Tx 1st character position is selected: Mod: ---- TxIntf data

Intf: +--- not locked.



(Monitor:) Alarms Receive

Demod: ------ Press <ENT> for

Intf: ---------- detailed status

Press [ENT] to access the available read-only Demodulator and Intf (Interface) Rx alarm screens. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the displayed Demodulator and Interface character positions (Demod#1 through #6, and Rx Intf#1 through #10). The status message to the right changes based on the current cursor position, as follows:

Receive (Rx) Alarm Position Description Top row Demod #1

Demod #2 Demod #3 Demod #4 Demod #5 Demod #6

Demodulator carrier Phase Lock Loop status. Demodulator FEC (forward error correction) lock status. Demodulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status. Demodulator IQ activity status. Composite Power exceeds 40 dBc. Composite Power exceeds 20 dBm.

Bottom row Rx Intf #1 Rx Intf #2 Rx Intf #3 Rx Intf #4 Rx Intf #5 Rx Intf #6 Rx Intf #7 Rx Intf #8 Rx Intf #9 Rx Intf #10

Demultiplexer lock status. Doppler buffer status. Doppler buffer fill status. Doppler buffer overflow status. Doppler buffer underflow status. Doppler buffer Phase Lock Loop status. Doppler buffer reference clock activity status. Rx data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status. Rx Eb/No lower than Eb/No threshold status. Internal BERT sync status.

The examples that follow depict the alarm status screens displayed for the Demod 1st and Intf Rx 1st character positions. If the Demod 1st character position is selected: Demod: +----- Demod IF not

Intf: ---------- not locked.

If the Intf 1st character position is selected: Demod: ------ Demux

Intf: +--------- not locked.



(Monitor:) Alarms Unit

Unit ---------------- Press <ENT> for

------- detailed status

Press [ENT] to access the available read-only SLM-5650A Unit Alarm screens. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the displayed character positions (Unit#1 through #23). The status message to the right changes based on the current cursor position, as follows:

Unit Alarm Position Description Top row Unit #1

Unit #2 Unit #3 Unit #4 Unit #5 Unit #6 Unit #7 Unit #8 Unit #9 Unit #10 Unit #11 Unit #12 Unit #13 Unit #14 Unit #15 Unit #16

+ 5.0 volt power supply is out of range. + 3.3 volt power supply is out of range. + 2.5 volt power supply is out of range. + 1.5 volt power supply is out of range. + 12 volt power supply is out of range. - 12 volt power supply is out of range. + 18 volt power supply is out of range. Cooling fan fault. External reference activity status. 192 MHz clock Phase Lock Loop status. 10 MHz reference Phase Lock Loop status. M&C FPGA configuration fault. Modulator FPGA configuration fault. Demodulator FPGA configuration fault. Decoder FPGA configuration fault. Transmit interface FPGA configuration fault.

Bottom row Unit #17 Unit #18 Unit #19 Unit #20 Unit #21 Unit #22 Unit #23

Receive interface FPGA configuration fault. FEC #1 FPGA configuration fault. FEC #2 FPGA configuration fault. Optional data interface card (module) FPGA configuration fault. FPGA DCM Phase Lock Loop fault. Network Processor mailbox communications error. TRANSEC mailbox communications error.

The example that follows shows the appearance of the alarm status screen when you select the Unit 1st character position: Unit: +---------------- +5.0V Power is

------ out of range.



7.2.4.2 (Monitor:) Event-Log Stored Events: View Clear-All

ModemParameters (E)

Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or ModemParameters. Press [ENT].

(Monitor:) Event-Log View

Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/05

Mod: ---- ++ -- (E)

To view the details of a stored fault: Use the arrow keys to scroll through the event numbers. Press [ENT] to select. Then, on the bottom line, use the arrow keys to navigate the listed fault character positions to view the fault description.

When the listed fault is Power On or Power Off, nothing is displayed if you attempt to view details for that event.

(Monitor:) Event-Log Clear-All

Clear All Stored Events? No Yes

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored faults. Press [ENT].

Monitor: Event-Log ModemParameters

Current Temp: +41 Max Temp: +56

Comp Power< -70.0 Max Power> +25.0 (E)

This read-only screen displays the unit’s Current Temperature, Max Temp, Comp Power and Max Power. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.



7.2.4.3 (Monitor:) Rx-Params Fc=+05917 RSL<-60.0 dBm BERT=N/A Buf=000% Eb/No=Loss BER <1.0E-12 (E)

This read-only screen monitors the following Rx operating parameters:

• Fc displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz. The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem (60 kHz).

• RSL displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm. The range supported is (+15) to (-60) dBm.

• BERT displays the measured BER. This requires that the modem be set to Test mode for Rx. If a Fireberd is supplying a data pattern, only the Test mode for the Rx needs to be turned on. The Fireberd data pattern and the modems’ data patterns must match to work properly.

• Buf displays the buffer fill status as a percentage. • Eb/No displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20

dB Eb/No. • BER displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s measurement of the carrier

to noise.

The difference between BERT and BER is that BERT is measured when the Test mode is turned ON, whereas BER is estimated in the demodulator.

Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.

7.2.4.4 (Monitor:) CnC (DoubleTalk® Carrier-in-Carrier®) CnC: Delay=000,005uS FreqOff=008.7kHz

Eb/No=Loss Ratio<-10dB (E)

This read-only screen updates once every second. If enabled and locked, this screen monitors the CnC performance data:

• Delay displays the current search delay value. • FreqOff displays the current frequency offset between the outbound interferer and the

desired inbound. • Eb/No displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20

dB Eb/No. • Ratio displays the ratio of outbound interferer power to desired inbound power. The

range is ±10 dB.

Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.



7.2.4.5 Monitor: Stats (Statistics) Link Statistics: View Clear-All

Config (E)

Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config. Press [ENT].

Monitor: Stats View

Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/11

Min: Loss Avg: Loss (E)

Use the arrow keys to scroll through the stored statistics. The statistics are limited to Minimum, Average, and Maximum Eb/No. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.

Monitor: Stats Clear-All

Clear All Stored Statistics? No Yes

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored statistics. Press [ENT].

Monitor: Stats Config

Statistics Logging Interval:

10 minutes (E)

Use the arrow keys to set the Statistics Logging Interval to 10 minutes through 90 minutes (in 10-minute increments), or Disabled. Press [ENT].

7.2.4.6 Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics

This menu is visible only when the modem is equipped with the optional GigaBit Ethernet Interface (GBEI) Module.

GigaBit Ethernet Card Statistics:

View Clear-All

Use the arrow keys to select View or Clear-All:

• Select View to view the link statistical counters. • Select Clear-All to clear or reset the FPGA link error counter.

Press [ENT].



7.2.5 (SELECT:) Test Menu Branch TEST: Carrier Loopback BERT

LampTest (E)

Select the Carrier, Loopback, BERT, or LampTest submenu. Press [ENT].

Carrier Test Modes, Loopback, and Tx BERT are not allowed when the modem is set to Demod Only.

7.2.5.1 (TEST:) Carrier Carrier Test Modes: Normal Tx-CW

Tx-1,0 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Normal, Tx-CW, or Tx-1,0 then press [ENT].

Carrier Test Mode Description

Normal Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.

TX-CW The modulator produces a pure carrier that can be used for frequency and power measurements.

TX 1,0 The modulator produces an offset (single upper side band suppressed) test carrier. Use this test mode to check for quadrature error in the modulator.

7.2.5.2 (TEST:) Loopback Loopback Test Modes: Normal IFℓ I/O1ℓ

(E)

Use the arrow keys to select Normal, IFℓ, or I/O1ℓ. Press [ENT].

Loopback Test Mode Description

Normal Not a test mode: Select for standard modem operation.

IFℓ IF Loopback: Loops the output of the modulator back to the demodulator (inside the modem) to verify transmit and receive configurations match as well as the data inputs and outputs.

I/01ℓ Baseband Loopback: Loops the transmit data (after the interface) back to the receive data path interface. This mode is useful for checking interface cabling and clocking.



7.2.5.3 (TEST:) BERT BERT: Tx:Off Pattern:2047 ErrIns

Reset Rx:Off Errs:=0000000 BER:NoSync

Use the arrow keys to select Tx, Pattern, ErrIns, Reset, Rx, Errs, or BER. Press [ENT]. For any option, use the arrow keys to select the desired setting. Press [ENT] to execute the test.

BERT Mode Option

Description

Tx Select to turn the transmit test pattern generator On or Off. Pattern Select from the available patterns:

• Mark – All ones. • Space – All zeros. • 1:1 – A one followed by a zero and then repeats. • 1:2 – A one followed by two zero’s and then repeats. • 2E15-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^15 –1, compatible with standard BERTs. • 2E20-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^20 –1, compatible with standard BERTs. • 2E23-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^23 –1, compatible with standard BERTs. • MIL188 – A modified pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1, compatible with the MIL-188-165

test data pattern requirement of a continuous stream of 50 zero’s every 10,000 bits. This pattern has 5 normal 2047 patterns, with the fifth patterns longest string of zero’s (11) stretched an additional 39 bits to create a lack of transitions for 50 bits approximately every 10,000 bits.

• 2047 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1, compatible with standard BERTs. ErrIns Select to insert a single error into the data stream by pressing [ENT]. Reset Select to restart the BER test and clear the error and BER displays. Rx Select to turn on the receive bit error test set. Errs Select to view the absolute number of errors counted. BER Select to view the bit error rate as measured by the modem.

The BER function can work with a Fireberd supplying the transmit data test pattern, while only turning on the Rx BER tester. The transmit test pattern generator can be turned on at the far end of the link as long as the test patterns match the Rx BERT. An external bit error test set can be used even when the internal bit error test set is enabled. If AIS is enabled, the data will be overwritten with all ones.

7.2.5.4 (TEST:) LampTest

Select LampTest to perform a diagnostic run on the front panel LEDs and VFD.



7.2.6 (SELECT:) Save/Load Menu Branch Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View

Empty (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Loc or Action. Press [ENT].

Option Settings Loc There are 10 locations available [0-9]. To save or load a stored configuration, use the

arrow keys to select the location. Press [ENT]. Action View is the default setting to select and view the location before loading or saving.

Otherwise, select Save or Load at the selected location [0-9]: • To save a configuration, go through the modem’s menus and configure all the

necessary parameters. Then, select a location, select Save. Press [ENT]. • To load a saved configuration, select the desired configuration, select Load. Press

[ENT].

If you reset the modem, this will clear all configurations!

Note that:

• If a location has no saved configuration present, the bottom line will display “Empty” as per the example shown above.

• If a location has a configuration saved to it, the bottom line will display the date stamp for that saved configuration in “HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY” format: Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View

16:18:00 08/07/10 (E)

• If a location has a configuration saved, and the user attempts to save a new configuration to that location, the screen will display the following message: This configuration contains data. Would

you like to overwrite it? No (E)

The default to this question is No. To overwrite, use the arrow keys to change the answer to Yes. Press [ENT].

A programming sequence message will briefly display, and then the screen displays the following message before returning back to the (SELECT:) Save/Load menu screen: The current configuration has been saved

to the selected location.



7.2.7 (SELECT:) Utility Menu Branch UTIL: RT-Clk RefAdjust ID Display Temp Agc Alarm PwrCal Firmware FAST (E)

Use the arrow keys to select RT-Clk, RefAdjust, ID, Display, Temp, Agc, Alarm, Alarm, PwrCal, Firmware, or FAST submenu. Press [ENT].

7.2.7.1 (UTIL:) RT-Clk Edit Real-Time Clock:

15:34:25 27/09/16 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select and set the Real-Time Clock. The time is provided in the military 24-hour time format (HH:MM:SS). The date is provided in the DAY/MONTH/YEAR (dd/mm/yy) European format.

7.2.7.2 (UTIL:) RefAdjust Internal 10 MHz Ref Freq Fine Adjust: 3F3 (E)

Use the arrow keys to select and adjust the internal high stability 10 MHz oscillator to counteract aging. The control value is in hex – not decimal – and has a range of 000 to FFF. The typical calibration point for a modem is nominally around 400.

7.2.7.3 (UTIL:) ID Edit Circuit ID: (E)

------------------------

Use the arrow keys to assign a name for the unit in the communications link. This name (Circuit ID) can be any combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.

Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / . (period) , (comma) and space.

7.2.7.4 (UTIL:) Display Edit Display Brightness

100% (E)

Use the arrow keys to adjust the front panel display brightness. Valid settings are 25%, 50%, 75% or 100%.

7.2.7.5 (UTIL:) Temp Modem Temp (Deg C): RF=+61 PS=+40

M&C=+35 Mod=+43 Demod=+51 (E)

This read-only screen allows the user to view the modem internal temperatures (RF, PS, M&C, Mod and Demod).



7.2.7.6 (UTIL:) Agc (Automatic Gain Control) AgcMon: Min Value: 00.0 Volts

Max Value: 10.0 Volts (E)

Use this submenu to set the minimum and maximum voltage levels for the external AGC monitor voltage that is available through the rear panel ‘J9 Auxiliary’ connector.

Use the arrow keys to select Min Value or Max Value. Press [ENT]. Note that:

• Min Value specifies the voltage to output on the External AGC voltage signal when the demodulator RSL is at its minimum level.

• Max Value specifies the voltage to output when the demodulator RSL is at its maximum level.

To edit either value, use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].

7.2.7.7 (UTIL:) Alarm Audible Alarm: Disable Enable

(E)

Use the arrow keys to either Disable or Enable the alarm. Press [ENT].

7.2.7.8 (UTIL:) PwrCal Burst L-Band Pwer Cal: The modem will

Be (re)calibrated. Continue? No Yes

To execute calibration of the L-Band board for burst operation, use the arrow keys to select Yes. Press [ENT].

7.2.7.9 (UTIL:) Firmware Firmware Images: Information Select (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Information or Select. Press [ENT].

(UTIL:) Firmware Information

Firmware Info: Bootrom Image#1 Image#2 (E)

This menu permits you to view information on the firmware and software used by the modem. Use the arrow keys to select Bootrom, Image#1, or Image#2.



(UTIL:) Firmware Information Bootrom

Bootrom: 10/18/07 FW-0000029- 1.1.1

This screen displays the Bootrom release date, the Firmware number and the revision number. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.

(UTIL:) Firmware Information Image#X

Image#X: Bulk App M&C Mod Demod Decoder

Filters TxIntfc RxIntfc Turbo (E)

Where Image #X denotes selection of Image#1 or Image#2:

This information may differ for each firmware image load. Both Image screens display similar information – the loaded image’s firmware number with revision letter (shown as ‘x’); the firmware version’s release date (shown as MM/DD/YY); and the firmware version number (shown as #.#.#):

Image#X Item Example

Bulk (The bulk is the sum of all the individual pieces) FW-0000030x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#

App FW-0000031x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# M&C FW-0000032x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# Mod FW-0000033x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# Demod FW-0000034x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# Decoder FW-0000038x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# Filters FW-0000034x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# TxIntfc FW-0000040x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# RxIntfc FW-0000041x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.# Turbo FW-0000042x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#

Opt This number varies depending on the installed optional interface (NP, GBEI, etc.): FW-#######x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#

(UTIL:) Firmware Select

Current Active Image#2

Next Reboot Image#1 #2 (E)

This menu sets which Firmware Image loads upon bootup. Use the arrow keys to select the Next Reboot Image as #1 or #2. Press [ENT].

To reboot the modem with the selected Next Reboot Image, cycle the power.



7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST


FAST: Configuration S/N 000000000 View Options (E)

Use the arrow keys to select View Options or Configuration. Press [ENT].

(UTIL:) FAST View Options

View Options: 01 Installed Data Rate <= 155 Mbps

Use the arrow keys to browse the available FAST options. The nested screens identify whether or not each FAST option is Installed or Not installed. There are 30 FAST options, listed as 01 to 30:

FAST Option Description

01 Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.

02 8PSK/8QAM modulation 03 16QAM modulation 04 16APSK/32APSK Modulation 05 AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead 06 ASYNC ESC 07 Reed-Solomon Coding 08 Turbo FEC Option

09 Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.

10 Network Processor I/F Card (Module) 11 Sequential Encode/Decoder 12 TRANSEC Module

13 Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate: Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 15 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, or <=70 Mbps

14 NP QOS (Quality of Service) 15 NP Management Security 16 NP Vipersat 17 Demodulator Only

18 Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.

19 TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.



FAST Option Description

20 Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <=155 Mbps.

21 NP OW (Order Wire) Serial Commands 22 NP BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode 23 Customer Options 24 NP Antenna Handover 25 LDPC FEC Option 26 Extended Temperature Range 27 Spectrum Spreading Full Rate 28 DSSS-MA Option 29 IESS-308V2 Option 30 Enhanced Spreading Features

(UTIL:) FAST Configuration

FAST Configuration: Enter Modem Code

Demo Mode (E)

Use the arrow keys to select Enter Modem Code or Demo Mode. Press [ENT].

7.2.7.10.1 Enter Modem Code (FAST Activation Procedure)

Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE for the proper use of Enter Modem Code.

This is a 20-digit code, purchased from Comtech EF Data product Support, which permits upgrading the modem functionality.

Legal characters are hexadecimal, 0-F.



7.2.7.10.2 FAST Demo Mode FAST Demo Mode: Off (Off,On)

604800 seconds remain (E)

FAST Demo Mode allows access to ALL SLM-5650A FAST Options for 604800 seconds (seven 24-hour calendar days). The bottom line displays the time remaining – the time format is in seconds.

On the top line, use the arrow keys to select Demo Mode as Off or On. Press [ENT].

The time count decrements only when Demo Mode is turned On. You may turn Demo Mode On and Off an unlimited number of times until the full 604800 seconds (seven 24-hour calendar days) expire.

Upon expiration of the Demo period, the following message displays: FAST Demo Mode: Expired

0000000 seconds remain (E)

Once the Demo Mode timer reaches 0000000, you may no longer enable FAST Options Demo Mode. The modem will automatically perform a configuration reset. This means that all configuration parameters return to factory default settings, and the modem will reboot. The modem will not check its current configuration against purchased FAST options.



BLANK PAGE


Ethernet Interface Operation 8–1 MN-SLM-5650A


8.1 Ethernet Management Interfaces & Protocols

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem rear panel features a 10/100 BaseT RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ monitor and control (M&C) interface port. This port operates in the Auto-Negotiation and Auto-Crossover mode.

You may use the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module as an alternate means of M&C access. The NP Interface Module features four 10/100/1000 BaseT RJ-45ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. The operational mode of these ports can be individually selected for Auto-Negotiation or fixed mode operation.

The internal systems of the SLM-5650A are interconnected with an internal Ethernet bus, which allows both the Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port and NP Ports 1 through 4 to provide M&C access while the NP is operating in Router modes.

The following Ethernet M&C Protocols are supported by the SLM-5650A:

• HTTP (non-secure) or HTTPS (secure) interface – These interface modes require a compatible user-supplied web browser such as Internet Explorer, FireFox, or Google Chrome. These protocols are supported by the following systems:

o Base Modem M&C (HTTP only) o Network Processor (NP) M&C (HTTP/HTTPS) o TRANSEC Module M&C (HTTPS only)

For more information about these operational interfaces, see: • Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE • Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)

INTERFACE MODULE • Appendix F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE

OPERATION



• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) - This protocol requires a user-supplied Network Management System (NMS) or a user-supplied MIB File Browser. Comtech EF Data supplies the MIB File sets required for the SLM-5650A Modem.

SNMP is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.

• Telnet Interface - This non-secure protocol requires use of the user PC’s Command Line Interface (CLI), or a user-supplied terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal, PuTTY, or TeraTerm.

Telnet is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.

• SSH (Secure Shell) Interface - This protocol requires use of the user PC’s CLI, or a user-supplied terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal, PuTTY, or TeraTerm.

This interface protocol is supported by the NP Interface Module and the TRANSEC Module.

8.1.1 Secure Ethernet Management Interfaces

8.1.1.1 Base Modem Interface

For modems running Base Modem Firmware Version 1.4.6 or higher, the base modem management can be changed to secure mode by changing the SNMP setting from SNMPv1/v2c to the SNMPv3mode:

• The SNMP mode is available using the front panel menu: SELECT:Configure→Remote→EthernetConfig→SNMP→Version→SNMPv1/v2c or SNMPv3.

• After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, the HTTP and Telnet access will be blocked. This operational change also forces the Trap mode to be SNMPv3Traps.

• The SNMP Trap Destination Port (default 164) can be changed to a user value in the SELECT:Configure→Remote→EthernetConfig→SNMP→ Traps→Port menu. If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or higher, you must make sure to only use port values that are not already in use by other services.

• Change of the management mode to SNMPv3 is allowable via the HTTP (non-secure) interface, but you should be aware that, after the modem reboot, HTTP access will no longer be available. The SNMPv3 mode uses the Base Modem’s IP Address via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem HTTPS Interface is accessible by the NP IP Address or the TRANSEC IP Address.



8.1.1.2 Optional NP Interface Module

When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A, the NP Management Security (available as a FAST Option) may be used to change to an alternative secure network management mode:

• When NP-Management Security is Low the modem operates in a normal access mode. • When NP-Management Security is High the modem has secure access modes active:

o The NP Interface changes from HTTP to HTTPS web page access, and the Base Modem web page and Telnet are disabled. The Base Modem M&C is accessible with SNMPv3, using the NP’s IP Address on the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

o When the modem is operating in Router Mode: A number of Base Modem parameters are available via the NP HTTPS

Interface. A limited number of status-only NP parameters are typically viewable

over the Base Modem HTTP Interface. o When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode:

NP Management Security cannot be set to High when the NP is in (Static) Bridge mode.

There is no M&C provided by the NP Interface Module. The internal Ethernet connection from Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port

and the TRANSEC Module is disabled to the NP module interface. The NP Interface ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic. Ethernet communication between the Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port

and the NP Interface is disabled, this is independent functionality that is not changed by the Management Security mode.

o When the NP is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode: NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data

traffic. The ‘J5 Ethernet’ port can be used for Routed IP Traffic and is isolated

from the Bridged traffic network. M&C of the Base Modem, NP Interface, and TRANSEC Module are only

available using the Base Modem’s ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

Selecting the NP (Static) Bridge Mode or Bridge Point-to-Multipoint Mode has the affect of isolating the ‘J5 Ethernet’ communication from the Bridged IP traffic crossing through the modem via the NP Ports 1 through 4. This is an important point to consider for more secure network operations. See Figure 8-1.



Feature Description Comments A Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ Port Base Modem Management IP Address and Gateway

Address B TRANSEC Module TRANSEC Module IP Address and Gateway Address C Plug-in NP Interface Module Ports 1 through 4 NP IP Address

Figure 8-1. IP Traffic Isolation When Using Bridge Modes

8.1.1.3 Base Modem + Optional NP Interface + Optional TRANSEC Module

Each of these three system areas require their own IP Address and User name and Password for login. See Figure 8-1.

The TRANSEC Module is always accessible through the Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional TRANSEC Module Interface, and Management Security is enabled, the network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply. Additionally, the NP HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter associated with the TRANSEC Module – a second TRANSEC Key.



The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The ‘J5 Ethernet’ port is used in this case, and the Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:

Base Modem Network Processor TRANSEC Module

• HTTPS Proxy via the TRANSEC Module

• SNMPv3 (via the NP’s IP Address)

• HTTPS • SSH • HTTPS (Proxy via the

TRANSEC Module)

• HTTPS • SSH



8.2 SNMP Interface

The SNMP is an Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks. An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:

• The managed device. This includes the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem. • The SNMP Agent. The software that runs on the SLM-5650A. The SLM-5650A SNMP

Agent supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. • The user-supplied NMS. The software that runs on the manager.

8.2.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files

MIB files are used for SNMP remote management of a unique device. A MIB file consists of a tree of nodes called Object Identifiers (OIDs). Each OID provides remote management of a particular function. These MIB files should be compiled in a user-supplied MIB Browser or SNMP Network Monitoring System server.

The following MIB files are associated with the SLM-5650A:

MIB File/Name ( ‘x’ indicates revision letter) Description

fw10874-2x.mib ComtechEFData MIB file

ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF Data products and consists of only the following OID: Name: ComtechEFData Type: MODULE-IDENTITY OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247 Full path: iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).comtechEFData(6247) Module: ComtechEFData

FW-0000049x.mib SLM-5650A OID MIB File MIB file consists of all of the OID’s for management of the modem functions.

FW-0000050x.mib SLM-5650A Traps MIB file Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps common for base modems.



8.2.2 SNMP Community Strings

In SNMP v1/v2c, the SNMP Community String is sent unencrypted in the SNMP packets. Caution must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that SNMP packets travel only over a secure and private network if security is a concern.

The SLM-5650A uses Community Strings as a password scheme that provides authentication before gaining access to the modem agent’s MIBs. They are used to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.

Type the SNMP Community String into the user-supplied MIB Browser or Network Node Management software.

The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:

• Read Community default = public • Write Community default = private • Trap Community default = comtech

The maximum number of characters for community strings shall not exceed 20. All printable ASCII characters, except ’\’ and ‘~’ are allowed. No trailing spaces for community strings.

For proper SNMP operation, the SLM-5650A MIB files must be used with the associated version of the SLM-5650A base modem M&C. Please refer to the SLM-5650A SW Release Notes for information on the required FW/SW compatibility.

8.2.3 SNMP Traps

The SNMP traps include the Unit faults, TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and when it is cleared.

You need to compile the “Traps” file into the MIB Browser library only if you intend to use Traps. When you set the modem for SNMPv1/v2c, you may select Trap (v1) or (v2c) types; the modem automatically forces Trap Version(v3) when you select SNMPv3 mode. You may also use the slm5650SNMPTrapVersion OID to configure the Trap (v1) or (v2c) type.

You can assign two Trap destination addresses. If you are running Base FW Version 1.4.8c or higher, you can assign the destination Port – Port 164 is the default trap port.

The modem supports the following MIB2 SNMPv1traps / SNMPv2 notifications:

MIB2 SNMPv1 trap: Authentication Failure 5

MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications: Authentication Failure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5



The modem supports the following Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps / SNMPv2 notifications:

Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 Traps

slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV1 6247472

slm5650UnitAlarmV1 6247471

slm5650RedundancyStateV1 6247473

slm5650RedundancyStateV1 6247474

Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 Notification

slm5650UnitAlarmV2 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.1

slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV2 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.2

slm5650RxTrafficAlarmV2 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.3

slm5650RedundancyStateV2 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.4

8.2.4 SNMPv3 (Base Modem)

When the user activates the SNMPv3 option, either by changing the SNMP Mode or selecting the NP’s Security Mode to High, SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c will not function. Instead of using the public and private community strings identified in Section 8.2.2, you must define and use a username and password to authenticate and encrypt SNMP communication to and from the modem.

Four parameters are available to configure SNMPv3 on the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface ‘Admin | SNMP’ page:

• Engine ID – a 5- to 32-character length hex number that is used to encrypt/decrypt the SNMP data. The default Engine ID is 0000000c000000007f000001.

• User Name – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications (the default is comtech).

• Password – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP communications (the default is comtech).

• Security Model – Using the drop-down menu, you may choose between two security models to authenticate communications: md5 and sha (the default is md5).



Notes:

1. Although the customer can choose the security model used, there is no choice on the encryption method – data is always encrypted using the DESC scheme.

2. The User Name and Password defined here are the ones used in an SNMP client, and are separate from the user name/password used to access the SLM-5650A HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet interfaces.

3. It is not necessary to change the Engine ID to have an acceptable level of encryption. However, you should note that changing the Engine ID does affect the generation of authentication keys.



8.3 Telnet Interface

Chapter 10. SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATION

Figure 8-2. Telnet Interface Example – Windows Command-line

The SLM-5650A has a Telnet interface for the purpose of equipment M&C via the Serial Remote Control protocol.

The Telnet interface requires user login at the Administrator and Read/Write user access levels. Once you log in to the Telnet interface as the Administrator, you have access to the standard serial-based Remote Control Interface. Figure 8-2 shows an example of the login process using Windows Command-line.

The Telnet interface is also available for use with the menu-driven CLI that is provided with the optional NP Interface – but only when the security level setting for the NP Interface has been set as “Low”.

8.3.1 Using HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation

There is a disadvantage when using Windows Command line as a Telnet client with the optional Remote Control protocol. For the messages coming from the Telnet Server, Command line cannot translate a carriage return command (\r) to a carriage return + line feed command (\r\n). Therefore, any multi-line Target-to-Controller response (e.g., the response to the RNE? query) shows as one line, with the latter lines overwriting the previous lines.

To see the full response messages, you can use the HyperTerminal terminal emulation program configured as a Telnet client. Figure 8-3 shows an example of the login process and remote control operation when you use HyperTerminal as the interface.



Figure 8-3. Telnet Interface Example – HyperTerminal

8.3.1.1 Configure HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation

Figure 8-4. Configure HyperTerminal



Do these steps:

1. Make sure to define the Connect To Telnet connection properties correctly (File Properties) (Figure 8-4, left):

a. Enter the SLM-5650A’s Traffic/Management IP Address as the “Host address” (e.g., 192.168.1.1).

b. Enter TCP Port 23 as the “Port number”. c. Set “Connect using” to TCP/IP (Winsock) instead of COM1 or COM2. d. Click [OK] to save your settings.

2. For ASCII Setup (File Properties Settings ASCII Setup) (Figure 8-4, right): a. Check the “Send line ends with line feeds” option in the ‘ASCII Sending’ section. b. Check the “Append line feeds to incoming line ends” option in the ‘ASCII

Receiving’ section. c. Click [OK] to save your settings.



8.4 Secure Shell (SSH) Interface

Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE, Sect. E.3 Network Processor (NP) Telnet/CLI Interface Operation

Appendix F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION, Sect. F.3 SSH CLI OPERATION

When the modem is equipped with the optional NP or TRANSEC Module Interfaces, the security and encryption features for either require that administrative maintenance and control operations are accomplished using a SSH CLI.

8.4.1 Configure a SSH CLI Session

For demonstration purposes, this manual uses PuTTY, a free and open source terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly – the chapter assumes users’ familiarity with their preferred SSH interface.

Figure 8-5. Configure PuTTY for CLI Operations



To initiate a SSH CLI session, do these steps:

1. From the SSH terminal emulation program’s folder, double-click the program filename (e.g., putty.exe), shortcut, icon, etc. to open the SSH application and its configuration window.

2. (Using PuTTY as the example program) Type in the IP address of the NP Module or TRANSEC Module interface (in the example to the right, the Host Name (or IP Address) window) and select SSH as the Connection Type.

3. Click Open to open the session. The session login window will appear as per Figure 8-6 (left). The default for both user name and password is comtech.

4. Once the login is accepted, you are granted access to the CLI as per Figure 8-6 (right).

Figure 8-6. CLI Session Examples


Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation 9–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION

9.1 Overview

The operational parameters available from the SLM-5650A Base Modem’s non-secure HTTP (Web Server) Interface complement operation of the SLM-5650A’s front panel menus.

9.1.1 Prerequisites

Before you proceed with non-secure Ethernet remote product management, make sure the following is true:

• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its entirety, and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure applications.

• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files. • The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port. • You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address. • The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the Base Modem

HTTP Interface. • The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the Telnet Remote

Control features.



9.2 Base Modem HTTP Interface

A user-supplied web browser allows the full monitoring and control (M&C) of the SLM-5650A base modem from its HTTP Interface. This non-secure embedded web application is designed for, and works best with, Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 7.0 or higher, Firefox, and Google Chrome.

9.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces

• Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE

MODULE, Sect. E.2 Network Processor (NP) HTTP.HTTPS Interface. • Appendix F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION, Sect. F.2.

TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface.

Only non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP Interface browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modem’s ‘J5 Ethernet’ RJ-45 port.

The Management Security option is not available for the SLM-5650A’s Base Modem operations. For modems with installed upgrades (i.e., the Network Processor (NP) Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module Interface), enhanced Web interface functionality is afforded through the dedicated HTTP/HTTPS interfaces provided with those upgrades. The NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface, specifically, is designed to be used as an enhanced version of the Base Modem HTTP Interface featured in this chapter.

9.2.2 HTTP Interface User Login

Do these steps:

1. From the PC, enter the default Management IP Address for the unit into the Address area of the browser.

The default Base Modem Management IP Address is 192.169.1.1/24.

You may obtain your assigned address from the SLM-5650A front panel menu: SELECT: ConfigureRemoteEthernetConfig IPAddress/Range. See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for further details. You may also need to consult with your network administrator to determine the appropriate IP address assignment for your modem.

2. In the Login window, type the User name and Password. For all interfaces, the default for both is comtech. Click OK.



Once the valid User Name and Password is accepted, the HTTP Interface splash page appears (Figure 9-1). The firmware version as shown here may differ from your setup.

Figure 9-1. HTTP Interface Page Example



9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features

9.2.3.1 Page Navigation

The HTTP Interface has five navigation tabs at the top of each page. Click a navigation tab to see its page hyperlinks. Click a page hyperlink to open a page.

This manual uses a convention for all web pages to show you how to navigate to the featured page: Navigation Tab | Page Hyperlink. For example, “Home | Home” instructs you to click the ‘Home’ navigation tab, and then click the ‘Home’ page hyperlink.

9.2.3.2 Page Sections

This manual explains the purpose and operation for each Web page and its sections. Each page has one or more sections. The title at the upper-left corner of each page or section describes its operational features.

Each section can have editable fields, action buttons and read-only displays for a specific function.



9.2.3.3 Action Buttons

Action buttons are important in the HTTP Interface. Click an action button to do one of these tasks:

• Click [Refresh] to see the latest page data.

• Reset changed parameters to remove unsaved changes.

• Click [Submit] to save changes.

If you change any parameters, make sure to click the related action button before you leave the page. If you go to another page without first clicking the action button, your changes are not saved.

9.2.3.4 Drop-down Lists

A drop-down list lets you choose from a list of selections. Left-click the drop-down button to open the list. Then, left-click on an item to select that choice.

9.2.3.5 Text or Data Entry

Text boxes let you type data into a field. An action button can be associated with a single text box, or a group of text boxes. For any text box, left-click anywhere inside the box and type the desired data into that field. Make sure to press Enter when done typing.

Click the related action button to save the data.

If you edit a field, make sure to click the related action button before you leave the page. If you go to another page without first clicking the action button, your changes are not saved.



9.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree

This menu tree illustrates the options available via the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface:

Home Admin Config Mdm Stats Maint

Home Access Page 1

(Modem Config) Modem Status Unit Info

Contact Remote Page 2

(Modem Utilities) Event Log

Page 3

(Antenna Handover)

Statistics

Page 4

(NON-WORKING) Config Log

CnC Router Stats

Spreading Ether Stats

AUPC

This interface provides access to five navigation tabs (shown in blue). Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford more specific user functionality.

The ‘Page 4’ hyperlink opens a non-functioning web page. Its features are not available to SLM-5650A Base Modem users.

Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.



9.3 HTTP Interface Page Examples

Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed descriptions of the configuration and monitoring features available throughout this interface.

The page figures provided in this section are intended for reference only. Your setup will differ.

9.3.1 Home

Click Home or Contact to continue.

9.3.1.1 Home | Home

Use this page to identify the product in use. Click the Home navigation tab or the nested hyperlink to return to this page from anywhere in the HTTP Interface.

Figure 9-2. Home | Home Page



9.3.1.2 Home | Contact

For all product support, please call:

+1.240.243.1880

+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA)

Figure 9-3. Home | Contact Page



9.3.2 Administration

The ‘Admin’ pages are available only to users who have logged in using the Administrator Name and Password.

Click Access or Remote to continue.

9.3.2.1 Admin | Access

The Administrator must use this page as the means to set up user names, passwords, the E-mail server, and the host IP addresses as needed to facilitate communication with the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface.

Figure 9-4. Admin | Access Page

Click [Submit Admin] to save any changes made on this page.



9.3.2.2 Admin | Remote

Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION, Section 8.2 SNMP Interface.

The Administrator must use this page to manage the SNMP settings.

Figure 9-5. Admin | Remote Page

Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page. Click [Reboot Now!] to ensure any changes associated with SNMP Version 3 take effect.

After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, the HTTP and Telnet access will be blocked. This operational change also forces the Trap mode to be SNMPv3Traps.

The SNMPv3 mode uses the Base Modem’s IP Address via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem HTTPS Interface is accessible by the NP IP Address or the TRANSEC IP Address.

If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or higher, you must make sure to only use SNMP Trap Port values that are not already in use by other services.



9.3.3 Configuration Modem

Use the ‘Config Mdm’ pages to configure the Modulator, Demodulator, and installed interfaces (e.g., EIA-530, HSSI, Balanced and Unbalanced G.703, Gigabit Ethernet, Network Processor, and LVDS). Click Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, CnC, Spreading, or AUPC to continue.

The ‘Page 4’ hyperlink opens a non-functioning web page. Its features are not available to SLM-5650A Base Modem users.

9.3.3.1 Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config)

Use this page to configure modem configuration parameters including Modem Operating Mode; Transmit/Receive; and Tx Power Level.

Figure 9-6. Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config) Page

Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.



9.3.3.2 Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities)

Use this page to configure modem operating parameters, including Date and Time; Test Mode (including BERT); Miscellaneous Tx and Rx Parameters; Circuit ID; and Modem Configuration Store/Load.

Figure 9-7. Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities) Page

Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.



9.3.3.3 Config Mdm | Page 3 (Antenna Handover FAST Option)

When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional Antenna Handover feature.

Figure 9-8. Config Mdm | Page 3 (Modem Config/Antenna Handover) Page

Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.

9.3.3.4 Config Mdm | CnC (FAST Option)

When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) feature.

Figure 9-9. Config Mdm | CnC Page




9.3.3.5 Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Option)

When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) spectrum spreading and anti-jamming applications.

Figure 9-10. Config Mdm | Spreading Page


This page is operational only if the LDPC FEC FAST option is available and configured, and the Spectrum Spreading or DSSS-MA FAST options are available. If you attempt to access and operate this page with a non-LDPC ModCod active, or any non-compatible modem mode active, you will receive an error message in the affected “Modulator configuration” or “Demodulator Configuration” page section: for example, “Error: Invalid FEC” or “Error: Invalid Modem Type”.



9.3.3.6 Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)

Use this page to enable the AUPC feature.

Figure 9-11. Config Mdm | AUPC Page

The AUPC enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain as constant the Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link. This provides protection against rain fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-Band links.

You must use the AUPC mode of operation to accomplish this protective adjustment. With AUPC mode enabled, the distant end modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No, using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem uses Eb/No to adjust its output power, and a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.




9.3.4 Stats (Statistics) Pages

The Stats (Statistics) pages provide read-only status windows: General operating and configuration information about the modem; Installed Options (FAST, assorted Interface modules, etc.); Alarms; Tx and Rx Parameters; and Ethernet information.

Click Modem Status, Event Log, Statistics, Config Log, Router Stats, or Ether Stats to continue.

9.3.4.1 Stats | Modem Status

Figure 9-12. Stats | Modem Status Page

Use this read-only page to view the modem’s current configuration and operation parameters:

• General Information

• Installed Options

• Live Faults. Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes the errors that have been logged.

• Rx Parameters

• Modem Symbol Rates

• Assigned Ethernet MAC and IP Addresses.



9.3.4.2 Stats | Event Log

Use this page to review a scrollable record of the unit’s stored events.

Figure 9-13. Stats | Event Log Page

Modem Event Log

• (Event #) Date | Time: The first three columns display the event by the order in which it is logged (1, 2, 3, etc.) along with the date and time the event is recorded.

• Type: The event is identified by its type in this column. The four event types are Info, Unit, Tx Traffic, and Rx Traffic.

• Code: Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes the events that have been logged.

Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged events. Click [Clear Log] to clear the log of all visible events. Once the log is cleared, the next time [Refresh] is clicked any new events are logged and numbered beginning with ‘1’.

9.3.4.3 Stats | Statistics

Use this page to review a scrollable record of the unit’s stored statistics.

Figure 9-14. Stats | Statistics Page



Modem Statistics Log

• (Statistic #) Date | Time: The first three columns display the statistic by the order in which it is logged (1, 2, 3, etc.) along with the date and time the event is recorded.

• Min Eb/No • Avg Eb/No

Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged statistics. Click [Clear Log] to clear all entries from the active feature’s log. Once the log is cleared, the next time [Refresh] is clicked any new statistics are logged beginning with the number ‘1’.

9.3.4.4 Stats | Config Log

Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of a number of configuration change logs.

Figure 9-15. Stats | Config Log Page

Configuration Change Log

Select a feature to query from the drop-down list. Click [Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature. The available Configuration Change Log feature pages are:

• Logging Off • SNMP

• Front Panel • Telnet

• Serial Remote • NP Mailbox

• Web • TRANSEC Mailbox

The visible display provides Configuration Change Log information as follows:

• Date | Time | Command • Date | Time | Response • Intf

Click [Refresh] to update the attribute statistics for the active feature. Otherwise, click [Clear Log] to clear all entries from the active feature’s log.



9.3.4.5 Stats | Router Stats

Use this read-only page to view statistics for the modem FPGA, and the Ethernet operating statistics for the modem WAN ports, M&C ports and, when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is installed, the NP Interface’s LAN ports 1 through 4.

Figure 9-16. Stats | Router Stats Page

Router Statistics

Use the drop-down list to select a page to query. Click [Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature.

In the example shown in Figure 9-17, the LAN Port 2 (on the optional NP Interface) queries, and then displays, the most recent statistics for NP Interface LAN Port 2.

Click [Clear Stats] to reset the statistics counts for the visible display.

See Table 9-1 to review the seven selectable pages of statistics available via the ‘Stats | Router Stats’ page drop-down list.

Figure 9-17. Router Statistics Drop-down List



Table 9-1. Router Stats Page – Drop-down “Feature Select” Items

Feature Select Item Attribute Description FPGA

FPGA Link Errors The count of received frames that did not match the proprietary HDLC address, bad HDLC CRC, bad alignment, and under run.

FPGA Overrun Errors Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K bytes in length.

FPGA Rx Packet count Total number of received frames.

FPGA Overflow Errors Count of received frames that overflowed the HDLC buffer.

FPGA TX Packet counts Total Number of transmitted frames. (Ethernet features) LAN Port 1 (NP Interface Traffic Port marked as 1) LAN Port 2 (NP Interface Traffic Port marked as 2) LAN Port 3 (NP Interface Traffic Port marked as 3) LAN Port 4 (NP Interface Traffic Port marked as 4) WAN (Traffic port connected to satellite interface) Management (Management port for accessing M&C)

Good Octets (in) Total good Ethernet frames received, that is frames that are not bad frames.

Bad Octets (in) Total bad Ethernet frames received.

Unicast (in) The number of good frames received that have a Unicast destination GMAC address

Broadcast (in) The number of good frames received that have a broadcast destination GMAC address.

Multicast (in)

The number of good frames that have multicast destination GMAC address. Note: this address not included 802.3 Flow Control messages counted in Pause (In) or does it included Broadcast frames counted in Broadcast (in).

Pause (in) The number of good Flow Control frames received.

Undersize (In) Total frames received with length of less than 64 octets but with valid FCS.

Fragments (in) Total frames received with length of less than 64 octets but with invalid FCS.

Oversized (in) Total frames received with length of more than Maxsize (1518 for all modes) but with valid FCS.

Jabber (in) Total frames received with length of more than Maxsize (1518 for all modes) but with invalid FCS.

Rx Err (in) Total frames received with RxErr signal from PHY.

FCS (in) Total Frames received with a CRC error not counted in Fragments (In), Jabber (In) or RxErr (In).

Octets (Out) Total Ethernet frames sent from this GMAC

Unicast (Out) The number of frames sent that have a Unicast destination GMAC address.

Broadcast (out) The number of frames sent that have a Broadcast destination GMAC address.

Multicast (Out) The number of frames sent that have a Multicast destination GMAC address.



9.3.4.6 Stats | Ether Stats

Use this read-only page to view the base modem’s Ethernet statistics. The most commonly used statistics are provided on pages accessed via the drop-down list.

Figure 9-18. Stats | Ether Stats Page

Modem Ethernet Statistics

Use the drop-down list to select a page to query. Click [Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that feature. The available statistics pages are as follows:

• Arp Table • TCP Stats

• IP Stats • IP IF Stats

• ICMP Stats • ARP Stats

• UDP Stats • ENET Stats

For an example as shown in Figure 9-19, if you query the UDP Stats, once you click [Refresh] the page will update to display the resultant statistics:

Figure 9-19. UDP Stats Statistics Example



9.3.5 Maint (Maintenance)| Unit Info Page

Use this page to review a read-only, scrollable status window containing information about the currently loaded Bootrom. You may scroll through the Image 1 and Image 2 content for information about all of the constituent firmware blocks that make up the bulk.

Figure 9-20. Maint | Unit Info Page


Serial Remote Control 10–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Chapter 10. SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL

10.1 Overview

Serial-based remote management of Comtech EF Data’s SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is available using the rear panel 9-pin ‘J10 REMOTE’ port. This chapter summarizes key parameters and procedures and their associated remote commands and queries, and provides detailed instructions for use of the serial remote interface.

Make sure to operate the SLM-5650A with its latest available firmware.

10.2 Remote Control Protocol and Structure

The electrical interface is either an EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device) or an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices). Data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in packets of variable length in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in this chapter.

10.2.1 EIA-232

This is a simple configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the Target via a two-wire-plus-ground connection. Controller-to-Target data is carried, via EIA-232 electrical levels, on one conductor, and Target-to-Controller data is carried in the other direction on the other conductor.



10.2.2 EIA-485

For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or 4-wire) EIA-485 is preferred. Half-duplex (2-wire) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred.

In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a ‘Controller’ device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data in a broadcast mode via one of the pairs. Many ‘Target’ devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the Controller. The Controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair – the Target devices only have line-receivers connected.

In the other direction, on the other pair each Target has a Tri-Stateable line driver connected, and the Controller has a line-receiver connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode until one – and only one – Target transmits back to the Controller.

Each Target has a unique address, and each time the Controller transmits in a framed ‘packet’ of data, the address of the intended recipient Target is included. All of the Targets receive the packet, but only one – the intended – will reply. The Target enables its output line driver and transmits its return data packet back to the Controller in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.

EIA-485 (full duplex) summary:

• Two differential pairs: one pair for Controller-to-Target, one pair for Target -to-Controller. • Controller-to-Target pair has one line driver (Controller), and all Target s have line-receivers. • Target-to-Controller pair has one line receiver (Controller), and all Targets have Tri-State drivers.

10.2.3 Basic Serial Protocol

Serial data can be transmitted and received by a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART). Serial data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters:

• Asynchronous character format is 8-N-1 (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit) • Baud rate can vary from 1200 through 38,400 baud.

Serial data is transmitted in framed packets. All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters less than ASCII code 127 (DELETE). The Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable.

The Controller device manages the monitor and control processes. It is the only device that can start data transmission at will. Messages sent from the Controller to the Target require responses, except in these cases:

• Acknowledging receipt of a “command” – an instruction message issued by the Controller – to change the configuration of the Target.

• Returning data that was requested by the Controller – response to a “query” message – that requests information from the Target.

Target devices can transmit data only when the Controller tells them to.



10.2.4 Packet Structure

Table 10-1. Controller-to-Target Packet Structure

Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter Instruction Code Code Qualifier Optional Arguments End of Packet Character < / = or ? Carriage Return CR

ASCII Code 60 47 61 or 63 13 # Characters 1 4 1 3 1 n 1

Controller-to-Target Examples: (COMMAND) <0135/RSW=32CR

(QUERY) <0135/RSW?CR

Table 10-2. Target-to-Controller Packet Structure

Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter Instruction Code Code Qualifier Optional Arguments End of Packet

Character > / =, ?, !, or * Carriage Return CR, Line Feed LF

ASCII Code 62 47 61, 63, 33 or 42 13, 10 # Characters 1 4 1 3 1 From 0 to n 2

Target-to-Controller EXAMPLE: (QUERY RESPONSE) >0135/RSW=32CRLF

10.2.4.1 Start of Packet

These characters are used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet. They must not appear anywhere else in the body of the message:

• Controller-to-Target: This is the “<” character (ASCII code 60). It is also known as the “less than” character.

• Target-to-Controller: This is the “>” character (ASCII code 62). It is also known as the “greater than” character.



10.2.4.2 Target Address

Up to 9,999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications, this value is set to 0000, In EIA-485 applications, the permissible range of values is 0001 to 9999. Program the address into a Target using the front panel (CONFIG:) Remote SerialConfig Interface submenus .

The Controller Unit sends a packet with the address of a Target – the destination of the packet. When the Target responds, the address used is the same address, to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller does not have its own address.

10.2.4.3 Address Delimiter

This is the forward slash character: / (ASCII code 47)

10.2.4.4 Instruction Code

This three-character alphabetic sequence is intended to be a mnemonic of its operational function. This aids in the readability of the message, should you display it in its raw ASCII form. For example, “UAT” means “Upconverter Attenuation; “IPA” means “IP Address”, etc. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65-90).

10.2.4.5 Instruction Code Qualifier

This single character further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Instruction Code Qualifiers obey specific rules.

10.2.4.5.1 Controller-to-Target Rules

From Controller-to-Target, the permitted qualifiers are “=” or “?” (ASCII codes 61 or 63):

= (ASCII code 61) This qualifier is the Assignment Operator (AO). It means that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the argument(s) that follow it. For example: TFQ=0950.0000 means “set the transmit frequency to 950 MHz.”

? (ASCII code 63) This qualifier is the Query Operator (QO). It means that the Target should return the value of the parameter(s) defined by the preceding byte. For example: TFQ? means “query the current value of the transmit frequency.”



10.2.4.5.2 Target-to-Controller Rules

From Target-to-Controller, the Target transmits the symbol =, ?, !, *, or # (ASCII codes 61, 63, 33, 42, or 35) to the Controller:

= (ASCII code 61) “=” displays in two ways:

1. If the Controller sends a command to set a parameter’s value, and the parameter value is valid, the Target accepts the command by replying with no message arguments. For example: >0001/TFQ=CRLF

2. If the Controller sends a query to a Target, the Target responds with the configured setting. For example, the query TFQ? means “query the current value of the transmit frequency” – the Target responds with >0001/TFQ=xxxx.xxxxCRLF (where ‘xxxx.xxxx’ represents the configured frequency value).

? (ASCII code 63) “?” is used as follows:

If the Controller sends a command to set a parameter to a particular value, and that value is not valid, the Target rejects the command by echoing the instruction code, with no message arguments, followed by this character. For example: >0001/TFQ?CRLF. This indicates that there was an error in the instruction code sent by the Controller.

! (ASCII code 33) “!” displays when the Controller sends a command that the Target does not recognize. The Target rejects the command by echoing the invalid instruction code, followed by this character. For example: >0001/XYZ!CRLF

* (ASCII code 42) “*” is used if the Controller sends a command to set a parameter to a particular valid value, but the modulator will not permit that parameter to be changed at that time. The Target will reject the instruction by responding with this character, with message arguments. For example: >0001/TFQ*CRLF.

# (ASCII code 35) “#” is used if the Controller sends a command to set a parameter that is correctly formatted, but the modulator is not in Remote mode, the modem will not permit that parameter to be changed at that time. The Target will reject the instruction by responding with this character. For example: >0001/TFQ#CRLF.



10.2.4.6 Optional Message Arguments Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments include these ASCII codes:

• Characters “0” through “9” (ASCII codes 48 through 57)

• Period “.” (ASCII code 46)

• Comma “,” (ASCII code 44)

10.2.4.7 End of Packet

• Controller-to-Target: This is the Carriage Return character CR (ASCII code 13).

• Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence of Carriage Return and Line Feed CRLF (ASCII codes 13 and 10). This pairing shows the valid end of a packet.



10.3 Remote Commands and Queries

Typical for all tables, see Section 10.2.4.5 for the use of Instruction Code Qualifiers in Controller-to-Target (“Command” or “Query”) and Target-to-Controller (“Response to Command”) communications.

Shaded, bold entries indicate PRIORITY commands/queries. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters. See the note provided at the beginning of each section for specific details.

10.3.1 Table Indexes

NOTES: 1) Index Columns – Where Column ‘C’=Command, and Column ‘Q’=Query, columns marked ‘X’ designate the instruction code as

Command only, Query only, or Command or Query. Where CODE=XXX, this indicates a priority command.

2) In the tables that follow, the following codes are used in the ‘Response to Command’ column (per Sect. 8.5.5): = Message ok # Message ok, but unit is not in Remote mode.

? Received ok, but invalid arguments were found. ~ Time out of a pass-through message, either to via EDMAC or to a local ODU.

^ Message ok, but unit is in Ethernet mode.

Section 10.3.2 Initial Setup – Priority Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE MOM X X 10–10 ITF X X 10–11 RFB X X 10–10



Section 10.3.3 Modulator (Tx) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE

BEI X - 10–14 TCR X X 10–13 TFM X X 10–12 TRD X X 10–17 TXF - X 10–19 BTX X X 10–14 TCW X X 10–15 TFQ X X 10–16 TRS X X 10–17 TXO X X 10–19 SCT X X 10–14 TDE X X 10–15 TFT X X 10–12 TSC X X 10–18 TBO X X 10–14 TDF X X 10–16 TMD X X 10–13 TSE X X 10–18 TCI X X 10–14 TDI X X 10–16 TPL X X 10–16 TSF X X 10–18 TCK X X 10–15 TDR X X 10–14 TPM X X 10–17 TSI X X 10–18

Section 10.3.4 Demodulator (Rx) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE BBR - X 10–22 RBO X X 10–23 RDD X X 10–25 RFO - X 10–26 RSF X X 10–27 BER - X 10–22 RBS X X 10–24 RDF X X 10–25 RFQ X X 10–26 RSI X X 10–28 BRS - X 10–22 RCB X - 10–24 RDI X X 10–25 RFT X X 10–20 RSL - X 10–28 BRX X X 10–22 RCI X X 10–24 RDR X X 10–22 RMD X X 10–21 RSW X X 10–28 EBN - X 10–23 RCK X X 10–24 RDS X X 10–26 RRD X X 10–27 RXF - X 10–29 ERR - X 10–23 RCR X X 10–21 REA X X 10–26 RRS X X 10–27 RBM X X 10–23 RCW X X 10–25 RFM X X 10–20 RSE X X 10–27

Section 10.3.5 Modem (Unit) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE ABE - X 10–30 CAS X - 10–33 CRA X X 10–36 ISP X - 10–40 PSD - X 10–43 ABR X - 10–30 CCF X X 10–33 CRM - X 10–36 LOP X X 10–40 RNE - X 10–44 AFE - X 10–30 CDM - X 10–33 CSD X X 10–36 LRS X X 10–40 RNS - X 10–45 AFR X - 10–30 CFM - X 10–33 DAY X X 10–36 LUF - X 10–42 SNO - X 10–45 APC X - 10–31 CFO X X 10–34 EBA X X 10–37 MRC X X 10–41 SSI X X 10–45 APL X X 10–31 CID X X 10–35 EID - X 10–37 MSK X X 10–41 SWR - X 10–45 APS - X 10–31 CNM X X 10–35 IEP X - 10–39 NUE - X 10–43 TIM X X 10–46 BFS - X 10–32 COM X X 10–35 IMG X X 10–40 NUS - X 10–43 TMP - X 10–46 CAE X - 10–32 CPR - X 10–35 IPA X X 10–40 PAT X X 10–43



Section 10.3.6 Bulk Configuration Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CLD X - 10–47 CST X - 10–47 MGC X X 10–47

Section 10.3.7 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands and QueriesModem (Unit) Commands and Queries

CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE ACT X X 10–51 ANP X X 10–52 ATF X X 10–54 NUA - X 10–55 RPE - X 10–57 AET X X 10–51 ARB X X 10–52 CAA X - 10–55 RNA - X 10–56 RPL X X 10–57 AMN X X 10–51 ARF X X 10–53 IAP X - 10–55 RCL X X 10–56 AMT X X 10–51 ASI X X 10–53 LCL X X 10–55 RPB X X 10–56 AMX X X 10–52 ATB X X 10–54 LPC X X 10–55 RPC X X 10–57

Section 10.3.8 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE

GIP X - 10–58

Section 10.3.9 G.703 Interface Commands and QueriesModem (Unit) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE E1F X X 10–59 ERF X X 10–59 T1F X X 10–60 TTC X X 10–60 E2F X X 10–59 RTC X X 10–60 T2F X X 10–60

Section 10.3.10 Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands and QueriesModem (Unit) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE BRT X X 10–61 MIP X X 10–61 RIM X X 10–62 GBM X X 10–61 MIS X X 10–62 RIP X X 10–62

Section 10.3.11 TRANSEC Module Interface Commands and QueriesModem (Unit) Commands and Queries CODE C Q PAGE CODE C Q PAGE SMG X X 10–63 SMI X X 10–63



10.3.2 Initial Setup – Priority Commands and Queries

Before executing any Modem, Unit, Bulk/Global, AUPC, or Optional Interface commands/queries, initial setup should be accomplished with these three commands, prioritized as follows: MOM (Highest Priority), RFB, ITF (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading throughout these sections. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters.

Parameter Type

Controller-to-Target Instruction Code and

Qualifier Arguments for Command

or Query

Description of Arguments (Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)

Target-to-Controller

Command Query Response to Command

Response to Query (see Description of

Arguments) Modem Operating Mode

MOM= MOM? 1 hex byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Modem Operating Mode in the form x, where:

0 = OM-73 1 = Mil-165A 2 = IESS-308 3 = IESS-309 4 = IESS-310 5 = TURBO 6 = 16QAM 7 = AUPC 8 = RXBURST 9 = TXBURST A = TURBO-FA B = RXBRSTFA C = LDPC

Example: <0001/MOM=0CR (sets OM-73 operating mode)

MOM=x

Modem RF Band

RFB= RFB? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Modem RF Band in the form x, where:

0 = 70/140 MHz Band 1 = L-Band (950 MHz – 2000 MHz)

Example: <0001/RFB=0CR (sets 70/140 Band)

RFB =x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Interface Type ITF= ITF? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Interface Type in the form x, where: 0 = EIA-530 1 = HSSI 2 = Unbalance G.703 3 = Balanced G.703 4 = GigaBit Ethernet Interface 6 = Network Processor Card 7 = LVDS Interface

Example: <0001/ITF=0CR (sets EIA-530 interface type)

ITF=x



10.3.3 Modulator (Tx) Commands and Queries

Tx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Section Error! Reference source not found.), TFM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Overhead Type

TFM= TFM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Overhead Type in the form x, where:

0 = None (Unframed) 1 = IBS 2 = IDR 4 = AUPC

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TFM=0CR (selects Unframed mode)

TFM= TFM? TFM* TFM#

TFM=x

Tx FEC Type TFT= TFT? 1 byte Command or Query. Set or returns the Tx FEC Coding type in the form x, where:

0 = None (Uncoded) 1 = Viterbi 2 = Turbo 3 = Sequential 4 = LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency) 5 = LDPC LL (Low Latency) 6 = LDPC HP (High Performance)

Example: <0001/TFT=2CR (selects Turbo coding)

TFT= TFT? TFT* TFT#

TFT=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Modulation Type

TMD= TMD? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Modulation Type in the form x, where:

0 = BPSK 1 = QPSK 2 = OQPSK 3 = 8PSK 4 = 16QAM 5 = 8QAM

Note: Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TMD=1CR (selects QPSK)

TMD= TMD? TMD* TMD#

TMD=x

Tx Code Rate TCR= TCR? 1 byte Command or Query Sets or returns the Tx Code Rate in the form x, where:

0 = 1/1 (Uncoded) 1 = 1/2 2 = 3/4 3 = 7/8 4 = 2/3 5 = 5/6 6 = 21/44 7 = 5/16 8 = 17/18 9 = Reserved A = Reserved B = .541 C = .451 D = .378

Note: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TCR=1CR (selects Rate 1/2)

TCR= TCR? TCR* TCR#

TCR=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Data Rate TDR= TDR? 10 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Tx Data Rate in the form xxxxxx.xxx, where: xxxxxx.xxx = rate in kbps, in 1 bps steps.

Example: <0001/TDR=002047.999CR (selects 2047.999 kbps)

TDR= TDR? TDR* TDR#

TDR=xxxxxx.xxx

Insert Tx BERT Error

BEI= N/A None Command only. Inserts a single bit error in Tx BERT. Note: This command takes no arguments.

BEI= BEI? BEI* BEI#

N/A

Tx BERT State BTX= BTX? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx BERT State in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/BTX=1CR (Tx BERT On)

BTX= BTX? BTX* BTX#

BTX=x

Tx SCT Reference

SCT= SCT? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the SCT Clock Reference in the form x, where:

0 = Internal 1 = Data Source Synchronized 2 = Loop Timing (Rx-Satellite Clock)

Example: <0001/SCT=0CR (selects Internal Modem Reference)

SCT = SCT? SCT* SCT#

SCT=x

Tx BPSK Data Ordering

TBO= TBO? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Invert Transmit BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where::

0 = Standard 1 = Non-Standard

Example: <0001/TBO=1CR (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)

TBO = TBO? TBO* TBO#

TBO=x

Tx Clock Invert TCI= TCI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Invert Transmit Clock in the form x, where:

0 = Normal 1 = Inverted

Example: <0001/TCI=1CR (selects Inverted TX Clock)

TCI = TCI? TCI* TCI#

TCI=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Clock Source TCK= TCK? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Tx Clock Source in the form x, where: 0 = SCT 1 = Tx Terrestrial

Example: <0001/TCK=1CR (selects Tx Terrestrial Clock Source)

TCK= TCK? TCK* TCK#

TCK=x

Tx Reed-Solomon Code Word

TCW= TCW? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding in the form x, where:

0 = RS(225,205,10) 1 = RS(219,201,9) 2 = RS(208,192,8) 3 = RS(194,178,8) 4 = RS(126,112,7) 5 = RS(220,200,10)

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TCW=0CR (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)

TCW= TCW? TCW* TCW#

TCW=x

Tx Differential Encoding

TDE= TDE? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Differential Encoding in the form x, where:

x=Tx Differential Encoding: 0=Off 1=On

Note: Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TDE=1CR (selects Tx Differential Encoding On)

TDE= TDE? TDE* TDE#

TDE=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Data Fault TDF= TDF? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Transmit Data Fault in the form x, where: 0=None 1=DATA 2=AIS

Example: <0001/TDF=0CR (selects Data Fault = None)

TDF = TDF? TDF* TDF#

TDF=x

Tx Data Invert TDI= TDI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Invert Transmit Data in the form x, where:

0=Normal 1=Inverted

Example: <0001/TDI=1CR (selects Inverted TX Data)

TDI = TDI? TDI* TDI#

TDI=x

Tx Frequency TFQ= TFQ? 9 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Frequency in the form xxxx.xxxx, where:

xxxx.xxxx = frequency value, in MHz, in 100 Hz steps. Note: Where 70/140 MHz operating range is from 52 to 88 MHz or 104 to 176 MHz, and L-Band operating range is from 950 to 2000 MHz. Example: <0001/TFQ=0140.9872CR

TFQ= TFQ? TFQ* TFQ#

TFQ=xxxx.xxxx

Tx Power Level TPL= TPL? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Output power level, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = Tx Output power level value where the range is from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.

Example: <0001/TPL=–13.4CR

TPL= TPL? TPL* TPL#

TPL=sxx.x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) DSSS-MA Max Power Limit

TPM= TPM? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the DSSS-MA Max Output power limit in the form sxxx.x, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = Tx Output power level value where the range is from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.

Example: <0001/TPM=–30.4CR

TPM= TPM? TPM* TPM#

TPM=sxx.x

Tx Reed-Solomon Interleaver Depth

TRD= TRD? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding, where:

0 = Interleaver Depth 4 1 = Interleaver Depth 8 2 = Interleaver Depth 16

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TRD=0CR (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)

TRD = TRD? TRD * TRD #

TRD =x

Tx Reed-Solomon Encoding

TRS= TRS? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TRS=0CR (sets RS encoding as Off)

TRS= TRS? TRS* TRS#

TRS=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Tx Scrambler TSC= TSC? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Tx Scrambler state, where: 0 = Off 1 = OM-73 Scrambler 2 = V.35 Scrambler 3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network) 4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler 5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler 6 = TURBO Scrambler

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/TSC=1CR (OM-73 Scrambler On)

TSC= TSC? TSC* TSC#

TSC=x

Tx Spreading Equation

TSE= TSE? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Equation in the form abbbb, where:

a = 0 (for Equation 0) or 1 (for Equation 1) bbbb = GSN (Gold Sequence Number) 0000-9999 (for Equation 0) OR GSN 0000-4095 (for Equation 1)

Example 1: <0001/TSE=05000CR (Tx Equation 0, GSN 5000) Example 2: <0001/TSE=14095CR (Tx Equation 1, GSN 4095)

TSE= TSE? TSE* TSE#

TSE=abbbb

Tx Spreading Factor

TSF= TSF? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Factor in the fiorm xxx, where: xxx = value from 1 to 512. NOTE: Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC. Example: <0001/TSF=001CR (Tx Spreading Off)

TSF= TSF? TSF* TSF#

TSF=xxx

Tx Spectrum Invert

TSI= TSI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Spectrum Invert selection in the form x, where: 0 = Normal, 1 = Tx Spectrum Inverted Example: <0001/TSI=0CR (selects normal)

TSI= TSI? TSI* TSI#

TSI=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Live Tx Faults N/A TXF? 8 bytes Query only.

Returns Live Tx Fault as a 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:

80000000 = Modulator Symbol Clock not locked 40000000 = Modulator RF Synthesizer not locked 20000000 = Modulator No IQ Activity 10000000 = Modulator Nyquist Filter Clipping 08000000 = Interface data clock PLLs not locked 04000000 = Interface Terrestrial Clock No Activity 02000000 = Interface SCT PLL not locked 01000000 = Interface No Data Activity 00800000 = APC Home State 00400000 = APC Margin

Example: >0001/TXF=00000000CRLF indicates No Tx Faults

N/A TXF=xxxxxxxx

Tx Carrier State TXO= TXO? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Carrier State in the form x, where:

0 = OFF due to front panel or remote control command 1 = ON 2 = RTS 3 = OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used as a command)

Example: <0001/TXO=1CR (Tx Carrier ON)

TXO= TXO? TXO* TXO#

TXO=x



10.3.4 Demodulator (Rx) Commands and Queries

Rx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1), RFM, RFT, RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority). Priority commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Framing Mode

RFM= RFM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Overhead Type in the form x, where:

0 = None (Unframed) 1 = IBS 2 = IDR 4 = AUPC

Note: Depending on the active Modem Mode, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RFM=0CR (selects Unframed mode)

RFM= RFM? RFM* RFM#

RFM=x

Rx FEC Type RFT= RFT? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx FEC coding type in the form x, where:

0 = None (Uncoded) 1 = Viterbi 2 = Turbo 3 = Sequential 4 = LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency) 5 = LDPC LL (Low Latency) 6 = LDPC HP (High Performance)

Example: <0001/RFT=2CR (selects Turbo coding)

RFT= RFT? RFT* RFT#

RFT=x (same format as command argument)



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Demod Type RMD= RMD? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Rx Modulation type in the form x, where: 0 = BPSK 1 = QPSK 2 = OQPSK 3 = 8PSK 4 = 16QAM 5 = 8QAM

Note: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RMD=1CR (selects QPSK)

RMD= RMD? RMD* RMD#

RMD=x

Rx FEC Code Rate

RCR= RCR? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx FEC Code Rate in the form x, where:

0 = 1/1 (Uncoded) 1 = 1/2 2 = 3/4 3 = 7/8 4 = 2/3 5 = 5/6 6 = 21/44 7 = 5/16 8 = 17/18 9 = Reserved A = Reserved B = .541 C = .451 D = .378

Note: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RCR=1CR (selects Rate 1/2)

RCR= RCR? RCR* RCR#

RCR=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Data Rate RDR= RDR? 10 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Rx Data rate, in the form xxxxxx.xxx where: xxxxxx.xxx = Rx Data rate, in kbps, in 1 bps steps.

Example: <0001/RDR=002047.999CR (selects 2047.999 kbps)

N/A RDR=xxxxxx.xxx

Rx BERT BER N/A BBR? 6 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the Rx BERT BER in the form a.bEcc where:

a.b = BER value Ecc = Exponent

Note: Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern. Example: >0001/BBR=4.9E12CRLF (Reports BER as 4.9 x 10-12)

N/A BBR=a.bEcc

Rx BER N/A BER? 6 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.bEcc where:


Note: Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked. Example: >0001/BER=4.8E03CRLF (reports BER as 4.8 x 10-3)

N/A BER=a.bEcc

Rx BERT Reset BRS= N/A None Command only. Resets the Rx BERT. Note: This command takes no arguments.

BRS= BRS? BRS* BRS#

N/A

Rx BERT State BRX= BRX? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx BERT State in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/BRX=1CR (sets Rx BERT as ON)

BRX= BRX? BRX* BRX#

BRX=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Eb/No N/A EBN? 4 bytes Query only.

Returns the value of Eb/No in the form xxxx, where: xxxx = value from 0 to 20 dB in 0.1 dB steps.

Notes: Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked. For values greater than 20.0 dB, the reply will be EBN=+020

Example: >0001/EBN=12.3CRLF (sets Eb/No to 12.3 dB)

N/A EBN=xxxx

Rx BERT Errors N/A ERR? 7 bytes Query only. Returns the total number of Bit Errors. Example: >0001/ERR=9999999CRLF

N/A ERR=xxxxxxx

Rx Buffer Programming Mode

RBM= RBM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Buffer Programming Mode in the form x, where:

0 = Buffer Size is programmed in Bits. 1 = Buffer Size is programmed in milliseconds.

Note: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/RBM=0CR

RBM= RBM? RBM* RBM#

RBM=x

Rx BPSK Data Ordering

RBO= RBO? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or rewturns the Invert Receive BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where:

0 = Standard 1 = Non-Standard

Example: <0001/RBO=1CR (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)

RBO = RBO? RBO* RBO#

RBO=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Buffer Size RBS= RBS? 8 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or return the Rx Buffer Size in the form xxxxxxxx, where: xxxxxxxx=Rx Buffer Size (in either bits or milliseconds – see RBM command)

Note: This command or query are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module is selected as the current interface type. Example:: <0001/RBS=00000512CR

RBS= RBS? RBS* RBS#

RBS=xxxxxxxx

ReCenter Buffer RCB= N/A None Command only. Forces the firmware to recenter the receive Plesiochronous / Doppler buffer. Notes:

1) This command takes no arguments. 2) This command is not allowed when either the GBEI or NP

Module is selected as the current interface type.

RCB= RCB? RCB* RCB#

N/A

Rx Clock Invert RCI= RCI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Invert Receive Clock in the form x, where:


Example: <0001/RCI=1CR (selects Inverted RX Clock)

RCI = RCI? RCI* RCI#

RCI=x

Rx Clock Source

RCK= RCK? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Clock Source in the form x, where:

0 = Rx Satellite 1 = Internal 2 = Tx-Terrestrial 3 = External Clock (only valid with the G.703 Option Card)

Note: This command or query are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module is selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/RCK=2CR (selects Tx-Terrestrial)

RCK= RCK? RCK* RCK#

RCK=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Reed-Solomon Code Word

RCW= RCW? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:

0 = RS(225,205,10) 1 = RS(219,201,9) 2 = RS(208,192,8) 3 = RS(194,178,8) 4 = RS(126,112,7) 5 = RS(220,200,10)

Note: Depending on Modem Mode, Overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RCW=0CR (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)

RCW = RCW? RCW * RCW #

RCW=x

Rx Differential Decoding

RDD= RDD? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Rx Differential Decoding in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Note: Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RDD=1CR (selects Rx Differential Decoding On)

RDD= RDD? RDD* RDD#

RDD=x

Rx Data Fault RDF= RDF? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Receive Data Fault in the form x, where:

0 = None 1 = DATA 2 = AIS

Example: <0001/RDF=0CR (selects Data Fault as None)

RDF = RDF? RDF* RDF#

RDF=x

Rx Data Invert RDI= RDI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Invert Receive Data in the form x, where:


Example: <0001/RDI=1CR (selects Inverted RX Data)

RDI = RDI? RDI* RDI#

RDI=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Descrambler RDS= RDS? 1 byte Command or Query.

Sets or returns the Rx Scrambler state in the form x, where: 0 = Off 1 = OM-73 Scrambler 2 = IESS-V.35 Scrambler 3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network) 4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler 5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler 6 = TURBO Scrambler

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RDS=1CR (OM-73 Scrambler On)

RDS= RDS? RDS* RDS#

RDS=x

Rx Reacquisition Time

REA= REA? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Re-acquisition time in the form xxx, where:

xxx = time value, in seconds, from 0 to 999. Example: <0001/REA=000CR (selects 0 seconds)

REA= REA? REA* REA#

REA=xxx

Rx Frequency Offset

N/A RFO? 5 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the measured frequency offset of the carrier being demodulated in the form xxxxx, where:

xxxxx = value ranging from ±0 to ±30 kHz, in 100 Hz steps. Note: Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked. Example: >0001/RFO=+02.3CRLF (reports +2.3 kHz)

N/A RFO=xxxxx

Rx Frequency RFQ= RFQ? 9 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Frequency in the form xxxx.xxxx, where:

xxxx.xxxx = frequency value, in MHz, in 100 Hz steps. Note: Where 70/140 MHz operating range is from 52 to 88 MHz or 104 to 176 MHz, and L-Band operating range is from 950 to 2000 MHz. Example: <0001/RFQ=0140.9872CR

RFQ= RFQ? RFQ* RFQ#

RFQ=xxxx.xxxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Reed-Solomon Interleaver Depth

RRD= RRD? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:

0 = Interleaver Depth 4 1 = Interleaver Depth 8 2 = Interleaver Depth 16

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RRD=0CR (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under RRS)

RRD = RRD? RRD * RRD #

RRD =x

Rx Reed-Solomon Decoding

RRS= RRS? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Note: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid. Example: <0001/RRS=0CR (sets RS encoding as Off)

RRS= RRS? RRS* RRS#

RRS=x

Rx Spreading Equation

RSE= RSE? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Equation in the form abbbb, where:

a = 0 (for Equation 0) or 1 (for Equation 1) bbbb = GSN (Gold Sequence Number) 0000-9999 (for Equation 0) OR GSN 0000-4095 (for Equation 1)

Example 1: <0001/RSE=05000CR (Rx Equation 0, GSN 5000) Example 2: <0001/RSE=14095CR (Rx Equation 1, GSN 4095)

RSE= RSE? RSE* RSE#

RSE=0xxxx

Rx Spreading Factor

RSF= RSF? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx Spreading Factor in the form xxx, where:

xxx = value from 001 to 512. Note: Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC. Example: <0001/RSF=001CR (sets Rx Spreading as OFF)

RSF= RSF? RSF* RSF#

RSF=xxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Spectrum Invert

RSI= RSI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Rx Spectrum Invert, where:

0 = Normal 1 = Rx Spectrum Invert

Example: <0001/RSI=0CR (selects Normal)

RSI= RSI? RSI* RSI#

RSI=x

Rx Signal Level N/A RSL? 5 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the Rx signal level in the form sxx.x, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = Rx signal level value, in dBm, from +15.0 to –60.0 dBm

Example 1: >0001/RSL=+15.0CRLF Example 2: >0001/RSL=–60.0CRLF Note: Unit returns ∀99.9 if unit returns value beyond limits. Example 3: >0001/RSL=+99.9CRLF (RSL >+15.0 dBm) Example 4: >0001/RSL=–99.9CRLF (RSL <–60.0 dBm)

N/A RSL=sxx.x

Rx Demod Acquisition Sweep Range

RSW= RSW? 8 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Rx acquisition sweep range of the demodulator in the form xxxx.xxx, where:

xxxx.xxx = value, in kHz, ranging from 0 to 60 kHz. Example: <0001/RSW=0060.000CR (selects 60 kHz)

RSW= RSW? RSW* RSW#

RSW=xxxx.xxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Live Rx Faults N/A RXF? 8 bytes Query only.

Returns Live Rx Fault as 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:

80000000 = Demodulator IF not locked 40000000 = Demodulator Data Decoder not locked 20000000 = Demodulator RF Synthesizer not locked 10000000 = Demodulator No IQ Activity 08000000 = Interface De-Multiplexers not locked 04000000 = Interface Buffer Fault 02000000 = Interface Buffer about to slip 01000000 = Interface Buffer has overflowed 00800000 = Interface Buffer has underflowed 00400000 = Interface Buffer Clock PLL not locked 00200000 = Interface Buffer Clock Reference Activity 00100000 = Interface Data/AIS 00080000 = Eb/No Threshold exceeded 00040000 = Composite Power > 40 dBc 00020000 = Composite Power > 20 dBm 00010000 = BERT Sync Loss 00008000 = APC Band Mismatch

Example: >0001/RXF=00000000CRLF (indicates No Rx Faults)

N/A RXF=xxxxxxxx



10.3.5 Modem (Unit) Commands and Queries

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) CnC-APC Bit Error Rate

N/A ABE? 4 bytes Query only. Returns the value of CnC-APC BER in the form xE-c, where:

x = value E-c = Exponent BER is measured in frame UW

Note: Returns 9999 if modem is not in CnC-APC mode or there is an APC frame sync error. Example: >0001/ABE=8E-5CRLF (indicates CnC-APC BER is 8 x 10-5)

N/A ABE=xE-c

CnC-APC BER Reset

ABR= N/A None Command only. Forces restart of the CnC-APC BER measurement. Note: This command takes no arguments.

ABR= ABR? ABR* ABR#

N/A

CnC-APC Frame Error Rate

N/A AFE? 4 bytes Query only. Returns the value of CnC-APC FER in the form xE-c, where:

x = value E-c = Exponent

Notes: BER is measured in frame UW Returns 9999 if modem is not in CnC-APC mode or there is an APC

frame sync error. Example: >0001/AFE=8E-5CRLF (indicates CnC-APC FER is 8 x 10-5)

N/A AFE=xE-c

CnC-APC FER Reset

AFR= N/A None Command only. Forces restart of the CnC-APC FER measurement. Note: This command takes no arguments..

AFR= AFR? AFR* AFR#

N/A



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) CnC-APC Activate/ Suspend

APC= N/A 1 byte Command only. Used to activate or suspend APC operation in form x, where:

0 = no action 1 = Activate APC 2 = Suspend APC

Example: <0001/APC=2CR (Suspends APC)

APC= APC? APC* APC#

N/A

CnC-APC Max Power Level Increase

APL= APL? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns CnC-APC maximum power level increase in the form x.x, where:

x.x = value in range from 0.0 to 9.9 dB. Note: The value is limited by Tx power. Example: <0001/APL=3.9CR (sets APC max power level increase to 3.9 dB)

APL= APL? APL* APL#

APL=x.x

CnC-APC State N/A APS? 2 bytes Query only. Returns the state of APC operation in the form xx, where:

00 = APC is not active 01 = No Solution 02 = OK – ReBalance Done 03 = OK(Partial) – CnC Ratio approaches limit 04 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches minimum value (IF) 05 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches minimum value (L-Band) 06 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches maximum value 07 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches limit set by max power level increase 08 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches minimum value (IF) 09 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches minimum value (L-Band) 10 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches maximum value

N/A APS=xx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) CnC-APC State (cont)

11 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches limit set by max power level increase 12 = OK(Partial) – Incomplete 13 = No APC Frame Sync 14 = CnC Ratio Problem 15 = Local Eb/No too high 16 = Distant Eb/No too high 17 = Distant End ReBalance failed 18 = Distant End No Response 19 = Fail-Calculate Mismatch 20 = CnC Ratio too high 21 = Please run again 22 = APC is active 23 = Local margin too low 24 = Distant margin too low 25 = Rx Data Rate < 64 kbps 26 = Tx Data Rate < 64 kbps 27 = Local RSL too low 28 = Distant RSL too low 29 = Unrecognized Modem

Example: >0001/APS=00CRLF

Buffer Fill State N/A BFS? 2 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the buffer fill state in the form xx, where:

xx = value from 1 to 99% Note: Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked. Example: >0001/BFS=33CRLF (reports 33%)

N/A BFS=xx

Clear All Stored Events

CAE= N/A None Command only. Forces the firmware to clear the Stored Events log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

CAE= CAE? CAE* CAE#

N/A



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Clear All Stored Statistics

CAS= N/A None Command only. Forces the firmware to clear the Stored Statistics log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

CAS= CAS? CAS* CAS#

N/A

CnC Frequency Offset Range

CCF= CCF? 6 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the CnC Sweep Frequency in the form xx.xxx, where:

xx.xxx = Frequency value in the range from 0 to 60.000 kHz Example: <0001/CCF=60.000CRLF

CCF= CCF? CCF* CCF#

CCF=xx.xxx

CnC Delay Monitor

N/A CDM? 6 bytes Query only. When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the delay of the interferer is readable in microseconds. Example 1: >0001/CDM=229500CRLF (229.5 µs) Example 2: >0001/CDM=999999CRLF (not locked or CnC not enabled)

N/A CDM=xxxxxx

CnC Frequency Offset Monitor

N/A CFM? 6 bytes Query only. When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the estimated frequency offset between the desired signal and the interferer is readable in kHz. Example 1: >0001/CFM=+001.0CRLF (1 kHz) Example 2: >0001/CFM=9999.9CRLF (not locked or CnC not enabled)

N/A CFM=xxxx.x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Configured FAST Options

N/A CFO? 16 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns information concerning the Configured FAST Options and their option fields, in the form abcdefghijxxxxxxxx, where:

a = QOS where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed b = Reserved c = Spectrum Spreading d = Management Security where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed e = Vipersat Compatibility where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed f = Reserved g = TRANSEC Data Rate Option where:

0=Base (5,000 kbps) 1=10,000 kbps 2=20,000 kbps 3=51,840 kbps 4=155,520 kbps 5=2,500 kbps

h = Vipersat Data Rate Option where: 0=Base (5,000 kbps) 1=10,000 kbps 2=20,000 kbps 3 = 51,840 kbps 4=155,520 kbps, 5=2,500 kbps

i = Bridged Point to Multipoint where: 0=Not Installed 1=Installed

j = Customer Defined Options 0-3 x =spare

N/A CFO=abcdefghijxxxxxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Circuit ID String CID= CID? 24 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns the user-defined Circuit ID string, where: x = a fixed length of 24 characters.

Note: Valid characters include Space ( ) * + – , . / 0 9 and A thru Z

CID= CID? CID* CID#

CID=x

CnC Mode CNM= CNM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns CnC Mode of Operation in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/CNM=0CR

CNM= CNM? CNM* CNM#

CNM=x

Carrier Only Test Modes

COM= COM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Test Mode in the form x, where:

0 = Normal Mode (no test) 1 = Tx CW 2 = Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern

Example: <0001/COM=1CR (CW Mode)

COM= COM? COM* COM#

COM=x

CnC Power Ratio Monitor

N/A CPR? 6 bytes Query only. When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the ratio, in 0.1 dB steps, between the interferer and the desired signal power. Reporting format varies as follows: Example 1: >0001/CPR=+02.8CRLF (interferer > desired) (form=sdd.d, where: s = sign (+/–), dd.d = value in 0.1 dB steps) Example 2: >0001/CPR=LT10.0CRLF (less than –10.0 dB) Example 3: >0001/CPR=GT10.0CRLF (greater than +10.0 dB) Example 4: >0001/CPR=9999.9CRLF (not locked or CnC not enabled)

N/A CPR=xxxxxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) CnC Power Ratio Monitor

CRA= CRA? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns CnC Re-acquisition time in the form xxx, where:

xxx = value from 10 to 999. Note: This is the time wherein CnC will start searching for the delay and frequency offset if a long duration of unlock occurs. Example : <0001/CRA=010CR

CRA= CRA? CRA* CRA#

CRA=xxx

CnC Ratio Monitor

N/A CRM? 4 bytes Query only. When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the ratio, in 1 dB steps, between the interferer and the desired signal power. Reporting format varies as follows: Example 1: >0001/CRM=+02CRLF (interferer > desired) (form = sdd, where: s = sign (+/–), dd = value in 1 db steps) Example 2: >0001/CRM=LT10CRLF (less than –10 dB) Example 3: >0001/CRM=GT10CRLF (greater than +10 dB) Example 4: >0001/CRM=99.9CRLF (not locked or CnC not enabled)

N/A CRM=xxxx

CnC Min/Max Search Delay

CSD= CSD? 6 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns CnC min/max delay value in milliseconds, in the form xxxyyy, where:

xxx = min delay value from 0 to 300 ms yyy = max delay value from 0 to 300 ms

Example: <0001/CSD=010300CR

CSD= CSD? CSD* CSD#

CSD=xxxyyy

RTC Date DAY= DAY? 6 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the date in the form ddmmyy, where:

dd = day of the month (01 to 31), mm = month (01 to 12) yy = year (00 to 99)

Example: <0001/DAY=240457CR (April 24, 2057)

DAY= DAY? DAY* DAY#

DAY=ddmmyy



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Eb/No Alarm EBA= EBA? 4 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 20 dB. Resolution = 0.1 dB. Example: <0001/EBA=12.3CR

EBA= EBA? EBA* EBA#

EBA=xx.x

Equipment ID N/A EID? 17 bytes Query only. Returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the option field, in the form aaaabcdefghijklmx where:

aaaa = defines the modem model number (where 565A=SLM-5650A) b = Advanced FEC where:

0=None 1=TPC 2=TPC + LDPC

c = Advanced FEC Data Rate where: 0=Base (5,000 kbps) 1=10,000 kbps 2=20,000 kbps 3=51,840 kbps 4=155,520 kbps 5=2,500 kbps

d = Option Card where: 0=None 1=G.703 2=GigaBit Ethernet 3=Reserved 4=Network Processor 5=LVDS

N/A EID=aaaabcdefghijklmx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Equipment ID (cont)

e = Data Rate (Asymmetric Tx) Option where: 0=Base (5,000 kbps) 1=10,000 kbps 2=20,000 kbps 3=51,840 kbps 4=155,520 kbps 5=2,500 kbps

f = Higher-order modulation where: 0=None 1=8PSK 2=8PSK and 16QAM 3=8PSK+16QAM and 16APSK/32APSK

g = Reed-Solomon Codec Option where: 0=None 1=Installed

h = TRANSEC Module where: 0=None 1=FEC2 Card and TRANSEC Module Installed 2=FEC2 Card Installed (No TRANSEC)

i = AUPC Option where: 0=None 1=Installed

j = ASYNC Engineering Service Channel where: 0=None 1=Installed

k = Demod Only



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Equipment ID (cont)

l = CnC Data Rate, where: 0=None 1=up to 512 kbps 2=up to 1 Mbps 3=up to 2.5 Mbps 4=up to 5 Mbps 5=up to 10 Mbps 6=up to 15 Mbps 7=up to 20 Mbps 8=up to 25 Mbps 9=up to 30 Mbps A=up to 40 Mbps B=up to 51.840 Mbps C=up to 70 Mbps

m = Sequential Encoding/Decoding Option, where: 0=None 1=Installed

x = Asymmetric Rx Data Rate, where: 0=None 1=10,000 kbps 2=20,000 kbps 3=51,840 kbps 4=155,520 kbps 5=2,500 kbps

Example: >0001/EID=565A0000000000000CRLF (reports SLM-5650A with no options installed)

Initialize Events Pointer

IEP= N/A None Command only. Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning of the stored events log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

IEP= IEP#

N/A



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Firmware Image IMG= IMG? 1 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns Next Reboot Image in the form x, where: 1 = Bulk Image #1 2 = Bulk Image #2

Example: <0001/IMG=1CR (Image #1 will be active after next reboot)

IMG= IMG? IMG* IMG#

IMG=x

IP Address IPA= IPA? 18 bytes

Command or Query. Sets or returns the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the ‘J5 Ethernet’ 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where:

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP Address, and yy = Subnet Mask (0-31)

Example: <0001/IPA=010.006.030.001.24CR

IPA= IPA? IPA* IPA#

IPA=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy

Initialize Statistics Pointer

ISP= N/A None Command only. Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

ISP= ISP#

N/A

LoopBack Test Modes

LOP= LOP? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Loopback Test Modes in the form x, where:

0 = Normal Mode (no test) 1 = IF Loopback 2 = I/O Loopback #1

Exampe: <0001/LOP=1CR (IF Loopback)

LOP= LOP? LOP* LOP#

LOP=x

Local/Remote Status

LRS= LRS? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Local/Remote status in the form x, where:

0 = Local 1 = Serial Remote Control 3 = Serial + Ethernet Remote Control

Example: <0001/LRS=1CR (selects Serial Remote)

LRS= LRS? LRS* LRS#

LRS=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Modem Reference Clock

MRC= MRC? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Modem Reference Clock (for Frequency Accuracy) in the form x, where:

0 = Internal 1 = External 1 MHz 2 = External 5 MHz 3 = External 10 MHz

MRC= MRC? MRC* MRC#

MRC=x

Modem Alarm Mask

MSK= MSK? 6 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Alarm mask conditions in the form abcdef, where:

a=spare (must be set to 0) b=spare (must be set to 0) c=spare (must be set to 0) d=spare (must be set to 0) e=Demod Faults

0 = unmasked 1 = masked

f=Eb/No Threshold Alarm 0 = unmasked 1 = masked

Example: <0001/MSK=000001CR

MSK= MSK? MSK* MSK#

MSK=abcdef



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Live Unit Faults N/A LUF? 8 bytes Query only.

Returns Live Unit Fault as a 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:

80000000 = +5.0V Power 40000000 = +3.3V Power 20000000 = +2.5V Power 10000000 = +1.5V Power 08000000 = +12V Power 04000000 = -12V Power 02000000 = +18V Power 01000000 = Cooling Fan 00800000 = Ext Reference Activity 00400000 = 192 MHz Clock not locked 00200000 = 10 MHz Ref Clock not locked 00100000 = M&C FPGA not loaded 00080000 = Mod FPGA not loaded 00040000 = Demod FPGA not loaded 00020000 = Decoder FPGA not loaded 00010000 = Tx Interface FPGA not loaded 00008000 = Rx Interface FPGA not loaded 00004000 = FEC #1 FPGA not loaded 00002000 = FEC #2 FPGA not loaded 00001000 = Option Card FPGA not loaded 00000800 = FPGA DCM not locked 00000400 = NP Module Mailbox Comm Error 00000200 = FIPS Card Mailbox Comm Error

Example: >0001/LUF=00000000CRLF (indicates No Unit Faults)

N/A LUF=xxxxxxxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Number of Unread stored Events

N/A NUE? 3 bytes Query only. Returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the form xxx. Note: This means unread over the remote control. Example: >0001/NUE=126CRLF

N/A NUE=xxx

Number of Unread stored Statistics

N/A NUS? 3 bytes Query only. Returns the Number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the form xxx. Note: This means unread over the remote control. Example: >0001/NUS=135CRLF

N/A NUS=xxx

BERT Pattern PAT= PAT? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the BERT Pattern in the form x, where:

0 = 2047 1 = Mark 2 = Space 3 = 1:1 4 = 1:2 5 = 2^15-1 6 = 2^20-1 7 = 2^23-1 8 = MIL-188

Example: <0001/PAT=0CR (sets 2047 Pattern)

PAT= PAT? PAT* PAT#

PAT=x

CnC PSD Ratio N/A PSD? 5 bytes Query only. When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the PSD ratio, in dB, between the interferer and the desired signal power, in 0.1 dB steps. Reporting format varies as follows: Example 1: >0001/CPR=+02.8CRLF (interferer > desired) (form=sdd.d, where: s = sign (+ / –), dd.d = value in dB) Example 2: >0001/CPR=999.9CRLF (not locked or CnC not enabled)

N/A PSD=xxxxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Retrieve next 5 unread Stored Events

N/A RNE? 110 bytes Query only. Returns the oldest five Stored Events that have not yet been read over the remote interface in the form CRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-body, where:

Sub-body = Axxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmss: A = fault type, where:

1=Unit 2=Rx Traffic 3=Tx Traffic 4=Info

xxxxxxxx = Fault Code number, as in LUF?, TXF?, RXF?, or Info Code. Specifically:

00000000 = Power Off 00000001 = Power On 00000002 = Log Cleared 00000004 = Global Config Change 00000005 = NP Module Watch Dog Timer 00000006 = NP Module Boot Timeout 00000007 = TRANSEC Module Boot Timeout ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format

Note: If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.

N/A RNE=CRAxxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmssCRAxxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmssCRAxxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmssCRAxxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmssCRAxxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmss



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Retrieve next 5 unread Stored Statistics

N/A RNS? 105 bytes Query only. Returns the oldest five Stored Statistics that have not yet been read over the remote interface in the form CRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-body, where:

Sub-body = AA.ABB.Bddmmyyhhmmss: AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the sample period BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the entire sample period

ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format

Note: If there are less than five events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNS*.

N/A RNS=CRAA.ABB.BddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.Bddmmyyhhmmss

Serial Number N/A SNO? 9 bytes Query only. Used to query the unit 9-digit serial number. Returns its S/N in the form xxxxxxxxx. Example: >0001/SNO=176500143CRLF

N/A SNO=xxxxxxxxx

Statistics Sample Interval

SSI= 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function in the form x, where:

x = 0 to 9 in 10-minute steps. Note: Selecting 0 disables the statistics logging function. Example: <0001/SSI=3CR (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)

SSI= SSI? SSI* SSI#

SSI=x

Firmware Revision

N/A SWR? 43 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the internal firmware revision installed in the unit, in the form:

Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz Example: >0001/SWR=Boot:01.01.01 Bulk1:01.01.01 Bulk2:01.01.01CRLF

N/A SWR=Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) RTC Time TIM= 6 bytes Command or Query.

Sets or returns the time in the form hhmmss (24-hour military time format), where:

hh = hours from midnight (00 to 23) mm = minutes (00 to 59) ss = seconds (00 to 59)

Example: >0001/TIM=231259CRLF (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)

TIM= TIM? TIM* TIM#

TIM=hhmmss

Temperature N/A TMP? 3 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the internal temperature in the form of xxx (degrees C). Example: >0001/TMP=+26CRLF

N/A TMP=xxx



10.3.6 Bulk Configuration Commands and Queries

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Configuration Load

CLD= N/A 1 byte Command only. Causes the modem to retrieve a previously stored configuration from Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9). COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CLD=4CR (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)

CLD= CLD? CLD* CLD#

N/A

Configuration Save

CST= N/A 1 byte Command only. Command causes the modem to store the current configuration in Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9). COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CST=4CR (store the current configuration in location 4)

CST= CST? CST* CST#

N/A

Global Configuration

MGC= MGC? Command can be 177 bytes or 217 bytes; Query Response is always 217 bytes

Command or Query. Global Configuration of SLM-5650A, in the form: abcdeeeeeefghijabbbbbbklmnoooooo.ooopppp.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.yzABCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLLL.LLLMMMM.MMMMNgggPQRSTUVWXYZZZZ.ZZZAAABCDDDDDDDDEE.EFGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.OPPP.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWXXYZZhhhijjjkkkkkmmmmmlllllllllllllllllllllll where: a = Modem Operating Mode ....................................... same as MOM b = Modem RF Band .....................................................same as RFB c = Modem Interface Type ............................................ same as ITF d = Modem Reference Clock .......................................same as MRC eeeeee = Modem Alarm Mask ..................................... same as MSK f = Carrier Only Test Modes ....................................... same as COM g = Loopback Test Modes .............................................same as LOP h = Tx BERT State ......................................................... same as BTX i = Rx BERT State ....................................................... same as BRX j = BERT Pattern ........................................................... same as PAT

MGC= MGC? MGC* MGC#

MGC=abcdeeeeeefghijabbbbbbklmnoooooo.ooopppp.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.yzABCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLLL.LLLMMMM.MMMMNgggPQRSTUVWXYZZZZ.ZZZAAABCDDDDDDDDEE.EFGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.OPPP.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWXXYZZhhhijjjkkkkkmmmmmlllllllllllllllllllllll



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Global Configuration (cont.)

a = CnC Mode ..............................................................same as CNM bbbbbb = CnC Mode .................................................... same as CSD k = expansion byte l = Tx FEC Type ............................................................. same as TFT m = Tx Modulation Type ............................................... same as TMD n = Tx Code Rate ......................................................... same as TCR oooooo.ooo = Tx Data Rate ......................................... same as TDR pppp.pppp = Tx Frequency ............................................same as TFQ q = Tx Framing Mode ................................................... same as TFM c = NP Working Mode ...................................................same as GBM r = expansion byte e = NP Secure Mode ..................................................... same as MIS s = Tx Reed-Solomon state ...........................................same as TRS t = Tx Reed-Solomon code word ..................................same as TCW u = Tx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth ....................... same as TRD v = Tx Spectrum Invert ................................................... same as TSI w = Tx Scrambler ...........................................................same as TSC x = Tx Differential Encoder ............................................same as TDE yyy.y = Tx Power Level .................................................. same as TPL z = Tx Clock Source ......................................................same as TCK A = Tx SCT Reference ..................................................same as SCT B = Tx Clock Invert ......................................................... same as TCI C = Tx Data Invert .......................................................... same as TDI D = Tx Data Fault .......................................................... same as TDF E = Tx BPSK Data Ordering ......................................... same as TBO F = Tx Carrier State ...................................................... same as TXO G = Tx Ternary Code ..................................................... same as TTC HH = expansion bytes ff.fff = CnC Freq Offset Range ...................................... same as CCF I = Rx FEC Type ............................................................ same as RFT



Parameter Type



or Query






J = Rx Modulation Type ................................................same as RMD K = Rx Code Rate ......................................................... same as RCR LLLLLL.LLL = Rx Data Rate ......................................... same as RDR MMMM.MMMM = Rx Frequency .................................. same as RFQ N = Rx Framing Mode .................................................. same as RFM ggg = CnC Re-acq Time ............................................... same as CRA P = Rx Reed-Solomon state ......................................... same as RRS Q = Rx Reed-Solomon code word ............................... same as RCW R = Rx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth ...................... same as RRD S = Rx Spectrum Invert .................................................. same as RSI T = Rx Descrambler ...................................................... same as RDS U = Rx Differential Decoder .......................................... same as RDD V = Rx Clock Invert .........................................................same as RCI W = Rx Data Invert .........................................................same as RDI X = Rx Data Fault ......................................................... same as RDF Y = Rx BPSK Data Ordering ......................................... same as RBO ZZZZ.ZZZ = Rx Demod Acq Sweep Range ................ same as RSW AAA = Rx Reacquisition Time ...................................... same as REA B = Rx Clock Source .................................................... same as RCK C = Rx Buffer Programming Mode ............................... same as RBM DDDDDDDD = Rx Buffer Size ...................................... same as RBS EE.E = Eb/No Alarm Point .............................................same as EBA F = Statistics Sample Interval ......................................... same as SSI G = Rx Ternary Code ................................................... same as RTC H = Receive T1 Framing ................................................ same as T1F I = Receive E1 Framing ................................................. same as E1F J = Receive T2 Framing ................................................ same as T2F K = Receive E2 Framing ................................................ same as E2F L = External Buffer Clock Source ..................................same as ERF M = AUPC Local Enable ................................................ same as LPC



Parameter Type



or Query






NNN.N = AUPC Nominal Power Level ......................... same as ANP OOO.O = AUPC Maximum Power Level ...................... same as AMX PPP.P = AUPC Minimum Power Level ......................... same as AMN QQ.Q = AUPC Eb/No Target Level ............................... same as AET R.R = AUPC Max Tracking Rate .................................. same as AMT S = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action ............................. same as LCL T = AUPC Remote Carrier Loss Action .........................same as RCL U = AUPC Log Sample Interval ...................................... same as ASI V = AUPC ESC Type .....................................................same as ACT W = AUPC ESC Tx Baud Rate ...................................... same as ATB XX = AUPC ESC Tx Format .......................................... same as ATF Y = AUPC ESC Rx Baud Rate ..................................... same as ARB ZZ = AUPC ESC Rx Format ..........................................same as ARF hhh = Tx Spread Factor ................................................. same as TSF i = Spare jjj= Rx Spread Factor .....................................................same as RSF kkkkk = Rx Spread Poly/GSN ....................................... same as RSE mmmmm = Tx Spread Poly/GSN .................................. same as TSE lllllllllllllllllllllll = expansion bytes Fill unused expansion bytes with ‘x’



10.3.7 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands and Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Type has been set to AUPC.

Always wait three (3) seconds between consecutive remote modem command/query polls. If Local AUPC is not enabled, queries will return the last known condition. A request for status from the remote modem will then be transmitted, ensuring that the next query will return current status.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) ASYNC ESC Type

ACT= ACT? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns ASYNC ESC Type in the form x, where:

0 = RS-232 1 = RS-485 2-Wire 2 = RS-485 4-Wire

Example: <0001/ACT=0CR (sets the ASYNC ESC to RS-232)

ACT= ACT? ACT* ACT#

ACT=x

AUPC Eb/No Target Set Point

AET= AET? 4 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns AUPC Eb/No Target in the form xx.x, where:

xx.x = value from 3.2 to 16.0 dB. Example: <0001/AET=13.4CR

AET= AET? AET* AET#

AET=xx.x

AUPC Minimum Power Level

AMN= AMN? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Minimum Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = value from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.

Example: <0001/AMN=–13.4CR

AMN= AMN? AMN* AMN#

AMN=sxx.x

AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate

AMT= AMT? 3 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate in the form x.x, where: x.x = Maximum Tracking Rate, 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/minute in increments of .5. Example: <0001/AMT=0.5CR

AMT= AMT? AMT* AMT#

AMT=x.x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) AUPC Maximum Power Level

AMX= AMX? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Maximum Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.

Example: <0001/AMX=–13.4CR

AMX= AMX? AMX* AMX#

AMX=sxx.x

AUPC Nominal Power Level

ANP= ANP? 5 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Nominal Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:

s = sign (+/–) xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.

Example: <0001/ANP=–13.4CR

ANP= ANP? ANP* ANP#

ANP=sxx.x

ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate

ARB= ARB? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Baud Rate in the form x, where:

0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 9 = 38400

Example: <0001/ARB=0CR (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)

ARB= ARB? ARB* ARB#

ARB=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) ASYNC ESC Rx Format

ARF= ARF? 2 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Async Format in the form xx, where:

00 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit 01 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit 02 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit 03 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits 04 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits 05 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits 06 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit 07 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit 08 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit 09 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits 10 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits 11 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits

Example: <0001/ARF=0CR (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Format to 7N1)

ARF= ARF? ARF* ARF#

ARF=xx

AUPC Log Sample Interval

ASI= ASI? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the sample interval for the AUPC Logging Function in the form x, where:

x = 0 to 9 in 10-minute steps. Note: Selecting 0 disables this function. Example: <0001/ASI=3CR (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)

ASI= ASI? ASI* ASI#

ASI=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate

ATB= ATB? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Baud Rate in the form x, where:

0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 9 = 38400

Example: <0001/ATB=0CR (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)

ATB= ATB? ATB* ATB#

ATB=x

ASYNC ESC Tx Format

ATF= ATF? 2 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns Async Format in the form xx, where:

00 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit 01 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit 02 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit 03 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits 04 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits 05 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits 06 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit 07 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit 08 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit 09 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits 10 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits 11 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits

Example: <0001/ATF=00CR (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Format to 7N1)

ATF= ATF? ATF* ATF#

ATF=xx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Clear All AUPC Log Entries

CAA= N/A None Command only. Forces the firmware to clear the firmware AUPC log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

CAA= CAA? CAA* CAA#

N/A

Initialize AUPC Log Pointer

IAP= N/A None Command only. Resets internal pointer to allow RNA? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics log. Note: This command takes no arguments.

IAP= IAP#

N/A

AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action

LCL= LCL? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Tx Output Power level setting when local carrier is lost in the form x, where:

0 = Hold current output power level 1 = Goto Nominal output power level 2 = Goto Maximum output power level

Example: <0001/LCL=0CR

LCL= LCL? LCL* LCL#

LCL=x

AUPC Local Enable

LPC= LPC? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Local AUPC Control in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Note: When Local AUPC Control is enabled, modulator output power is automatically controlled by the modem. Power output commands via TPL are not allowed during this mode; although, queries will function as normal. Example: <0001/LPC=1CR (Turns on Local AUPC Control)

LPC= LPC? LPC* LPC#

LPC=x

Number of Unread AUPC Log Entries

N/A NUA? 3 bytes Query only. Returns the Number of AUPC Log Entries that remain Unread over the serial remote interface, in the form xxx. Example: >0001/NUS=126CRLF

N/A NUA=xxx



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Retrieve next 5 unread AUPC Log Entries

N/A RNA? 155 bytes Query only. Returns the oldest 5 AUPC Log Entries that have not yet been read over the remote interface in the form CRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCRSub-bodyCR Sub-bodyCRSub-body, where:

Sub-body = AA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Eddmmyyhhmmss: AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. CCC.C = Max Output Power during sample period. EEE.E = Average Output Power during sample period. ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format. hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format.

Note: If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNA*.

N/A RNA= CRAA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.EddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.EddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.EddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.EddmmyyhhmmssCRAA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Eddmmyyhhmmss

AUPC Remote Carrier Loss Action

RCL= RCL? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Tx Output Power level setting, when remote carrier is lost, in the form x, where:

0 = Hold current output power level 1 = Goto Nominal output power level 2 = Goto Maximum output power level

COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCL=0CR

RCL= RCL? RCL* RCL#

RCL=x

Remote Modem Pattern Substitution

RPB= RPB? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Remote Modem Tx Pattern Substitution in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Note: For compatibility reasons, only the 2047 Tx pattern can be turned On or Off at the remote modem. Example: <0001/RPB=1CR (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)

RPB= RPB? RPB* RPB#

RPB=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Remote Modem AUPC Enable

RPC= RPC? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Remote Modem AUPC Control in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/RPC=1CR (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)

RPC= RPC? RPC* RPC#

RPC=x

Remote Modem BERT BER

N/A RPE? 6 bytes Query only. Returns the value of the remote modem’s BERT BER in the form a.bEcc where:


Note: Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern. Example: <0001/RPE=4.0E06CR (Reports BER as 4.0 x 10-6)

N/A RPE=a.bEcc

Remote Modem I/O Loopback

RPL= RPL? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Remote Modem I/O Loopback Mode in the form x, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/RPL=1CR (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)

RPL= RPL? RPL* RPL#

RPL=x



10.3.8 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands and Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet Interface (GBEI) Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) GigaBit Ethernet Interface Management IP Address and Subnet Mask

GIP= GIP? 18 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the GBEI Module, in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:

aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address, and ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)

Example: <0001/GIP=010.006.030.001.24CR

N/A GIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee



10.3.9 G.703 Interface Commands and Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional G.703 E1,E2/T1,T2 Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Receive E1 Framing

E1F= E1F? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Receive T1 Framing in the form x, where:

0 = None 1 = G.704

Note: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/E1F=0CR

E1F= E1F? E1F* E1F#

E1F=x

Receive E2 Framing

E2F= E2F? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Receive T2 Framing in the form x, where:

0 = None 1 = G.704 2 = G.742 4 = G.745

Note: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/E2F=0CR

E2F= E2F? E2F* E2F#

E2F=x

External Buffer Clock Reference

ERF= ERF? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns External Buffer Clock Reference in the form x, where:

0 = External Clock equals Rx Data Rate 1 = 5 MHz External Clock 2 = 10 MHz External Clock 3 = 20 MHz External Clock

Example: <0001/ERF=0CR

ERF= ERF? ERF* ERF#

ERF=x



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Rx Ternary Code

RTC= RTC? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Rx Ternary Code in the form x, where:

0 = AMI 1 = B8ZS 2 = B6ZS 3 = HDB3

Example: <0001/RTC=3CR (Sets Rx Ternary Code to HDB3)

RTC= RTC? RTC* RTC#

RTC=x

Receive T1 Framing

T1F= T1F? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Receive T1 Framing in the form x, where:

0 = None 1 = G.704

Note: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/T1F=0CR

T1F= T1F? T1F* T1F#

T1F=x

Receive T2 Framing

T2F= T2F? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Receive T2 Framing in the form x, where:

0 = None 1 = G.704 3 = G.743 5 = G.747

Note: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been selected as the current interface type. Example: <0001/T2F=0CR

T2F= T2F? T2F* T2F#

T2F=x

Tx Ternary Code

TTC= TTC? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns Tx Ternary Code in the form x, where:

0 = AMI 1 = B8ZS 2 = B6ZS 3 = HDB3

Example: <0001/TTC=3 (Sets Tx Ternary Code to HDB3)

TTC= TTC? TTC* TTC#

TTC=x



10.3.10 Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands and Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Router BPM Mode

BRT= BRT? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the NP Module’s BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode in the form a, where:

0 = Off 1 = On

Example: <0001/BRT=0CR NOTE: Changing the Bridge Mode will leave QOS On. QOS should be turned Off prior to setting the Bridge Mode.

BRT= BRT? BRT* BRT#

BRT=a

Router Working Mode

GBM= GBM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the NP Module Router Working Mode in the form a, where:

1 = Vipersat Hub 2 = Vipersat Hub Expansion 3 = Vipersat Remote 4 = Vipersat Remote Expansion 5 = Multipoint Hub 6 = Multipoint Remote 7 = Point to Point 8 = GigaBit Bridge

Example: <0001/GBM=7CR

GBM= GBM? GBM* GBM#

GBM=a

Router Ethernet Interface Management IP Address and Subnet Mask

MIP= MIP? 18 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the NP Module in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:

aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address, and ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)

Example: <0001/MIP=010.006.030.001.24CR

MIP= MIP? MIP* MIP#

MIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee



Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) Modem IP Interface Security Mode

MIS= MIS? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the modem IP Interface security level in the form a, where:

0 = Normal or Low Level Security, and 1 = High Level Security

Example: <0001/MIS=0CR

MIS= MIS? MIS* MIS#

MIS=a

Router IP Address Mode

RIM= RIM? 1 byte Command or Query. Sets or returns the NP Module’s IP Address Mode in the form a, where:

0 = Single IP Address 1 = Dual IP Address

Example: <0001/RIM=0CR

RIM= RIM? RIM* RIM#

RIM=a

Router Ethernet Interface Traffic IP Address and Subnet Mask

RIP= RIP? 18 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the NP Module Traffic port in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:

aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)

Example: <0001/RIP=010.006.030.001.24CR

RIP= RIP? RIP* RIP#

RIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee



10.3.11 TRANSEC Module Interface Commands and Queries

The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional TRANSEC Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.

Parameter Type



or Query





Arguments) TRANSEC Ethernet Interface Gateway IP Address

SMG= SMG? 15 bytes Command or Query. Set or return the Gateway IP Address for the TRANSEC Module in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, where:

aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = Gateway IP Address Example: <0001/SMG=010.006.030.001CR

N/A SMG=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd

TRANSEC Ethernet Interface Management IP Address and Subnet Mask

SMI= SMI? 18 bytes Command or Query. Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the TRANSEC Module in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:

aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = Management IP Address, and ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)

Example: <0001/SMI=010.006.030.001.24CR

N/A SMI=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee



BLANK PAGE


Appendix A A–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix A. TROUBLESHOOTING

A.1 Overview

This appendix provides information pertaining to the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s system checkout and fault isolation and identification.

A.2 System Checkout

This equipment contains parts and assemblies' sensitive to damage by ESD. Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.

System checkout entails following the test instructions provided for the interface Printed Circuit Board (PCB), modem PCB, Turbo PCB, and L-Band IF PCB. The instructions include tables and test points for ensuring that the Eb/N0, typical output spectrums, typical eye patterns, and constellations are correct. If a test failure occurs, refer to the fault isolation checkout procedures provided in this appendix.

This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within the earth station. Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, the checkout procedure should be used only as a basic guideline. More complicated maintenance tests are beyond the scope of this manual.



A.2.1 Interface Checkout

Use the test setup in Figure A-1 and the procedure that follows to verify the data interface.

Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup

Step Task

1 Ensure the correct IF interface is selected and configured for the proper mode of operation.

2 Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as shown in Figure A-1.

3 Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by selecting I/O1 (TEST: Loopback I/O1) from the front panel menu. The modem will run error-free.

VAR ATTEN

NOISEGENERATOR

ATTENVAR

DATACONNECTORS

BERTEST SET

TX IF

RX IF

BERT

MODEM UNDER TEST



A.2.2 Modulator Checkout

Step Task

1 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF interface. See Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS for the modulator specifications.

2 Set up the modem for IF loopback operation by using TEST: Loopback IF from the front panel menu, or use an external IF loop.

3 Clear all TX faults, Stored Faults, and Alarms using MONITOR: Event-Log Clear-All from the front panel menu.

4 Measure the Eb/N0 with a receiver that is known to be properly operating:

a. Refer to Table A-1 and Figure A-2 to check for proper Eb/N0 level. The (S+N)/N is measured by taking the average level of the noise and the average level of the modem spectrum top.

b. Use this measurement for the first column on Table A-1.

c. Read across the page to find the S/N and Eb/N0 for the specific code rate.

Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, using MONITOR: Rx-Params from the front panel menu displays frequency offset, signal level, BERT data (if enabled), buffer status, Eb/N0, and corrected BER.

5 Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure A-1. Ensure the IF output meets the appropriate mask and spurious specifications. Measure the power output at different levels and frequencies.

A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure A-3.

6 Check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy as follows:

a. Set the modem to the continuous wave mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-CW from the front panel menu. This sets the carrier modulation in the OFF condition. A pure carrier should now be present at the IF output. This should only be used for frequency measurements. Spurious and power measurements should be taken with the modulation on.

b. Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using TEST: Carrier Tx-1,0 from the front panel menu. This generates a single upper side band and suppressed carrier signal. Ensure the carrier and side-band suppression are < -30 dBc.

7 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the L-Band IF interface. Repeat steps 2 through 6.



Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0Chart

(dB) (S+N)/N

Code S/N

Rate 1/2 Eb/N0

Code S/N

Rate 3/4 Eb/N0

Code S/N

Rate 7/8 Eb/N0

4.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.0 1.8 -0.6 4.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 0.8 2.6 0.2 5.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.6 3.3 0.9 5.5 4.1 4.1 4.1 2.3 4.1 1.6 6.0 4.7 4.7 4.7 3.0 4.7 2.3 6.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 3.6 5.4 3.0 7.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 4.3 6.0 3.6 7.5 6.6 6.6 6.6 4.9 6.6 4.2 8.0 7.3 7.3 7.3 5.5 7.3 4.8 8.5 7.8 7.8 7.8 6.1 7.8 5.4 9.0 8.4 8.4 8.4 6.7 8.4 6.0 9.5 9.0 9.0 9.0 7.2 9.0 6.6

10.0 9.5 9.5 9.5 7.8 9.5 7.1 10.5 10.1 10.1 10.1 8.3 10.1 7.7 11.0 10.6 10.6 10.6 8.9 10.6 8.2 11.5 11.2 11.2 11.2 9.4 11.2 8.8 12.0 11.7 11.7 11.7 10.0 11.7 9.3 12.5 12.2 12.2 12.2 10.5 12.2 9.8 13.0 12.8 12.8 12.8 11.0 12.8 10.3 13.5 13.3 13.3 13.3 11.5 13.3 10.9 14.0 13.8 13.8 13.8 12.1 13.8 11.4 14.5 14.3 14.3 14.3 12.6 14.3 11.9 15.0 14.9 14.9 14.9 13.1 14.9 12.4 15.5 15.4 15.4 15.4 13.6 15.4 12.9 16.0 15.9 15.9 15.9 14.1 15.9 13.5 16.5 16.4 16.4 16.4 14.6 16.4 14.0 17.0 16.9 16.9 16.9 15.2 16.9 14.5 17.5 17.4 17.4 17.4 15.7 17.4 15.0 18.0 17.9 17.9 17.9 16.2 17.9 15.5 18.5 18.4 18.4 18.4 16.7 18.4 16.0 19.0 18.9 18.9 18.9 17.2 18.9 16.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 17.7 19.5 17.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 18.2 20.0 17.5



Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise

Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise

ATTEN 10 dB2.00 dB/DIV

RES BANDWIDTH10.0 kHz

RL -49.00 dBm

CENTER 70.000 MHz*RB 10.0 kHz *VB 10.0 Hz

SPAN 1.000 MHzST 30.00 sec

Modem Rate = 2144 kbit/s, 3/4 Rate Codingwith 7.7 dB Eb/No (S + N)/N = 10 dB

ATTEN 10 dB5.00 dB/DIV

CENTER FREQUENCY140.000 MHz

RL -20.29 dBm

PASS

CENTER 140.000 MHz*RB 30.0 kHz *VB 3.00 Hz

SPAN 5.000 MHzST 166.7 sec



A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout

Use the following procedure for demodulator checkout:

Step Task

1 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF interface.

2 Set up the modem with an external IF loop and level. Use a properly operating modulator, and ensure that power levels, data rates, code rates, etc. are compatible.

3 Allow the modem to lock up. a. Depending on the data rate and overhead type, lock-up may take several seconds. b. When the GREEN IF and Data Lock LED are ON and any fault has been cleared (where

applicable), the modem will run at the specified error rate. c. Run the Rx power level (input amplitude) over the full range and offset the Tx frequency from

the nominal Rx frequency by up to ±30 kHz. d. Ensure the modem still runs within the specified error rate.

4 Set up the modem to check the constellation by hooking an oscilloscope that is set in the X-Y mode to J9 pins 3 and 8. An alternative method is to use a computer and the IQ Mon program with an Ethernet connection to the modem. Typical constellation patterns are shown with noise (Figure A-4) and without noise (Figure A-5).



PC Version IQ Monitor with Noise

Oscilloscope with Noise

Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – with Noise



PC Version IQ Monitor without Noise

Oscilloscope without Noise

Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – without Noise



A.3 Fault Isolation

The design of the modem allows for removal and replacement of some faulty components in the field. The optional interface PCB’s can be removed from the modem through the rear panel, without requiring special tools. The TURBO PCB and power supply can be replaced if the top cover is removed.

This equipment contains parts and assemblies' sensitive to damage by ESD. Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.

The fault monitoring capability of the modem assists the operator in determining which PCB has failed. If possible, replace the faulty PCB and return the damaged board to Comtech EF Data Product Support for repair. If not, return the complete modem.

The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms:

• Modulator

• Demodulator

• Transmit Interface

• Receive Interface

• Unit (Common Equipment)

Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the appropriate action required to repair the modem.

If any of the troubleshooting procedures mentioned earlier in this appendix do not isolate the problem and Comtech EF Data Product Support assistance is necessary, have the following information available for the representative:

• Modem configuration. Modem configuration includes the modulator, demodulator, interface, or local AUPC sections.

• Faults (active or stored).



A.4 System Faults/Alarms

System faults are reported in MONITOR: Alarms from the front panel menu, and stored faults are reported in the MONITOR: Event-Log menu. To determine the appropriate action for repairing the modem, refer to Table A-2 and the list of possible problems.

Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree

FAULT TYPE TX IF

OUTPUT OFF

TX STATUS

LED TX FAULT RELAY (1)

RX STATUS

LED RX FAULT RELAY (2)

UNIT STATUS

LED

UNIT FAULT

RELAY (3) AUDIBLE ALARM TX AIS RX AIS

MODULATOR FAULTS

None Green

MOD Symbol Clock PLL X Red X X X

MOD RF Synthesizer PLL X Red X X X

MOD I/Q Activity X Red X X X

MOD Filter Clipping X Red X X X

TX Interface Clock PLL Red X X X

TX INTF Clock Activity Amber X X

TX Interface SCT PLL Red X X X

TX Interface Data As Is Amber X

DEMODULATOR FAULTS

None Green

DEMOD Carrier Lock Red X X X

DEMOD Decoder Lock Red X X X

DEMOD Synthesizer PLL Red X X X

DEMOD I/Q Activity Red X X X

DEMUX Lock Red X X X

Buffer Red X X X

Buffer Fill Amber X

Buffer Overflow Amber X

Buffer Underflow Amber X

Buffer PLL Red X X X

Buffer CLK REF Activity Amber X

RX Interface Data As Is Amber X



FAULT TYPE TX IF

OUTPUT OFF

TX STATUS

LED TX FAULT RELAY (1)

RX STATUS

LED RX FAULT RELAY (2)

UNIT STATUS

LED

UNIT FAULT

RELAY (3) AUDIBLE ALARM TX AIS RX AIS

Eb/No Threshold Amber X

BERT SYNC Loss Amber X

UNIT FAULTS None X Green

+5.0V Power X Red X X




+12V Power X Red X X

-12V Power X Red X X

+18V Power X Red X X

Cooling Fan Red X X

External REF Activity Amber X X

192 MHz Clock PLL X Red X X

10 MHz REF PLL X Red X X

M&C FPGA Config X Red X X

MOD FPGA Config X Red X X

DEMOD FPGA Config Red X X

Decoder FPGA Config Red X X

TX INTF FPGA Config X Red X X

RX INTF FPGA Config Red X X

FEC #1 FPGA Config X** Red X X

FEC #2 FPGA Config X** Red X X

Option Card FPGA Config Red X x

FPGA DCM Phase Lock Loop Fault Red X X

NP Mailbox Comm Error Red X X

TRANSEC Mailbox Comm Error Red X X



Fault Tree Legend

Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay Test Points Connector/Pins 1 TX FAULT J8/Pin 2 (N.O.), 1 (COM), 6 (N.C.) **** 2 RX FAULT J8/Pin 5 (N.O.), 4 (COM), 9 (N.C.) **** 3 UNIT FAULT J8/Pin 8 (N.O.), 7 (COM), 3 (N.C.) ****

** The IF output is only affected if that particular FEC card is currently passing traffic.

**** A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.

A.5 LED Indicator Faults


There could be any number of reasons for a front panel LED to indicate a fault or an alarm:

• The modem can store up to a total of 255 occurrences of any fault. Use the front panel MONITOR: Event-log menu to review faults as they occur. See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION, Sect 7.1.2 for the LED Indicator descriptions.

• Alarms are considered minor faults. Alarms are shown on the front panel VFD in the MONITOR: Alarms nested Transmit, Receive, and Unit screens. Alarms are graphically represented by a reverse-contrast (white on black) “+”.


Appendix B B–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES

B.1 Overview

This appendix provides the end user with reference guides for the following operational parameters:

• Section B.2 Modes provides tables showing the various operating modes’ available data rates and ranges.

• Section B.3 Clocking Options provides information about common clocking options and recommended configurations.

• Section B.4 Buffering.



B.2 Modes

The Data Rates and Symbol Rates shown in the following tables all assume that Transmission Security (TRANSEC) is turned off. In order to calculate the max data rate with TRANSEC on, the max data rate shown in the table becomes a max aggregate data rate. The real data rate can be calculated by dividing the TRANSEC overhead rate from the aggregate data rate. The TRANSEC overhead rate can be calculated for any TRANSEC Frame Length (N) as follows:

TRANSEC Overhead Rate = (3 + 16 * N) / (16 * N)

B.2.1 OM-73 Mode

Modulation Type Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps)

Min Max Min Max

BPSK 1/1 64 8472 64 10000

BPSK 1/2 64 15000 128 30000

BPSK 3/4 64 22500 85.333 29999.999

BPSK 7/8 64 26250 73.142 30000

QPSK 1/1 64 20000 32 10000

QPSK 1/2 64 30000 64 30000

QPSK 3/4 64 45000 42.666 30000

QPSK 7/8 64 51840 36.571 29622.857

OQPSK 1/1 64 20000 32 10000

OQPSK 1/2 64 30000 64 30000

OQPSK 3/4 64 45000 42.666 30000

OQPSK 7/8 64 51840 36.571 29622.857

B.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode

Modulation Type R-S Code Word R-S Depth

Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps) Min Max Min Max

BPSK 1/1 Off N/A 64 8472 64 10000 BPSK 1/2 Off N/A 64 15000 128 30000 BPSK 3/4 Off N/A 64 22500 85.333 29999.999 BPSK 7/8 Off N/A 64 26250 73.142 30000 QPSK 1/1 Off N/A 64 20000 32 10000 QPSK 1/2 Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 QPSK 3/4 Off N/A 64 45000 42.666 30000 QPSK 7/8 Off N/A 64 51840 36.571 29622.857





OQPSK 1/1 Off N/A 64 20000 32 10000 OQPSK 1/2 Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 OQPSK 3/4 Off N/A 64 45000 42.666 30000 OQPSK 7/8 Off N/A 64 51840 36.571 29622.857 8-PSK 2/3 Off N/A 256 51840 128 25920 8-PSK 5/6 Off N/A 256 51840 102.4 20736 BPSK 1/2 126,112 4, 8 64 13333.333 144 29999.999 BPSK 1/2 219,201 4, 8 64 13767.123 139.462 29999.999 BPSK 1/2 225,205 4, 8 64 13666.666 140.487 29999.998 BPSK 1/2 220,200 4, 8 64 13636.363 140.8 30000 BPSK 3/4 126,112 4, 8 64 20000 96 29999.999 BPSK 3/4 219,201 4, 8 64 20650.684 92.975 29999.998 BPSK 3/4 225,205 4, 8 64 20500 93.658 29999.999 BPSK 3/4 220,200 4, 8 64 20454.545 93.867 29999.999 BPSK 7/8 126,112 4, 8 64 23333.333 82.826 30000 BPSK 7/8 219,201 4, 8 64 24092.465 79.692 29999.999 BPSK 7/8 225,205 4, 8 64 23916.666 80.278 29999.999 BPSK 7/8 220,200 4, 8 64 23863.636 80.457 30000 QPSK 1/2 126,112 4, 8 64 26666.666 72 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 219,201 4, 8 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 225,205 4, 8 64 27333.333 70.243 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 220,200 4, 8 64 27272.727 70.4 30000 QPSK 3/4 126,112 4, 8 64 40000 48 30000 QPSK 3/4 219,201 4, 8 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 QPSK 3/4 225,205 4, 8 64 41000 46.829 30000 QPSK 3/4 220,200 4, 8 64 40909.090 46.933 30000 QPSK 7/8 126,112 4, 8 64 46666.666 41.143 30000 QPSK 7/8 219,201 4, 8 64 48184.931 39.846 29999.999 QPSK 7/8 225,205 4, 8 64 47833.333 40.139 29999.999 QPSK 7/8 220,200 4, 8 64 47727.272 40.229 30000

OQPSK 1/2 126,112 4, 8 64 26666.666 72 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 219,201 4, 8 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 225,205 4, 8 64 27333.333 70.243 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 220,200 4, 8 64 27272.727 70.4 30000 OQPSK 3/4 126,112 4, 8 64 40000 48 30000 OQPSK 3/4 219,201 4, 8 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 OQPSK 3/4 225,205 4, 8 64 41000 46.829 30000





OQPSK 3/4 220,200 4, 8 64 40909.090 46.933 30000 OQPSK 7/8 126,112 4, 8 64 46666.666 41.143 30000 OQPSK 7/8 219,201 4, 8 64 48184.931 39.846 29999.999 OQPSK 7/8 225,205 4, 8 64 47833.333 40.139 29999.999 OQPSK 7/8 220,200 4, 8 64 47727.272 40.229 30000 8-PSK 2/3 126,112 4, 8 256 51840 144 29160 8-PSK 2/3 219,201 4, 8 256 51840 139.462 28241.194 8-PSK 2/3 225,205 4, 8 256 51840 140.487 28448.78 8-PSK 2/3 220,200 4, 8 256 51840 140.8 28512 8-PSK 5/6 126,112 4, 8 256 51840 115.2 23328 8-PSK 5/6 219,201 4, 8 256 51840 111.57 22592.955 8-PSK 5/6 225,205 4, 8 256 51840 112.39 22759.024 8-PSK 5/6 220,200 4, 8 256 51840 112.64 22809.6

B.2.3 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential

Modulation Type R-S Code Word R-S Depth Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps)

Min Max Min Max BPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 1067 128 2134 BPSK 1/2 126/112 4/8 64 1171 144 2634.750 BPSK 1/2 219,201 4/8 64 1171 139.463 2551.731 BPSK 1/2 225,205 4/8 64 1171 140.488 2570.488 BPSK 1/2 220,200 4/8 64 1171 140.800 2576.200 QPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 2500 64 2500 QPSK 1/2 126/112 4/8 64 2222.222 72 2500 QPSK 1/2 219,201 4/8 64 2294.520 69.731 2500 QPSK 1/2 225,205 4/8 64 2277.777 70.243 2500 QPSK 1/2 220,200 4/8 64 2272.727 70.400 2500 QPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 3750 42.667 2500 QPSK 3/4 126/112 4/8 64 3333.333 48 2500 QPSK 3/4 219,201 4/8 64 3441.780 46.487 2500 QPSK 3/4 225,205 4/8 64 3416.666 46.829 2500 QPSK 3/4 220,200 4/8 64 3409.090 46.933 2500 QPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 4375 36.571 2500 QPSK 7/8 126/112 4/8 64 3888.888 41.142 2500 QPSK 7/8 219,201 4/8 64 4015.410 39.846 2500 QPSK 7/8 225,205 4/8 64 3986.111 40.139 2500 QPSK 7/8 220,200 4/8 64 3977.272 40.228 2500




Min Max Min Max OQPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 2500 64 2500 OQPSK 1/2 126/112 4/8 64 2222.222 72 2500 OQPSK 1/2 219,201 4/8 64 2294.520 69.731 2500 OQPSK 1/2 225,205 4/8 64 2277.777 70.243 2500 OQPSK 1/2 220,200 4/8 64 2272.727 70.400 2500 OQPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 3750 42.667 2500 OQPSK 3/4 126/112 4/8 64 3333.333 48 2500 OQPSK 3/4 219,201 4/8 64 3441.780 46.487 2500 OQPSK 3/4 225,205 4/8 64 3416.666 46.829 2500 OQPSK 3/4 220,200 4/8 64 3409.090 46.933 2500 OQPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 4375 36.571 2500 OQPSK 7/8 126/112 4/8 64 3888.888 41.142 2500 OQPSK 7/8 219,201 4/8 64 4015.410 39.846 2500 OQPSK 7/8 225,205 4/8 64 3986.111 40.139 2500 OQPSK 7/8 220,200 4/8 64 3977.272 40.228 2500

B.2.4 IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates

Modulation Type Overhead R-S Code Word R-S Depth Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps)

QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 Off N/A 1544 1640 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 Off N/A 2048 2144 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 Off N/A 6312 6408 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 Off N/A 8448 8544 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 1544 1778.787 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 2048 2328.09 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 6312 6975.371 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 8448 9303.371 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 1544 1778.269 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 2048 2327.403 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 6312 6973.254 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 8448 9300.537 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 1544 1790.634 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 2048 2343.805 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 6312 7023.805 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 8448 9368.195 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 1544 1833 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 2048 2400




QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 6312 7197 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 8448 9600 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 1544 1776.708 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 2048 2325.333 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 6312 6966.875 QPSK 1/2 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 8448 9292 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 1544 1029.333 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 2048 1365.333 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 6312 4208 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 8448 5632 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 32064 21376 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 34368 22912 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 Off N/A 44736 29824 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 1544 1217.858 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 2048 1584.06 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 6312 4682.247 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 8448 6324.247 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 32064 23393.438 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 34368 25067.506 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 1544 1217.512 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 2048 1583.602 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 6312 4680.836 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 8448 6232.358 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 32064 23386.269 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 34368 25059.821 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 1544 1225.756 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 2048 1594.537 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 6312 4714.537 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 8448 6277.463 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 32064 23557.463 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 34368 25243.317 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 1544 1254 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 2048 1632 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 6312 4830 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 8448 6432 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 32064 24144 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 1 34368 25872




QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 1544 1216.472 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 2048 1582.222 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 6312 4676.583 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 8448 626.667 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 32064 23364.667 QPSK 3/4 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 34368 25036.667 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 1544 882.286 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 2048 1170.286 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 6312 3606.857 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 8448 4827.428 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 32064 20040.571 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 34368 21473.714 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 Off N/A 44736 27922.857 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 1544 1057.592 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 2048 1371.48 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 6312 4027.069 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 8448 5357.355 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 32064 20065.233 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 34368 21500.148 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 194,178 4, 8, 16 44736 27957.265 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 1544 1057.296 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 2048 1371.087 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 6312 4025.859 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 8448 5355.736 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 32064 20059.087 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 34368 21493.561 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 219,201 4, 8, 16 44736 27948.691 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 1544 1064.362 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 2048 1380.46 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 6312 4054.743 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 8448 5394.397 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 32064 20205.826 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 34368 26150.843 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 225,205 4, 8, 16 44736 28153.422 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 1544 1088.571 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 2048 1412.571 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 6312 4153.714




QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 8448 5526.857 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 32064 20708.571 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 34368 22189.714 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 126,112 4, 8, 16 44736 28854.857 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 1544 1056.405 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 2048 1369.905 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 6312 4022.214 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 8448 5350.857 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 32064 20040.571 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 34368 21473.714 QPSK 7/8 IESS-308 208,192 4, 8, 16 44736 27922.857

B.2.5 IESS-308 Mode – Extended

Modulation Type Overhead R-S Code

Word R-S Depth Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps) Min Max Min Max

QPSK 1/2 None Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 QPSK 1/2 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 26666.666 72 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 27525.773 69.573 30000 QPSK 1/2 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 27333.333 70.243 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 27559.809 69.667 30000 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 68.267 9011.2 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 76.8 10137.6 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.403 9821.196 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.927 9890.341 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.311 9809.067 QPSK 3/4 None Off N/A 64 45000 42.666 30000 QPSK 3/4 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 40000 48 30000 QPSK 3/4 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 QPSK 3/4 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 41288.65 46.502 30000 QPSK 3/4 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 41000 46.829 30000 QPSK 3/4 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 41339.713 46.444 30000 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 45.511 6007.467 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 51.2 6758.4 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.587 6545.449 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.602 6547.464





QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.951 6593.561 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.541 6539.378 QPSK 7/8 None Off N/A 64 51840 36.571 29622.857 QPSK 7/8 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 46666.666 41.143 30000 QPSK 7/8 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 48184.931 39.846 29999.999 QPSK 7/8 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 48170.103 38.859 30000 QPSK 7/8 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 47833.333 40.139 29999.999 QPSK 7/8 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 48229.665 39.81 29999.999 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 39.01 4827.428 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 43.886 5792.914 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.503 5610.385 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.516 5612.112 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.818 5561.624 QPSK 7/8 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.463 5604.181

OQPSK 1/2 None Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 OQPSK 1/2 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 26666.666 72 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 27525.773 69.573 30000 OQPSK 1/2 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 27333.333 70.243 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 27559.809 69.667 30000 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 68.267 901.2 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 76.8 10137.6 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.38 9818.173 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.403 9821.196 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.927 9890.341 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.311 9809.067 OQPSK 3/4 None Off N/A 64 20000 42.666 30000 OQPSK 3/4 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 40000 48 30000 OQPSK 3/4 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 OQPSK 3/4 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 41288.65 46.502 30000 OQPSK 3/4 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 41000 46.829 30000 OQPSK 3/4 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 41339.713 46.444 30000 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 45.511 6007.467 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 51.2 6758.4 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.587 6545.449 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.602 6547.464 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.951 6593.561





OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.541 6539.378 OQPSK 7/8 None Off N/A 64 20000 36.571 29622.857 OQPSK 7/8 None 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 46666.666 41.143 30000 OQPSK 7/8 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 48184.931 39.846 29999.999 OQPSK 7/8 None 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 48170.103 38.859 30000 OQPSK 7/8 None 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 47833.333 40.139 29999.999 OQPSK 7/8 None 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 48229.665 39.81 29999.999 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 39.01 4827.428 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 126,112 4, 8, 16 64 8448 43.886 5792.914 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.503 5610.385 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 194,178 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.516 5612.112 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 225,205 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.818 5561.624 OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 208,192 4, 8, 16 64 8448 42.463 5604.181

B.2.6 IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network)


Word R-S Depth Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps)

Min Max Min Max BPSK 1/2 None Off N/A 64 15000 128 30000 BPSK 1/2 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 13767.123 139.462 29999.999 BPSK 1/2 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 136.533 18022.4 BPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 148.76 19636.346 BPSK 3/4 None Off N/A 64 22500 85.333 29999.999 BPSK 3/4 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 20650.684 92.975 29999.999 BPSK 3/4 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 91.022 12014.933 BPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 99.173 13090.898 QPSK 1/2 None Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 QPSK 1/2 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 68.267 9011.2 QPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.38 9818.173 QPSK 3/4 None Off N/A 64 20000 42.666 30000 QPSK 3/4 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 45.511 6007.467 QPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201 4,8, 16 64 8448 49.587 6545.449

OQPSK 1/2 None Off N/A 64 30000 64 30000 OQPSK 1/2 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 27534.246 69.371 29999.999 OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 68.267 9011.2





Min Max Min Max OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 74.38 9818.173 OQPSK 3/4 None Off N/A 64 20000 42.666 30000 OQPSK 3/4 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 41301.369 46.487 29999.999 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 Off N/A 64 8448 45.511 6007.467 OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 64 8448 49.587 6545.449

B.2.7 IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates



8-PSK 2/3 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 256 139.463 8-PSK 2/3 None 219,201 4, 8, 16 51840 28241.194 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 256 148.76 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 8448 4909.087 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 1544 937.134 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 2048 1211.701 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 6312 3534.627 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 8448 4698.269 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 32064 17563.701 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 34368 18818.866 8-PSK 2/3 IESS-309 219,201 4, 8, 16 44736 24467.104

B.2.8 Turbo Code Mode


Min Max Min Max BPSK 21/44 64 30545.454 134.095 63999.999 BPSK 5/16 64 20000 204.8 64000

QPSK 17/18 64 120888.888 33.882 63999.999 QPSK 21/44 64 61090.909 67.047 63999.999

QPSK 3/4 64 96000 42.666 64000 QPSK 7/8 64 112000 36.571 64000

OQPSK 17/18 64 120888.888 33.882 63999.999 OQPSK 21/44 64 61090.909 67.047 63999.999

OQPSK 3/4 64 96000 42.666 64000 OQPSK 7/8 64 112000 36.571 64000 8-PSK 17/18 256 155520 90.352 54889.411

8-PSK 3/4 256 144000 113.777 64000




Min Max Min Max 8-PSK 7/8 256 155520 97.523 59245.714

16-QAM 3/4 256 155520 85.333 51840 16-QAM 7/8 256 155520 73.143 44434.285

B.2.9 16-QAM Mode


Min Max Min Max 16-QAM 3/4 None None 256 51840 85.333 17280 16-QAM 3/4 219,201 4, 8, 16 256 51840 92.975 18827.462 16-QAM 3/4 208,192 4, 8, 16 256 51840 92.889 18810 16-QAM 7/8 None None 256 51840 73.143 14811.428 16-QAM 7/8 219,201 4, 8, 16 256 51840 79.692 16137.825 16-QAM 7/8 208,192 4, 8, 16 256 51840 79.619 16122.857

16-QAM 3/4 requires Reed-Solomon to be ON in order to automatically resolve data ambiguities.

B.2.10 AUPC Mode


Min Max Min Max BPSK 1/1 OFF N/A 64 7942.500 68.266 8472 BPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 14062.500 136.533 30000 BPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 21093.750 91.022 30000 BPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 24609.375 78.019 30000 QPSK 1/1 OFF N/A 64 18750 34.133 10000 QPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 28125 68.266 30000 QPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 42187.500 45.511 30000 QPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 49218.750 39.009 30000

OQPSK 1/1 OFF N/A 64 18750 34.133 10000 OQPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 28125 68.266 30000 OQPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 42187.500 45.511 30000 OQPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 49218.750 39.009 30000 8PSK 2/3 OFF N/A 64 51840 136.533 27648 8PSK 5/6 OFF N/A 64 51840 109.226 22118.400

16QAM 3/4 OFF N/A 64 51840 91.022 18432 16QAM 7/8 OFF N/A 64 51840 78.019 15798.857




Min Max Min Max BPSK 1/2 225,205 8 256 12812.500 149.853 30000 BPSK 3/4 225,205 8 256 19218.750 99.902 30000 BPSK 7/8 225,205 8 256 22421.875 85.630 30000 QPSK 1/2 225,205 8 256 25625 74.926 30000 QPSK 3/4 225,205 8 256 38437.500 49.951 30000 QPSK 7/8 225,205 8 256 44843.750 42.815 30000

OQPSK 1/2 225,205 8 256 25625 74.926 30000 OQPSK 3/4 225,205 8 256 38437.500 49.951 30000 OQPSK 7/8 225,205 8 256 44843.750 42.815 30000 8PSK 2/3 225,205 8 256 51250 149.853 30000 8PSK 5/6 225,205 8 256 51840 119.882 24276.292

16QAM 3/4 225,205 8 256 51840 99.902 20230.243 16QAM 7/8 225,205 8 256 51840 85.630 17340.209

B.2.11 AUPC Mode – Sequential

Modulation Type R-S Code Word R-S Depth Data Rate ( kbps) Symbol Rate ( ksps)

Min Max Min Max

BPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 1171 136.533 2498.133

QPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 2048 68.266 2184.533

QPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 2048 45.511 1456.355

QPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 2048 39.009 1248.304

OQPSK 1/2 OFF N/A 64 2048 68.266 2184.533

OQPSK 3/4 OFF N/A 64 2048 45.511 1456.355

OQPSK 7/8 OFF N/A 64 2048 39.009 1248.304

BPSK 1/2 225,205 8 64 1067 149.853 2498.341

QPSK 1/2 225,205 8 64 2048 74.926 2397.658

QPSK 3/4 225,205 8 64 2048 49.951 1598.439

QPSK 7/8 225,205 8 64 2048 42.815 1370.09

OQPSK 1/2 225,205 8 64 2048 74.926 2397.658

OQPSK 3/4 225,205 8 64 2048 49.951 1598.439

OQPSK 7/8 225,205 8 64 2048 42.815 1370.09



B.2.12 AUPC Mode – Turbo


Min Max Min Max

BPSK 21/44 64 13423.295 143.034 29999.998

BPSK 5/16 64 8789.062 218.453 29999.998

QPSK 17/18 64 51840 36.141 29274.352

QPSK 21/44 64 26846.590 71.517 29999.998

QPSK 3/4 64 42187.500 45.511 30000

QPSK 7/8 64 49218.750 39.009 30000

OQPSK 17/18 64 51840 36.141 29274.352

OQPSK 21/44 64 26846.590 71.517 29999.998

OQPSK 3/4 64 42187.500 45.511 30000

OQPSK 7/8 64 49218.750 39.009 30000

8PSK 17/18 256 51840 96.376 19516.235

8PSK 3/4 256 51840 121.362 24576

8PSK 7/8 256 51840 104.025 21065.142

16QAM 3/4 256 51840 91.022 18432

16QAM 7/8 256 51840 78.019 15798.857

B.2.13 LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL)

Modulation Type Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps) DR to SR Multiplier Min Max Min Max

BPSK 1/2 32* 2000 64.868 4054.263 2092/1032

QPSK 1/2 32 2000 32.434 2027.131 2092/2064

QPSK 2/3 41.851 2000 32 1529.239 2092/5448

QPSK 3/4 46.991 2000 32 1361.979 2092/3072

*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled



B.2.14 LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL)

Modulation Type Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps) DR to SR

Multiplier Min Max Min Max

BPSK .382 32* 5000 84.676 13230.769 4128/1560

BPSK .456 32* 5000 71.019 11096.774 4128/1860

BPSK .547 32* 5000 59.182 9247.311 4128/2232

QPSK 1/2 32 5000 32.188 5029.411 4104/4080

QPSK 2/3 42.480 5000 32 3766.519 4104/5448

QPSK 3/4 47.720 5000 32 3352.941 4104/6120

QPSK 7/8 55.767 5000 32 2869.127 4104/7152

8QAM 2/3 256 5000 128.313 2506.118 4096/8172

8QAM 3/4 256 5000 114.223 2230.936 4096/9180

8QAM 7/8 256 5000 97.741 1909.023 4096/10728

16QAM 2/3 256 5000 96.140 1877.753 4092/10944

16QAM 3/4 256 5000 85.584 1671.568 4092/12240

16QAM 7/8 256 5000 73.234 1430.369 4092/14304


B.2.15 LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP)

Modulation Type Data Rate (kbps) Symbol Rate (ksps) DR to SR

Multiplier Min Max Min Max BPSK 1/2 32* 15000 64 30000 16416/8208 QPSK 1/2 32 30000 32 30000 8208/8208 QPSK 2/3 42.667 40000 32 30000 8208/10944 QPSK 3/4 48 45000 32 30000 8208/12384

OQPSK 1/2 32 30000 32 30000 8208/8208 OQPSK 2/3 42.667 40000 32 30000 8208/10944 OQPSK 3/4 48 45000 32 30000 8208/12384 8QAM 2/3 256 41000 128 20500 5472/10944 8QAM 3/4 256 46000 113.777 20444.444 5504/12384

16QAM 3/4 256 46000 85.333 15333.333 4128/12384




B.3 Clocking Options

Clocking of the data from the terrestrial equipment to the satellite (and vice versa) will depend on the application. This section describes the most common options and recommended configurations.

SCT (INTERNAL) clock no longer applies when the modem has loop timing on. The TX clock source is now recovered from the RX satellite data. This recovered clock is put out on the ST line and is used to clock the terrestrial equipment. The TX terrestrial clock is now essentially the same as the RX satellite clock, except that it has been buffered by the terrestrial equipment.

Select TX TERRESTRIAL for the TX clock source when in loop timing, if your equipment is being slaved off the modem.

B.3.1 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master

Use this application when both earth stations have high stability clocks and the received data is to be clocked to the local network. Refer to Figure B-1 for:

• Clocking block diagram

• TX clock options

• Buffer clock options

The disadvantage of the master/master application is that the RX data will slip, as the clocks will not be synchronized. If the buffer is properly set up, the slips will be an exact frame length, causing minimum loss of data. By using very high stability clocks, the expected time between slips can be several days.

Loss of the buffer clock will mean the buffer will not be emptied and data will not be available. The buffer clock will normally revert to the low stability internal reference automatically.



Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram



B.3.2 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave

Use this application when the far end earth station does not have local access to a high stability reference clock, or when it is not required to synchronize with a local clock. Refer to Figure B-2 for:

• Clocking block diagram

• TX clock options

• Buffer clock options for using external loop timing

Modem loop timing does not apply for G.703 operation. The terrestrial equipment must select loop timing to recover the clock off the RX data and use that recovered clock for the TX data.

The disadvantage of the master/slave application is that the signal received at the slave station is subject to Doppler shift. The length of the buffer at the master end will need to be twice the length that is normally required, compensating for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths



Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram



B.4 Buffering

There are two reasons for a receive buffer:

1. Plesiochronous buffering of two dissimilar clock frequencies (normally the far end TX clock verses the local network clock). The clocks may be very close in frequency to each other and will normally slip at a constant rate. Figure B-3 shows plesiochronous operation for dissimilar clocks. If incoming traffic is too fast, an occasional bit will be lost. If incoming traffic is too slow, an occasional bit will be repeated.

2. Doppler buffer of the signal of the satellite. The Doppler shift results from the “Figure 8” station-keeping movement performed by the satellite in space over a period of one day (Figure B-4). Doppler shift should not result in a clock slip, as the buffer will constantly fill and empty.

Figure B-3. Clock Slip



Figure B-4. Doppler Shift

If the two earth stations are configured as master/slave, then the buffer need only be configured for Doppler operation. The buffer will then have sufficient capacity for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths.

A buffer set up for Doppler operation only will typically require less depth than one intended for both Doppler and plesiochronous operation.



B.4.1 Buffer Size

The depth of the receive buffer will depend on four parameters:

1. Doppler shift caused by satellite.

2. Stability of each clock (plesiochronous/Doppler operation).

3. Frame/Multiframe length of multiplexed data format.

4. Allowable time between clock slips.

B.4.1.1 Doppler

A geostationary satellite should be positioned directly over the equator and orbit with duration of 24 hours. In practice, the exact inclination of the satellite (relative to the equator) is influenced by the earth, moon, and sun’s gravity, as well as solar wind. Station-keeping motors are required to maintain the orbital position.

When viewed from the earth, the satellite appears to prescribe an ellipse in space, degrading to a “Figure 8” as the angle of inclination increases. The orbit of the satellite can result in a peak-to-peak altitude variation of ± 2% (85 km), while the station keeping of a newly launched satellite will typically be ± 0.1° (150 km). The total effect will be 172 km relative to the nominal 42,164 km radius.

Depending upon the location of the earth station relative to the satellite, the variation in propagation delay will typically be 1.15 ms (up to satellite and back down); therefore, a buffer depth of 2 ms is sufficient to cope with most commercial satellites.

Since station-keeping involves using fuel in the motors, the “lifetime” of the satellite can be extended by allowing the satellite to drift into a wider “Figure 8” and using the motor less often.

The older satellites will be found in a more inclined orbit with the station keeping varying in latitude by as much as ± 4°. The total effect of the inclined orbit may result in a typical variation in path delay of 35 ms.



B.4.1.2 Plesiochronous

The stability of station reference clocks is normally 1 x 10-12 (derived from a cesium standard). While the stability is exceptionally high, the two clocks are not in synchronization with each other and will eventually pass by each other.

The clock used for the TX signal is passed over the satellite, but will not be used at the RX earth station where a national network derives its time locally. A buffer will fill up with data using the clock from the satellite and will empty using the local clock. The object of the buffer is to ensure that the buffer overflows or underflows at regular, determinable intervals (typically every 40 days). The buffer depth required (from center to end) would be:

Minimum slip period (seconds) * [stability of far end (transmit) clock + stability of local clock]

For example: Far end (transmit) clock stability 1 x 10-9

Local (buffer) clock 1 x 10-11

Minimum clock slip 40 days

Buffer depth = (40*24*60*60) (1*10-9 + 1*10-11) = 3.49 ms

Because the buffer will either fill or empty (depending on the frequency relationship of the two clocks), the total buffer depth will be:

2*3.49ms = 6.98ms



B.4.1.3 Frame / Multiframe Length

The depth of the receive buffer required is applicable to all unframed data.

When the data is framed (such as 2048 kbps G732 or 1544 kbps G733), it is desirable to provide slips in predefined locations. The advantage of organized slip locations (in relation to the frame) is that multiplexing equipment does not lose sync and outages on any channel are kept to a minimum.

A 2048 kbps frame structure commonly used is G732. This has a frame length of 256 bits with 16 frames per multiframe (4096 bits total, or 2 ms).

B.4.1.3.1 Multiples of the Frame Length

If this setting is set to NONE, you can choose any buffer depth.

B.4.1.3.2 Total Buffer Length

T1 and E1 framing structure under G.704 are available. When this is selected, the buffer length is restricted to the size of the buffer. Using the examples from the three previous sections, the total buffer depth, end to end, will be (rounded up to the nearest multiframe):

1.15ms (Doppler) + 6.98ms (Plesiochronous)= 8.13ms

If the frame length is 2ms, then the nearest multiframe will be 10ms, or 20,480 bits.

B.4.1.3.3 Converting Between Bits and Seconds

• Bits to Seconds: 1/Data Rate x Bits = Seconds

• Seconds to Bits: Data Rate x Seconds = Bit


Appendix C C–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix C. MODEM OPTIONS

C.1 Forward Error Correction Options

As standard, the SLM-5650B Satellite Modem is equipped with three Forward Error Correction (FEC) encoders/decoders: Viterbi, Trellis and TURBO (or Turbo Product Codes). The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are not only Open Network compatible, but are also Closed Network compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers. The modem also provides the capability to disable all FEC, allowing the modem to run uncoded.

C.2 Viterbi

The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal standard for satellite communications. The modem complies with the Intelsat IESS 308 and 309 standards for Viterbi decoding with a constraint length of seven. This is a de facto standard, which means inter-operability with other manufacturer’s equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded voice applications. It has a short constraint length, fixed at 7, for all code rates. (The constraint length is defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single input bit.)

By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) the user can trade off coding gain for bandwidth expansion. Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the transmitted data rate, and hence doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal. Rate 7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14 %. A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly below a certain value of Eb/No). Note that in BPSK mode, the modem permits code rates of 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8.

Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic.



Table C-1. Viterbi Decoding Summary

FOR AGAINST

Good BER performance - very useful coding gain. Higher coding gain possible with other methods

Almost universally used, with de facto standards for constraint length and coding polynomials

Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits) of any FEC scheme - good for coded voice, VOIP, etc

Short constraint lengths produce small error bursts; good for coded voice.

No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully.

Coding gain independent of data rate.

C.3 Trellis Coding (FAST Option)

In the other FEC methods described here, the processes of coding and modulation are independent - the FEC codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with the modulator. However, there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together, where the encoder places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation. This can yield an overall improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order modulation schemes, such as 8-PSK, 16-PSK, 16-QAM, etc.

When convolution coding is used, the overall coded modulation approach is referred to as Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM). Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and developed optimum mapping and decoding schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as complex, and expensive, and Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a Viterbi decoder at the core, surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve performance very close to the optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is called pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation.

Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high-power transponders are put in to service, the transponders are no longer power limited, but bandwidth limited. In order to maximize transponder capacity, they looked at 8-PSK as a method of reducing the occupied bandwidth of a carrier, and adopted Qualcomm’s pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.

A Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK carrier. However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so Intelsat’s IESS-310 specification requires that the scheme be concatenated with an outer RS codec. When combined, there is a threshold value of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and above approximately 7 dB, the bit error rate is better than 1 x 10-8.

The detractions of the concatenated RS approach apply here also, along with more stringent requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion – the natural consequences of the higher-order modulation.



The modem fully implements the IESS-310 specification at data rates up to 51.84 Mbps. In accordance with the specification, the R-S outer code cannot be disabled.

Table C-2. 8-PSK/TCM Coding Summary

FOR AGAINST

Exceptionally bandwidth efficient compared to QPSK Needs concatenated RS outer codec to give acceptable coding gain performance

Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks Demodulator acquisition threshold much higher than for QPSK

8-PSK is more sensitive to phase noise and group delay distortion than QPSK

C.4 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec

The concatenation of an outer Reed-Solomon (R-S) Codec with a Viterbi decoder first became popular in the early 1990s. It permits significant improvements in error performance without significant bandwidth expansion.

The coding overhead added by the R-S outer Codec is typically around 10%, which translates to a 0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-Solomon codes are block codes (as opposed to Viterbi and Sequential, which are convolutional), and in order to be processed correctly the data must be framed and de-framed. Additionally, R-S codes are limited in how well they can correct errors that occur in bursts.

This, unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from Viterbi decoders, which produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length. For this reason, the data must be interleaved following R-S encoding, and is then de-interleaved prior to decoding. This ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi decoder is spread out over a number of interleaving frames, so errors entering the R-S decoder do not exceed its capacity to correct those errors.



C.5 Closed Network Mode

A 225,205 or 220,200 code is used in closed network mode. For a rate of 225,205 data is put into blocks of 225 bytes, of which 205 bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead. The code was chosen because it is compatible with legacy Comtech EF Data modems.

For closed network Viterbi Reed Solomon, an interleaver depth of 4 or 8 is used. The increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay. The interleaving/de-interleaving delay and the delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbps. At low data rates, this equates to an appreciable part of a second, when combined with the round-trip delay makes it highly unsuitable for voice applications. Additionally, the de-interleaver frame synchronization method can add significantly to the time taken for the demodulator to declare acquisition.

Table C-3. Open Network Modes

Code Rate Mode

225, 205, 219, 201 208, 192, 194, 178 126, 112

IESS-308

219, 201 IESS-309 IBS, VSAT-IBS and Extended

219, 201 IESS-310

A characteristic of concatenated R-S coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For any given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the demodulator cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits, or the synchronization threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the SLM-5650B Satellite Modem and Rate 1/2 operation, this threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value, operation is not possible, but above this value, the error performance of the concatenated R-S system produces exceptionally low error rates for a very small increase in Eb/No.

Care should be taken not to operate the demodulator near its sync threshold. Small fluctuations in Eb/No may cause total loss of the link, with the subsequent need for the demodulator to re-acquire the signal.

Table C-4. Concatenated RS Coding Summary

For Against

Exceptionally good BER performance - several orders of magnitude improvement in link BER under given link conditions.

Very pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions. Additional coding overhead actually degrades sync threshold, and reduces link fade margin.

Very small additional bandwidth expansion Significant processing delay (~25 kbps) - not good for voice, or IP applications

Interoperable with legacy Intelsat networks Adds to demod acquisition time.



C.6 Turbo Product Codec

Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Two general classes of Turbo Codes have been developed, Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product Codes (TPC, a block coding technique). Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC codec based on TPC. A Turbo Product Code is a 2 or 3-dimensional array of block codes. Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.

Unlike the popular method of concatenating an R-S codec with a primary FEC codec, TPC is an entirely stand-alone method. It does not require the complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the R-S approach, and consequently, decoding delays are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the traditional concatenated R-S schemes exhibit a very pronounced threshold effect – a small reduction in Eb/No can result in total loss of demod and decoder synchronization. TPC does not suffer from this problem – the demodulator and decoder remain synchronized down to the point where the output error rate becomes unusable. This is considered to be a particularly advantageous characteristic in a fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8-PSK and 16-QAM, TPC modes for the demod and decoder can remain synchronized 2 to 3dB below the Viterbi/Reed-Solomon or TCM cases.

Table C-5. Available TPC Modes

TPC Code Rate/Modulation

Rate 5/16 BPSK

Rate 21/44 BPSK

Rate 21/44 QPSK, OQPSK


Rate 3/4 8-PSK

Rate 3/4 16-QAM


Rate 7/8 8-PSK

Rate 7/8 16-QAM


Rate 17/18 8-PSK



C.7 Sequential (FAST Option)

Although the method of convolutional coding and Sequential decoding appears to be very similar to the Viterbi method, there are some fundamental differences. To begin with, the convolutional encoder is said to be systematic – it does not alter the input data, and the FEC overhead bits are simply appended to the data. Furthermore, the constraint length, k, is much longer (Rate 1/2, k=36. Rate 3/4, k= 63. Rate 7/8, k=87). This means that when the decoding process fails (i.e., when its capacity to correct errors is exceeded) it produces a burst of errors which is in multiples of half the constraint length.

An error distribution is produced which is markedly different to that of a Viterbi decoder. This gives rise to a pronounced threshold effect. A Sequential decoder does not fail gracefully – a reduction in Eb/No of just a few tenths of a dB can make the difference between acceptable BER and a complete loss of synchronization.

The decoding algorithm itself (called the Fano algorithm) uses significantly more path memory (4 kbps in this case) than the equivalent Viterbi decoder, giving rise to increased latency. Furthermore, a fixed computational clock is used to process input symbols, and to search backwards and forwards in time to determine the correct decoding path. At lower data rates, there are a sufficient number of computational cycles per input symbol to permit the decoding process to perform optimally. However, as the data rate increases, there are fewer cycles available, leading to a reduction in coding gain. For data rates above ~1 Mbps, Viterbi should be considered the better alternative. The practical upper limit at this time is 2.048 Mbps.

Table C-6. Sequential Decoding Summary

For Against

Higher coding gain (1-2 dB) at lower data rates, compared to Viterbi.

Pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions.

Higher processing delay than Viterbi (~4 k bits) – not good for low-rate coded voice.

Upper data rate limit approximately 2 Mbps

Coding gain varies with data rate - favors lower data rates.



C.8 Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) Coding (FAST Option)

C.8.1 Introduction

In the past few years there has been an unprecedented resurgence in interest in FEC technology. The start of this new interest has its origins in the work done by Claude Berrou et al, and the 1993 landmark paper, Near Shannon Limit Error Correcting Coding and Decoding – Turbo Codes. FEC is considered an essential component in all wireless and satellite communications in order to reduce the power and bandwidth requirements for reliable data transmission.

Claude Shannon, considered by many to be the father of modern communications theory, first established the concept of Channel Capacity in his 1948 paper A Mathematical Theory of Communication. This places an absolute limit on how fast it is possible to transmit error-free data within a channel of a given bandwidth, and with given noise conditions within that channel. He concluded that it would only be possible to approach this limit through the use of source encoding – what is familiar today as FEC.

Shannon postulated that if it were possible to store every possible message in the receiver, finding the stored message that most closely matched the incoming message would yield an optimum decoding method. However, for all but the shortest bit sequences, the memory required for this, and the time taken to perform the comparisons, makes this approach impractical. For all practical purposes, the memory requirement and the decoding latency become infinite.

For many years, there were few advances in the quest to approach the Shannon Limit. The Viterbi algorithm heralded a major step forward, followed in the early 1990s by the concatenation of a Viterbi decoder with Reed-Solomon hard-decision block codes. It remained clear, however, that the Shannon Limit was still an elusive target.

Berrou’s work on Turbo Codes showed, through the use of an ingeniously simple approach (multiple, or iterative decoding passes) that it is possible to achieve performance close to the Shannon Limit. Berrou’s early work dealt exclusively with iteratively-decoded convolutional codes (i.e., TCC), but in time the iterative approach was applied to TPC. TPC exhibits inherently low decoding latency compared with TCC, and so is considered much more desirable for two-way, interactive satellite communications applications.

In August 1999, Comtech became the first company in the world to offer satellite modems that incorporate TPC. Since its inception, Comtech has continued to develop and refine its implementation of TPC in its products, and now offers a comprehensive range of code rates (from Rate 5/16 to Rate 0.95) and modulations (from BPSK to 16QAM). However, in the past few years, as part of the general interest in Turbo coding, a third class of Turbo coding has emerged: LDPC Codes.

LDPC is more like TPC than TCC in that it is an iteratively-decoded block code. Gallager first suggested this in 1962, but at the time, the implementation complexity was considered to be too great; for decades, it remained of purely academic interest. Further interest in LDPC was stimulated in 2003, when the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) committee adopted LDPC codes (proposed by Hughes Network Systems) as the basis for the new DVB-S2 standard. Now, however, with silicon gates being cheap, plentiful and fast, an LDPC decoder can easily be accommodated in a large Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) device.



The LDPC method on its own produces an undesirable ‘flaring’ in the Bit Error Rate (BER) vs. Eb/No characteristic, and for this reason it is desirable to concatenate a short BCH code with LDPC. This concatenation produces almost vertical BER vs. Eb/No curves, as can be seen in the performance graphs that are presented later. In order to take full advantage of the coding gain increase that LDPC provides, it became necessary to find an alternative to 8PSK. Comtech EF Data has, therefore, developed an 8QAM approach that permits acquisition and tracking at much lower values of Eb/No than 8PSK. Comtech’s implementation of 8QAM is the subject of a U.S. Patent, granted in 2007.

C.8.2 LDPC versus TPC

Is LDPC better than TPC? The answer must be ‘sometimes, but not always’, and there are issues such as latency that must be taken into consideration. Error free transmission is not possible for values of spectral efficiency (capacity) vs. Eb/No above these limit curves. The horizontal distance to the limit provides a metric of overall performance. Figure D-7 graphs the performance of various TPC and LDPC modes relative to the Shannon Limit – the Channel Capacity is shown for both QPSK and 8PSK. It can be seen from this graph that, for Code Rates above 3/4, Comtech’s TPCs are very close (1-1.5 dB) to the Shannon Limit. However, at 3/4 and below, LDPCs are performing 0.7-1.2 dB better than TPCs. It is clear that, in order to provide the best possible performance over the range of code rates from 1/2 to 0.95, both an LDPC and a TPC codec need to be offered.

Figure C-1. TPC & LDPC Modes Performance (Relative to Shannon Limit)



In order to provide a robust set of LDPC codes with varying degrees of latency, the SLM-5650A has implemented three different block sizes:

• The Ultra Low Latency (ULL) code provides the lowest latency, but worst performance of the three block sizes. This code is available in the data rate range from 32 kbps to 2 Mbps and is compatible with the CDM-625 ULL code.

• The Low Latency (LL) code provides modest latency and performance over the data rate range of 32 kbps to 5 Mbps.

• The High Performance (HP) code provides the best performance but worst latency. This code is available from 32 kbps up to 69 Mbps depending on MODCOD. The HP code is compatible with the CDM-625 LDPC code.

See Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES for more details on the data rate and symbol rate ranges supported in each code.



C.9 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (FAST Option)

As On-The-Move systems with very small dishes (e.g., VSATs) become more popular, there is an increased interest in Spectrum Spreading. To meet this need, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) is optionally available in the SLM-5650A.

DSSS works by modulating the normal carrier with a pseudo-random PN sequence (chips) at a much higher chip rate. The chip rate is determined by the carrier’s symbol rate and a multiplying (spreading) factor.

The SLM-5650A offers spreading in the following LDPC MODCODs:

• ULL BPSK 1/2 • LL BPSK .378 • LL BPSK .451 • LL BPSK .541 • HP BPSK 1/3 • HP BPSK 1/2

The Spreading Factors currently supported are:

• 1(Spreading Off), • 2 through 512 up to a maximum chip rate of 64 Mcps.

The user can select between two built-in pseudo-random PN sequences (polynomials) and 10,000 Gold Code Sequences per polynomial so that multiple spread carriers can occupy the same bandwidth in a Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) fashion.

When using large spreading factors, the SLM-5650A also exhibits a large tolerance to jamming – up to 24 dB – and a Low Probability of Detection/Interception. With DSSS enabled, the lower data rate limit has been reduced to 8 kbps. The SLM-5650A Base Modem Web Server Interface provides a Web page to facilitate anti-jamming applications. This page allows the user to configure the modem parameters so that a fixed occupied bandwidth can be maintained.

Lastly, there is no loss in performance with spreading enabled.


Appendix D D–1 MN-SLM-5650A


D.1 Overview

See Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE for complete information about this specific product.

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem rear panel features two slots that accommodate optional plug-in data interface modules. These modules plug into either the Interface Option slot that is located on the rear panel of the SLM-5650A chassis (Figure D-1).

Figure D-1. SLM-5650A Data Interface Module Slot (Empty)

By convention, a modem is Data Communications Equipment (DCE) where Tx data enters the data interface and Rx data exits. Via the chassis’ internal data interface module connections, theSLM-5650A provides physical and electrical connection between the external terrestrial device and the internal circuitry of the modulator or demodulator.

While the SLM-5650A’s available optional data interface modules are usually ordered with the modem, they are easily field-installed. The available data interface modules and reference to their pertinent section in this appendix are as follows:

CEFD Kit / Assembly Description For Details See Appendix Section

AS/11984 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module C.2.1

AS/11579 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module C.2.2

PL/12272-1 Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module C.2.3



D.2 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module

Figure D-2. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11984)

The 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet – or Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) – Interface Module (Figure D-2), acts as an Ethernet bridge for data traffic. Monitor and Control (M&C) information is not supported on the GbE Interface, but is available through the 10/100 BaseT ‘J5 Ethernet’ port of the Base Modem.

The GbE Interface supports data rates from 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps. IP traffic entering the interface is encapsulated in HDLC protocol for transmission over the satellite link. HDLC CRS-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames. The GbE module user interface is a single IEEE 802.3ab 1000 BaseT copper compliant female RJ-45 connector, wired as per Table D-1.

D.2.1 Physical Description

The 10/100/1000 Base GbE Interface Module is implemented on a PCB. Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. The functional block diagram is shown in Figure D-3. Figure D-2 shows the rear panel view of the module. The LAN interface consists of an RJ-45 connector with link status and link activity LED indicators.



Figure D-3. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram

D.2.2 “J1” Connector Pinout

The GbE Interface is comprised of one IEEE 802.3ab 1000BaseT copper interface via a single ‘RJ-45’ type female connector (J1). The LAN interface supports 10/100/1000 BaseT operation.

Table D-1. “J1” Connector Pinout

Pin # Description Direction 1 BI_DA+ bidirectional

2 BI_DA- bidirectional

3 BI_DB+ bidirectional

4 BI_DC+ bidirectional

5 BI_DC- bidirectional

6 BI_DB- bidirectional

7 BI_DD+ bidirectional

8 BI_DD- bidirectional



D.2.3 Specifications

D.2.3.1 General Specifications

• Data Framing: 10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet” • Data Framing Format (WAN): HDLC (Standard Single Channel) • Connector: RJ-45 female, 100Ω • Electrical Properties: Per IEEE 802.3ab • Packet Types: Burst, distributed, or IPV4 • Signal Types: Serial data • Voltage Level: Per IEEE- 802.3ab • Packet Latency: 50 ms maximum • Flow Control: None • Cable Length, Maximum: 100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting

hardware, per ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995) • Hot Pluggable:

o Cable – YES o Module – NO

• LEDs: Link Status; Link Activity • Ingress Packet Filtration Parameters: MAC, IP Address match value configuration for

media and management packets, UDP port for media packets • Egress Packet Parameters: Destination IP address and UDP port for media packets • Packet Filtration Parameters (generic): IP Address match value configuration for

management packets • 1000 BaseT Link Statistics:

o Ingress good octets o Ingress bad octets o Ingress Unicast packets o Ingress broadcast packets o Ingress multicast packets o Ingress pause packets o Ingress undersize packets o Ingress fragments o Ingress oversize packets o Ingress jabber o Ingress Rx errors o Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors o Egress octets o Egress Unicast packets o Egress broadcast packets o Egress multicast packets



D.2.3.2 Monitor & Control

• WAN Port Statistics: o Ingress good octets o Ingress bad octets o Ingress Unicast packets o Ingress broadcast packets o Ingress multicast packets o Ingress pause packets o Ingress undersize packets o Ingress fragments o Ingress oversize packets o Ingress jabber o Ingress Rx errors o Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors o Egress octets o Egress Unicast packets o Egress broadcast packets o Egress multicast packets o HDLC link errors o Rx packet count o Tx packet count

• Management Port Statistics o Ingress good octets o Ingress bad octets o Ingress Unicast packets o Ingress broadcast packets o Ingress multicast packets o Ingress pause packets o Ingress undersize packets o Ingress fragments o Ingress oversize packets o Ingress jabber o Ingress Rx errors o Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors o Egress octets o Egress Unicast packets o Egress broadcast packets o Egress multicast packets

• Controlled Functions o TX data rate o Rx data rate o Tx enable/disable o Rx enable/disable o Management IP Address and Mask



D.2.3.3 Physical and Environmental

• Physical Size – 4.5W x 6.8D x .85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm) • Environmental:

o Temperature – 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) o Humidity – 0 to 95% non-condensing



D.2.4 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and Installation

WARNING! Make sure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation! You must take care not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.

Figure D-4. GbE Interface Module Removal or Installation

D.2.4.1.1 GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step Task

1 Turn off the power to the modem.

2 Disconnect the RJ-45 cable from the Interface Module.

3 Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.

4 Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.

D.2.4.1.2 GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step Task

1 Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.

2 Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.

3 Connect the RJ-45 cable to the Interface Module.

4 Turn on the power to the modem.



D.3 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Data Interface Module

Figure D-5. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown)

The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (Figure D-5) is implemented on a PCB. It supports balanced or unbalanced, and differential/ single-ended operation. The plug-in interface has full duplex capability.


Figure D-6. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram

Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. Figure D-5 shows the rear panel view of the module. Figure D-6 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. The interface provides:

• Two (2) G.703 Interfaces:

o Balanced T1/E1 and T2 (J1 BAL. DATA – see Table D-2)

o Unbalanced T1/E1, T2/E2 (J2 Tx and J3 Rx – see Table D-3)

• An External Clock Input (J4 Ext. Ref. – see Table D-3)



D.3.1.1 G.703 Balanced “J1 | BAL DATA” Connector (DB-15F)

Table D-2. “J1 | BAL. DATA” DB-15F Connector Pinout

Connector Ref Des Pin # G.703 (Non-D&I) Direction

J1

1 SD_A G.703 In

9 SD_B G.703 In

2 Ground –

10

3 RD_A G.703 Out

11 RD_B G.703 Out

4 Ground –

12

5

13

6

14

7

15

8



D.3.1.2 G.703 Unbalanced “J2” through “J4” BNC Connectors

Table D-3. G.703 Unbalanced Connectors

Connector Ref Des Description Connector Type Direction

J2 Tx Tx Data G.703 BNC 75Ω Female Input

J3 Rx Rx Data G.703 BNC 75Ω Female Output

J4 Ext. Ref Ext Clock Ref BNC 75Ω Female Input



• Interface: Balanced and Unbalanced G.703 ports, T1/E1, T2/E2

Selection of a data rate requires TX and RX having the same data rate.

• External Clock Input: One input • RX Buffer:

G.703 Frame Type Programmable in 0.5 ms increments

Type Bits Bytes T1 G.704 9264 192

E1 G.704 512 64

T2 G.704 G.743 G.747

12624 2352 1680

1578 294 210

E2 G.704 G.745 G.742

2112 2112 1696

264 264 212

• Minimum Buffer Size for any rate: 0.5 ms • Minimum Buffer Size:

o G.751 – 61 ms o G.752 – 44 ms o G.753 – 61 ms



• Clock Options: o Tx Clock = Tx, Rx (satellite), or External o Rx Clock = Tx, Rx, External, or Internal

• Acquisition Range – Programmed Tx data rate ± 100 ppm • Test:

o Baseband Loopback (at interface) o Interface Loopback (through interface card) o 2047 test pattern generator

D.3.2.2 Interfaces

• G.703 Unbalanced: 1 channel supporting T1/E1, T2/E2, and G.703 o Connector Type – BNC female o Signals Supported – ITU-T-G.703 SD, RD o Data Rate –1544, 2048, 6312, and 8448 kbps o Tx and Rx Data Rates – Tx and Rx data rates are programmed the same o Line Coding – HDB3, B8ZS, B6ZS, HDB3, AMI (Common) o Pulse Mask – ITU-T-G.703 o Impedance – 75Ω Unbalanced, 150Ω Balanced Per ITU-T-G.703

• External Clock Input: o Connector – BNC female o Impedance – 75 Ω ± 5% o Return Loss per G.703 – Synchronization XXXXX Interface o Input Amplitude – 0.5 to 5.0 V peak to peak o Input Frequency – 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448 MHz o Signal Characteristics – Sine wave or square with duty cycle of 50 ± 10%

• Alarms: o Loss of Signal o All 1’s

D.3.2.3 Physical and Environmental

• Physical: 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm) • Environmental:




D.3.3 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation


Figure D-7. G.703 Interface Module Removal or Installation

D.3.3.1 G.703 Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step Task


2 Disconnect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) from the Interface Module.





D.3.3.2 G.703 Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step Task



3 Connect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) to the Interface Module.




D.4 Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module

Figure D-8. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1)

The Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (Figure D-8) is implemented on a PCB and provides a physical and electrical interface between the SLM-5650A’s modulator or demodulator signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics.


Figure D-9. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram

Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. Figure D-8 shows the rear panel view of the module. Figure D-9 shows the functional block diagram for this interface. The ‘J1’ interface is a single Type ‘D’ 25-pin female (DB-25F) connector wired as per Table D-4.



D.4.1.1 “J1” Connector Pinout (DB-25F)

Table D-4. “J1” DB-25F Connector Pinout

PIN # DESCRIPTION DIRECTION 1 GND –

14 SD_P IN

2 SD_N IN

15 SCT_N OUT 3 RX_DATA_N OUT

16 RX_DATA_P OUT

4 RTS_N IN

17 LVDS_RX_CLK_N OUT 5 SPARE –

18 RESERVED –

6 SPARE – 19 RTS_P IN

7 GND – 20 SPARE –

8 RR_N OUT

21 SPARE –

9 LVDS_RX_CLK_P OUT

22 SPARE – 10 RR_P OUT

23 SPARE –

11 TT_P IN

24 TT_N IN 12 SCT_P OUT

25 RESERVED –

13 SPARE –





• Digital Data Rate – 64 kbps to 42 Mbps, in 1 bps steps • Tx Clock Source – Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync • Transmit Clock and Data Inversion – Interface can invert the Tx clock and data

independently of each other. • Buffer Clock Source – INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite • Buffer Size –128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec

D.4.2.2 Physical & Environmental

• Physical Size – 4.5W x 6.8D x .85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm) • Environmental:




D.4.3 LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation


Figure D-10. LVDS Interface Module Removal or Installation

D.4.3.1 LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure

Step Task


2 Disconnect all cable (DB-25) from the Interface Module.





D.4.3.2 LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure

Step Task



3 Connect all cable (DB-25) to the Interface Module.



Appendix E E–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix E. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)

INTERFACE MODULE

E.1 Overview

Figure E-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module

The optional SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (Figure E-1), also referred to as the “NP Interface” or the “card”, is Comtech EF Data’s third generation IP router and Ethernet bridge device. The NP Interface supports a number of primary operating modes:

• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode

• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode

• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat BPM Mode

• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode

• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode

The NP Interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second (pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or BPM mode of operation. It provides four RJ-45 connectors for user data, wired as described in Table E-1. The NP Interface also has a single RJ-11 console interface that is intended only for factory-use initial interface configuration. The Maximum Ethernet Frame size for the SLM-5650A is 1518 for all modes.



To prevent network failure, there should be no more than one Ethernet connection to a single external switch at any time.

User access to M&C of the NP Interface via the built-in HTTP/HTTPS Interface or Telnet server (port 23) is possible using the available RJ-45 connectors (Figure E-2) as follows:

• When in Router Mode, access is possible using any of the NP Interface RJ-45 Ports 1 through 4.

• When in BPM Mode (see Section E.1.5), only the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet RJ-45 port can be used for M&C.



E.2 Functional Hardware Description

Figure E-2. NP Interface Block Diagram

The NP Interface employs the very high-performance Intel IXP2350 network processor/32-bit microcontroller with four embedded MicroEngines to perform the high-speed Layer 3 routing functions.

A functional block diagram is provided in Figure E-2. The front-end of the NP Interface design incorporates a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) switch device that provides all Layer 2 management. The back-end of the NP Interface design incorporates an FPGA to provide the WAN framing and deframing, plus the interface into the main SLM-5650A modem design.



E.2.1 Connector Pinout

The LAN interface is comprised of four IEEE 802.3ab 10/100/1000 BaseT copper interfaces via four female RJ-45 connectors wired as shown in Table E-1.

Table E-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical)

Pin # Description Direction 1 BI_DA+

Bidirectional

2 BI_DA- 3 BI_DB+ 4 BI_DC+ 5 BI_DC- 6 BI_DB- 7 BI_DD+ 8 BI_DD-



E.3 Interface Specifications

E.3.1 Physical Description

Dimensions 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)

Connectors

SLM-5650A connection: (1) 96-pin DIN receptacle Console interface for board bring-up and factory use only: (1) RJ-11 connector

LAN interface: (4) RJ-45 female connectors, 100Ω

Indicators Link Status and Activity Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

E.3.2 General Specifications

Data Framing 10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet”

Data Framing Format (WAN) CEFD proprietary

Electrical Properties Per IEEE 802.3ab

Max Ethernet Frame 1518 for all modes

Packet Types Burst, distributed, or IPV4

Signal Types Serial data

Voltage Level Per IEEE- 802.3ab

Packet Latency 50 ms maximum

Cable Length, Maximum 100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting hardware, per ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A (1995)

Hot Pluggable Card – No

Cable – Yes



E.4 NP Interface Module Removal and Installation

Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or installation. You must take care not to damage the module’s components during removal or installation.

Figure E-3. NP Interface Module Removal or Installation

E.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal

Step Task


2 Disconnect the RJ-45 cable from the NP Interface Module.



E.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation

Step Task

1 Insert the NP Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card receptacle.


3 Connect the RJ-45 cable to the NP Interface Module.




E.5 Using Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Mode

See Appendix I. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES for in-depth information about using the BPM FAST Option.


Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface limits the number of allowable route tables. This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.

In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A modems, the optional BPM Mode is a feature available with NP Interface operation whereby Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously. When BPM Mode is selected, you can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network simultaneously without interfering with each other.



E.6 Important Operational Considerations


Before you proceed with using the NP Interface module for secure Ethernet remote product management, make sure the following is true:

• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its entirety and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure applications.

• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files.

• The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

• You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address and the NP Interface IP Address.

• The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface.

• The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the Telnet Remote Control features.



E.7 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface

E.7.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction


In order to make any NP modifications permanent, all changes made on any of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages must be saved before rebooting the unit.

The NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface functionality not only integrates a good portion of the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface non-secure operations (outlined in detail in Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION), but also provide operations unique to the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface.

The pages for the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface have been designed to work using either Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 7.0 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox Version 2.0 or higher.

The examples shown in this appendix use Internet Explorer Version 7.0 – most, but not all, pages will display properly with Internet Explorer Version 6.0.

E.7.1.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces

Non-secure and secure network management operations are controlled by the Interface Security Mode setting provided on the Admin | Security page (see Section E.2.5.2.3 for more information). Its use is dependent on the options installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.

When the SLM-5650A is equipped with the NP Interface only, Management Security is an optional feature.



E.7.1.1.1 Secure Management – NP Interface Only

Make sure to read this section in its entirety!


When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A without the optional TRANSEC Module Interface, Management Security is optional and the following secure network management operating alternatives apply:

• When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is selected):

o Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the Base Modem using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial port and the menu-driven Command Line Interface (CLI).

o Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over the NP Interface using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and SNMPv2.

When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.

When the modem is operating in BPM Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic; routed network traffic and network management traffic is possible using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.

• When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is selected):

o Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but not by the Base Modem. The Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port has the non-secure modes disabled.

o Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over HTTPS via Secure Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven Command Line Interface (CLI) and SNMPv3 are not supported by the NP.

When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem parameters are available via the NP HTTPS Interface.

When the modem is operating in BPM Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic; routed network traffic and network management traffic is possible using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.

When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, NP Management Security (i.e., High Level Security) is not allowed. Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is therefore disabled.



E.7.1.1.2 Secure Management – NP Interface with TRANSEC Module Interface


When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional TRANSEC Module Interface and with Management Security enabled, the network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply.

The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module, therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:

Base Modem Network Processor Interface TRANSEC Module

HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module

HTTP HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module) SSH

HTTPS SSH



E.7.2 User Login

Access to the SLM-5650A’s NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface depends on the IP Interface Security Mode setting selected for the interface (via the Admin | Security page – see Section E.7.5.2.3 for more information).

From any compatible Web browser, enter the NP Interface IP Address into the browser’s Address area as follows (where “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the IP Address of the NP Interface).

For a non-secure HTTP session (Low Level Security selected):

http:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;

For a secure HTTPS session (High Level Security selected):

https:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.

When prompted, type in a valid User Name and Password, similar to the dialog box shown to the right. The default for both is comtech. Click [OK] to continue.

The NP Interface User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 characters and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).



Once the valid User Name and Password is accepted, the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface displays its “splash” page, similar to the example shown here:

Operation of the NP may be fully monitored and controlled from the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page, you can select from the available nested hyperlinks (as shown below).



E.7.3 HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features


See Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION, Sect.9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features for an overview of the navigational and operational features common with using this interface.

E.7.4 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree

The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface:

Table E-2. HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree

Info Admin Modem LAN WAN Routing Stats Vipersat* Redundancy Save

Home Vipersat Mode* Config Interfa

ce QoS* Routes Ethernet Tx Vipersat 1:1 Redundancy Save

Contact FAST Features Monitor

Ethernet Ports

QoS Stats* OSPF Ethernet Rx STDMA

Logoff Security Events ARP Loopback Test IGMP IP Stats

SNMP Stats WAN Switching

Upgrade Utility Clear All DPC

Defaults Home State

Time

EventLog

Reboot

This interface provides access to up to 10 navigation tabs (shown in blue). The diagram further illustrates each tab’s available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey), which afford more specific functionality.

“*” indicates a FAST Feature that is available on the interface only after that option has been purchased. See Section E.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.




E.7.5 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions

E.7.5.1 Info (Information)

Select the Home, Contact, or Logoff hyperlink to continue.

E.7.5.1.1 Info | Home

Use this page to identify pertinent information about the SLM-5650A NP Interface, including the installed firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2.

Figure E-4. Info | Home Page



E.7.5.1.2 Info | Contact

Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and Product Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks

Figure E-5. Info | Contact Page



E.7.5.1.3 Info | Log Off

Use this page to formally disconnect from the interface.

Figure E-6. Info | Logoff Page

At the prompt, click [YES, Logoff Now] to execute the logoff process.

Upon disconnection, you must close the Web browser in order to delete the Network Processor’s security cookie.



E.7.5.2 Admin (Administration)

Depending on the enabled features and options: Click Vipersat Mode, FAST Features, Security, SNMP, Upgrade, Defaults, Time, Event Log, or Reboot to continue.

E.7.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option)

Use this page to specify how the modem/NP Interface is to behave in Vipersat or non-Vipersat working modes. Once the role of a particular modem in the network is determined, the intent of this single point of configuration is to simplify deployment.

Figure E-7. Admin | Vipersat Mode Page

Vipersat Modes

Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional features.

This FAST-enabled page allows you to select the following Vipersat modes:

• Vipersat Hub Router

• Vipersat Hub Expansion Router

• Vipersat Remote Router

• Vipersat Remote Expansion Router



Non-Vipersat Multipoint Modes Item Description

Multipoint Hub Router When in static SCPC (non-Vipersat mode), the option exists for configuring the modems into a hub and spoke network with a shared outbound at the hub. All of the modems at the hub should be put in “Multipoint Hub Router” mode.

If a modem at the remote is configured to be a Hub router there will be significant degradation to network performance due to the potential for routing loops.

Multipoint Remote Router

Select Multipoint Remote Router for all remote modems in a non-Vipersat multipoint network. A Remote router would be classified as a modem which receives the shared outbound and transmits back to the hub on a dedicated SCPC channel

Non-Vipersat Point-to-Point Mode Item Description

Point-to-Point Router Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are different IP subnets on either side of the link.

Routing Mode Item Description

Gigabit Ethernet Bridge

Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link when you wish to bridge traffic (no IP network routing).

This mode is currently only compatible with the Gigabit Ethernet bridge card for the SLM-5650A. Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the Base Modem does not support secure network management interfaces.

Router When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.

BPM


When you select BPM Mode, the NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network management is only possible using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.

In BPM Mode, the Gigabit Ethernet Bridge option becomes inaccessible and the appearance of the Routing Mode section changes as follows:

Click [Submit] once the appropriate Vipersat or non-Vipersat operating mode is selected on this page.



E.7.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features

Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION

This section describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Vipersat, Quality of Service (QoS), and Management Security installed on the SLM-5650A. See Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE and Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on managing FAST Options.

If the SLM-5650A does not have these QoS or Vipersat FAST options installed, the QoS and QoS Stats hyperlinks located under the WAN navigation tab, and the hyperlinks located under the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible/available to the user.

If the SLM-5650A does not have the Management Security FAST option installed, the “IP Interface Security Mode” and “SSH” sections on the ‘Admin | Security’ page and the “SNMP v3” section on the ‘Admin | SNMP’ page will not be visible.

Upgrading the FAST features requires a modem reboot in order for FAST features to be activated, and may require reconfiguration of all modem parameters.

This read-only page displays available FAST Features as “Installed” or “Not Installed”.

Figure E-8. Admin | FAST Features Page

Network Processor and Modem FAST Features Comtech EF Data offers Vipersat, Management Security, NP BPM, Quality of Service (QoS), NP OW Serial Commands, and NP Antenna Handover functionality as optional FAST Features for the NP Interface. The modem’s Demodulator Only FAST feature status is also provided. To install these options, you must contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to purchase a modem FAST Access Code.

Once the 20-digit modem FAST Access Code is obtained, the purchased FAST Feature(s) is installed via the SLM-5650A front panel (Utility: FAST Configuration Enter modem code).



E.7.5.2.3 Admin | Security (Account Information)


The Admin user may use this page to control access to all Base Modem HTTP and NP Interface HTTP/HTTPS pages. However, the Admin user does not have access to the optional TRANSEC Module parameters; this functionality is only available via the Crypto Officer login provided separately on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface. See Appendix F. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION, Sect. E.2. for further information.

Figure E-9. Admin | Security (Management Security) Page

Admin Account Info The login process requires a name and password as defined by the systems administrator of the controlling equipment. This name and password is associated to the name and password of an administrator account. Set the desired Admin User Name and Admin Password for the administrator account. Click [Submit] to apply these settings.

The Admin User Name and Password settings are maintained separately from the IP Interface Security Mode and SSH sections on this page.

IP Interface Security Mode


The desired IP Interface Security Mode can be set to either Low Level Security for HTTP/FTP/ SNMP/Telnet access, or High Level Security for HTTPS/SSH (Secure Shell) access only. See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on using this modem control interface.



Click [Submit] to apply this setting. More specifically:

• When Management Security is set to Low Level Security, the NP Interface can be managed by non-secure protocols such as HTTP and Telnet.

• When Management Security is set to High Level Security, the following restrictions apply: o The NP Interface can ONLY be managed via the secure HTTPS protocol – the

https:// address prefix must be specified in order to connect to the secure NP HTTPS Interface.

o Access via Telnet is not permitted – however, while access to the CLI is not permitted via the Telnet interface, the CLI is accessible via the SSH interface;

o Access to the SLM-5650A HTTP and FTP server is disabled since non-secure protocols are used.

You may also change Management Security via the SLM-5650A front panel:

• SELECT: Configure Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc Security

• SSH (Secure Shell)

SSH Host Key: This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The host key the SSH client shows can then be compared with the host key the NP displays to verify that they are the same.

Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.



E.7.5.2.4 Admin | SNMP


The Admin user may use this page to change the parameters associated with Simple Network Management Protocol, an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices. The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, SNMP v2c, and SNMP v3. See Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION, Sect. 8.4 SNMP Interface, for complete details on SNMP and using this page.

Figure E-10. Admin | SNMP Page

SNMP The SNMP Read and Write Communities cannot be changed; the default name for Read Community is public; the default Write Community name is private.

Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP configuration changes made to Trap Community, Trap, System Contact, and System Location.



SNMP v3 Use this section to create user accounts under SNMPv3 protocol. SNMPv3 is available only when you set the IP Interface Security Mode security level to “High”.

Using the provided text boxes, create an Engine ID (the default is 0000000c000000007f000001), User Name and Password as needed (the default for both is comtech) then, using the available drop-down list, select the Security Model algorithm as “md5” or “sha”.

This setting must match the setting in the SNMP client; otherwise the SLM-5650A will not allow communications.

Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP v3 configuration changes made in this section.



E.7.5.2.5 Admin | Upgrade

Use this page to review accessibility to and information about the loaded NP Interface and modem firmware (i.e., the Bootrom and image files), and to upgrade the operational firmware for the interface.

Figure E-11. Admin | Upgrade Page

NP Firmware Info These fields display the installed NP Interface Firmware (all information is read only):

Item Description

Network Processor Bootrom A single Bootrom that initializes the hardware and loads the full bulk image as selected by the user.

Network Processor Image 1 A full copy of software image stored in slot 1.

Network Processor Image 2 A full copy of software image stored in slot 2.

Modem Firmware Info These fields display installed SLM-5650A Base Modem firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 (all information is read only).



Upgrade


See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for complete details on using the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface for upgrading the Base Modem, NP Interface and TRANSEC Module firmware.

Item Description

Current Running (read only) – displays current NP Interface Firmware Image as defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or Image2).

Upgrade To (read only) – displays the NP Interface Firmware Image that will be overwritten with the new image as defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or Image2).

Upgrade Image File Click [Browse] to locate the bulk image on the local computer’s file system. Click [Upload] to upload the image.

E.7.5.2.6 Admin | Defaults

This Reset selection only resets the NP Card. The Base Modem and TRANSEC (if installed) are not reset using this Reset selection.

Use this page to restore all previously-configured NP card parameters – with the exception of the Admin User Name and the Admin Password (see Section E.3.5.2.3) – to their Factory Default Configuration settings.

Figure E-12. Admin | Defaults (Factory Default Configurations) Page

Click [Restore Now] to begin the restoration process. At the user prompt (shown at right), click [OK] to execute the process, or [Cancel] to abort the command.



E.7.5.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time)

Figure E-13. Admin | Time (Date & Time) Page

Time Zone Use the drop-down list to select the modem’s time zone. Click [Submit] to save.

Internet Time Use the drop-down list to select automatic time synchronization (using network time protocol) as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit] to save.

Internet Time Servers You may edit these fields only when the Internet Time Synchronization is Enabled.

Item Description

Primary Internet Time Server IP Address of primary network time server.

Secondary Internet Time Server IP Address of secondary network time server.

Edit each address as needed. Click [Submit] to save.

Current Date & Time Item Description

Current Date / Current Time These fields display the date and time as of the moment this page was accessed. The current date and time of the modem is set from the modem’s front panel and kept current using a battery back-up clock. This means that the date and time will be correct even if the modem loses power.

Internet Time Status This displays the status of network time server (if NTP is enabled).

Update Date & Time Click [Update Now] to refresh the Current Date and Current Time displays.



E.7.5.2.8 Admin | Event Log

Use this page to view logged events specific to the NP Interface, and to monitor or troubleshoot the health of the interface and any issues found in the field.

Figure E-14. Admin | Event Log Page

Clear Event Log Click [Clear Log] to delete all existing log entries. The event log is reset to one (1) entry: “Eventlog Cleared”.

Event Logging • Logging On/Off – Select On to enable or Off to disable logging of event messages.

• Logging Level – Use the drop-down list to select Errors Only, Errors and Warnings, or All Information. This sets the filtering of the highest displayed message level.

Click [Submit] to execute these settings.

Event Log Table Column Description

Index Event log entries are numbered in the order they are received. Type Describes the severity of the event.

Date Displays the date that the event was logged. In accordance with European convention, the date is shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format.

Time Displays the time of day that the event was logged. Category For use by Product Support. Description Provides a brief description of the action logged.



E.7.5.2.9 Admin | Reboot

Use this page to display the currently available boot images for both the NP Interface and Modem, or to select from which images the NP Interface and modem will boot.

Once the NP and/or Modem image boot selections are made, [Submit] MUST be clicked for the boot parameter updates to take effect upon the next reboot.

Figure E-15. Admin | Reboot Page

Network Processor Boot From Use the drop-down list to select the Network Processor image to boot from Image 1, Image 2, or Newest. Click [Submit] to save the selection.

Modem Boot From Use the drop-down list to select the Modem image to boot from Image 1 or Image 2. Click [Submit] to save the selection.

Reboot

You must make sure to allow time for the Network Processor Boot from or Modem Boot choices to submit/save to flash memory, and for the ‘Admin | Reboot’ page to refresh, prior to executing a modem reboot.

Click [Reboot Now] to reboot the entire modem; this includes the Base Modem, Network Processor and TRANSEC Module.



E.7.5.3 Modem Pages

Use the Modem pages to configure or view the primary Transmit parameters and primary Receive parameters of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.

Select Config, Monitor, Events, Stats, or Utility to continue.

E.7.5.3.1 Modem | Config (Modem Configuration)

Figure E-16. Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) Page

Modem Operating Mode Modem Type – This read-only item identifies the modem operating mode:

Modem Type Description OM-73 Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode. MIL-165A Functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A. IESS-308 Functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data Rate standard. IESS-309 Functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services standard. IESS-310 Functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate Data Rate standard. TURBO Functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo mode interoperability. 16-QAM 16-QAM is selected as a modulation type. AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control is used. TX-BURST The unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem. RX-BURST The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to “Standard.” RX-BURST-FA The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition Mode set to “Long”. TURBO-FA The unit is a Vipersat Hub Expansion Modem.



Reference – Use the drop-down list to select a Reference type:

Reference Type Description Internal Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator

Ext-1MHz External 1 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz)



Unit Interface Type – This read-only item identifies the Network Processor as the active interface type.

Frequency Band – Use the drop-down list to set the IF Frequency Band as 70/140 MHz (52-88 MHz, or 104-176 MHz) or L-Band (950-2000 MHz).

Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.

Transmit FEC Type – Use the drop-down list to select:

FEC Type Description

Viterbi (standard) K = 7 convolutional encoder

None (standard) Uncoded

Turbo (optional) Turbo Product Code, which is a block code

Modulation Type – Use the drop-down list to select:

Modulation Type Description

BPSK Bi Phase Shift Keying

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying

16QAM (optional) (optional) 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

FEC Code Rate – Use the drop-down list to select:

FEC Code Rate Description

Viterbi 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8

Uncoded 1/1

Turbo 5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18



Data Rate – Enter the transmit data rate, in kbps.

Frequency – Enter the transmit frequency, in MHz, in 100-Hz steps. Note that:

• The range for 70/140 MHz operation is 52-88 MHz or 104-176 MHz.

• The range for L-Band operation is 950-2000 MHz.

Spectrum – Use the drop-down list to select Normal or Invert. Use this to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.

Scrambler – Use the drop-down list to select (for energy dispersal):

Selection Description

V.35 ITU standard

Modified-V.35 Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)

IBS Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation

Turbo Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block OM73 Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode

Synch Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon

Off Disables scrambling

Tx Power Level – Enter a value, in 0.1 dB steps, from -40 dBm to +10 dBm.

Carrier – Use the drop-down list to select:


On Enables carrier.

RTS Request to Send. RTS is an interface signaling control. If enabled, RTS can be used to control the output state of the modulator. Only available when using either the EIA-530 or HSSI interface.

VSAT VSAT mode ties control of the Transmit Signal to the status of the Receiver. If the receiver is Locked the Transmitter is Enabled. If the receiver is Unlocked the Transmitter will be disabled.

Off Disables carrier.



• When changing Modulation Type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the modulation type or the change to the modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.

• When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account:

• If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.

• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.

• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.

• When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.

Click [Transmit Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.

Receive FEC Type – Use the drop-down list to select:

FEC Type Description

Viterbi (standard) K = 7 convolutional encoder

None (standard) Uncoded Turbo (optional) Turbo Product Code, which is a block code

Demodulation Type – Use the drop-down list to select:

Modulation Type Description

BPSK Bi Phase Shift Keying QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying

16QAM (optional) 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

FEC Code Rate – Use the drop-down list to select:

FEC Code Rate Description

Viterbi 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8

Uncoded 1/1 Turbo 5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18



Data Rate – Enter the receive data rate, in kbps.

Frequency – Enter the receive frequency, in MHz, in 100-Hz steps. Note that:

• The range for 70/140 MHz operation is 52-88 MHz or 104-176 MHz.

• The range for L-Band operation is 950-2000 MHz.

Spectrum – Use the drop-down list to select Normal or Invert. Use this to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.

Descrambler – Use the drop-down list to select (for energy dispersal):


V.35 ITU standard

Modified-V.35 Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon compatible (modified V.35)

IBS Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation

Turbo Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo block OM73 Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode

Synch Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon

Off Disables descrambling

• When changing demodulation type the data rate must be set to a rate supported by the demodulation type, or the change to the demodulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.

• When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be taken into account:

• If the demodulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.

• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.

• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the selected demodulation type, code rate and overhead.

• When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied bandwidth calculated from the data rate, demodulation type, code rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF frequencies.

Click [Receive Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.



E.7.5.3.2 Modem | Monitor (Modem Status)

Use this read-only page to view the currently available modem receive parameters and operating temperature.

Figure E-17. Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) Page

Receive Parameters This section displays the modem’s currently reported link values:

Item Description

BER Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s measurement of the carrier to noise.

Eb/No Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.

Frequency Offset

Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz. The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem, 60 kHz.

Signal Level Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm. The range supported is +15 to –60 dBm.

Temperature This section reports the temperature of the modem in degrees Celsius.



E.7.5.3.3 Modem | Events (Modem Events Log)

Use this read-only page to view operating events. When a fault condition occurs, it is time-stamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded.

Figure E-18. Modem |Events (Modem Events Log) Page

Clear/Refresh Modem Events Click [Clear] to delete all log entries. Click [Refresh] to refresh the Event Log to display the most recently recorded events.

Event Log Column Description

Index Displays the internal table index.

Fault Detail Provides a description of the fault or event. Date Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).

Time Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).



E.7.5.3.4 Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log)

Figure E-19. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) Page

Clear/Refresh Modem Statistics Click [Clear] to delete all log entries. Click [Refresh] to refresh the Link Statistics Log to display the most recent entries.

Logging Interval Use the drop-down list to set the statistics recording interval. Valid settings are from every 10 Minutes to every 90 Minutes in 10-minute increments, or Disabled.

Click [Submit] to save all changes made to this page.

Link Statistics Log Displays the following read-only modem statistics:

Column Description

Index Displays the internal table index.

Min Eb/No Minimum measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval.

Avg Eb/No Average measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval. Date Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).

Time Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).



E.7.5.3.5 Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities)

Figure E-20. Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) Page

Date and Time To set the Date and Time of the modem:

• Time (HH: MM: SS) – Set the hours in 24-hour time format

• Date (DD/MM/YY) – Set the date in accordance with European convention (DAY/MONTH/YEAR) format.


Circuit ID CID – Enter a name for the communication link in this text field. This name can be any combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.

Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / period (.) comma (,) and [space].




E.7.5.4 LAN

Select Interface, Ethernet Ports, or ARP to continue.

E.7.5.4.1 LAN | Interface

Use this page to set LAN operating parameters, to view the MAC Address of the NP Interface, and to set the IP Address and Mask of the NP Interface.

Figure E-21. LAN | Interface Page

LAN Interface MAC Address (read-only) – The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that cannot be modified by the user.

IP Addressing Mode – Click for Single or Dual mode:

• In Single mode, the Traffic IP Address is used as M&C as well as NextHop IP Address for adjacent routers.

• In Dual mode, the Management IP Address is used as M&C access to the NP Interface, and Traffic IP Address is used as the NextHop IP Address for adjacent Routers.

Traffic IP Address – This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for M&C connectivity as well as the Next Hop Address when IP Addressing Mode is set to Single.

Traffic Subnet Mask (1-30) – This is the Subnet Mask used in conjunction with the Traffic IP Address to determine the subnet locally attached to by the LAN interfaces.



Management IP Address – This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for M&C connectivity when IP Addressing Mode is set to Dual.

Management Subnet Mask (1-30) – This is the subnet mask used in conjunction with the Management IP Address to determine the subnet locally attached to by the LAN interfaces.

Click [Submit] to save changes made to any of the above items.

For VLAN Port Configuration:

Single Port VLAN – Use the drop-down list to select Enabled or Disabled. When Single Port VLAN is Enabled, the SLM-5650A’s Ethernet port accepts the VLAN-tagged packets from the NP Interface port specified from the "VLAN Port Select" drop-down list.

VLAN Port Select – the use the drop-down list to select Port 1 through Port 4. This designates the Ethernet port on which VLAN-tagged packet are ingress and egress.

Click [Submit] to save the desired Single Port VLAN setting.

When BPM Mode is enabled and any Vipersat operating mode other than Vipersat Hub or Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see E.3.5.2.1), the VLAN Port Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’ page becomes disabled and is not visible, as shown here:

However, when BPM Mode is enabled and either Vipersat Hub or Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see E.3.5.2.1), the VLAN Port Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’ page is replaced with the Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode controls, as shown here:



Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode (ViperSat Hub or ViperSat Hub Expansion Mode only) Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.

When an Expansion unit is configured by VMS for an SCPC link, it queries its assigned hub for the correct VLAN ID. If the feature is turned off, the Hub unit responds with a zero (0). If the feature is enabled, the Hub will respond with a VLAN tag that is unique on the current LAN segment.

Set the Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode: Click Off, Automatic, or Manual:

• Off – In this mode, the feature is not used and there is no VLAN tag used.

• Automatic – In this mode, the Hub generates the VLAN tag from the last 12 bits of its IP Address. In most cases, this will guarantee a unique value.

• Manual – This mode SHOULD ONLY BE USED if the network is configured in such a way that two or more hub units on the LAN segment may have the same value in the low order 12 bits of their IP Address. Once this mode is selected, a text box will appear to allow entry of a unique ID in the range from 2 to 4095.

In Manual mode, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure that each Hub box on the segment is given a unique value in that range.

Click [Submit] to save the desired Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode setting.

Flow Control Enable Use the drop-down list to set Flow Control as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit] to save.

Ethernet Flow Control is a technique by which the receiver sends a message to the sender to back-off traffic once congestion is encountered.

With Flow Control Enabled, the NP Interface monitors the QOS queue depths to identify the congestion, if any, of the QOS queue sizes. If the queue reaches 90% of the configurable QOS queue depth, then the interface sends Ethernet Pause Frames (IEEE 802.3) with pass time 0xFFFF to the LAN ports. Upon dropping all of the QOS depths to 50%, the interface again sends Pause frames with pass time 0x0000 to resume the traffic back.

Proxy ARP Enable Use the drop-down list to set Proxy ARP (Proxy Address Resolution Protocol) as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit] to save.

Proxy ARP is a technique by which an NP Interface in Router Mode on a given network answers the ARP queries for a network address that is not on this network, but is reachable via the NP Interface.

With Proxy ARP enabled, the NP Interface (in Router Mode) 'snoops' all ARP_REQs; it will send an ARP_REPLY (one if the ARP_REQ host address is an NP host address that is reachable via one of the routes in the Route Table).



E.7.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports

Use this page to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and to set each port to manual or auto-negotiate configuration. Only the NP Interface Ethernet ports are shown in this screen. The Base Modem Ethernet port statistics and port information are set from the modem’s front panel.

Figure E-22. LAN | Ethernet Ports Page

Ethernet Link Status This read-only section displays the status for each NP Interface Ethernet port.

Ethernet Speed/Duplex Use the drop-down lists to configure each port to one of the following states: Auto, 1000 Full, 100 Full, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 10 Half.

Click [Submit] once the Ethernet ports have been configured to suit on this page.



E.7.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table)

Figure E-23. LAN | ARP Page

ARP Table (Edit Static ARPs) The following table displays all current ARP entries (both Static and Dynamic). The current Static ARPs may be directly edited on this web page:

Column Description

Index (read-only) This is the internal table index

IP Enter the IP Address in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MAC Enter the MAC Address in the form YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY

Type (read-only) This displays the Entry Type as Static or Dynamic

Click [Submit Changes] to save the changes made in this section.

Add Static ARP Use this section to directly add a Static ARP entry. Click [Add Entry] to add the entry. Note that the index will automatically increment to the next available number.

Delete Static ARP Enter Entry Index to Delete – Type in the Index number. Click [Delete Entry] to execute removal of the entry.

Flush Dynamic ARPs Click [Flush ARP Table] to execute the command as needed.



E.7.5.5 WAN Pages

Select QoS, QoS Stats, or Loopback Test to continue.

This section depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Quality of Service (QoS) and Vipersat installed on the SLM-5650A. QoS and Vipersat are FAST Feature options which must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. See Section E.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.

Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have the QoS option installed, the QoS hyperlinks outlined in this section will not be visible/available to the user. When QoS is disabled, a separate QoS status page is shown.

E.7.5.5.1 WAN | QoS (Quality of Service)

Figure E-24. WAN | Quality of Service Page

Quality of Service Feature Select the Quality of Service operation as On or Off. Click [Submit].

Differential Services (DiffServ) The option is available here for configuring each queue to one of the following attributes (the minimum/maximum value range is shown in brackets):

• Service Rate (kbps) [ 0.000 / (Tx Data Rate)]

• Med. Drop Precedence (% full) [20 / 90]

• High Drop Precedence (% full) [10 / 80]

• Max Queue Depth (bytes) [1500 / 64000]

Click [Submit] after all values have been adjusted to enable settings.



E.7.5.5.2 WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics)

Figure E-25. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics Page

Clear / Refresh Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Stats Click [Clear] to clear queue statistics. Click [Refresh] to update queue statistics.

Differential Services (DiffServ) This read-only status table displays the following attributes:

Column Description

Priority Per-Hop Behavior (PHB) Traffic class that determines how packets will be forwarded.

Codepoint (DSCP) Codepoint value in Type of Service (ToS) byte in IP header.

Sent Packets Number of packets sent from queue associated with PHB class.

Dropped Packets Number of packets dropped in queue associated with PHB class. Queued Packets Number of packets in queue associated with PHB class.

Queued Bytes Number of bytes in queue associated with PHB class.

Queue Depth (% Full) Percentage (%) full for queue associated with PHB class

Bandwidth (kbps) Current data rate for queue associated with PHB class.



E.7.5.5.3 WAN | Loopback Test

Use this page to test the operational integrity of the NP Interface M&C, WAN Interface, and IF Interface.

Figure E-26. WAN | Loopback Test Page

Loopback Test Loopback Test Results – This message window displays the results of the completed Loopback Test.

Packet Loopback Test – When you click [Start Test], the NP Interface sends 50 multicast packets towards the WAN interface, and enables the IF Loopback. All packets returned from the IP Loopback will count by the NP Interface, and are displayed in the Packet Loopback Test Results window.



E.7.5.6 Routing

Select Routes, OSPF, or IGMP (when enabled) to continue.

E.7.5.6.1 Routing | Routes

Use this page to enter static routes into the NP Interface. This facilitates the routing of IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of Unicast and Multicast routes.

Figure E-27. Routing | Routes Page

Route Table (Display) This read-only table provides information on a per-route basis:

Column Description

Index This identifies the route entry [1 to 256].

Route Description This label helps users to maintain their network.

Destination IP/Mask This identifies the route to the destination network.

Interface There are two valid selections for routing to a destination network: Select toWAN when the route to the destination network is over the satellite link. The toWAN routes do not need a Next Hop IP Address. Select toLAN when the route to the destination network is attached to the LAN interface.

Next Hop IP When the route type is toLAN, the Next Hop IP Address defines the locally attached router’s IP Address, which you can use to route to the destination network. This is the case when there is another subnet addressed to the modem on the LAN side.



Add New Route

Make sure that you accurately create and add new route entries. Existing routes can’t be modified. If you make a mistake when adding a new route entry, you must delete the incorrect entry, and then recreate and re-add your new route.

Use this section to add a route entry to the route table. Enter the information, and click [Add Entry] to add the route. The route is immediately added to the route table for processing.

Delete Route Enter the route table entry, by Index number, which you wish to delete when that route either is no longer needed or is “Invalid”. Click [Delete Entry] to delete that route table entry.

A route entry “Route Description” field will change to “Invalid” if the NP Module Traffic IP Address is changed to an existing “Destination IP” Address in the route table.



E.7.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF

Use this page to define the operating parameters for Open Shortest Path First routing.

Figure E-28. Routing | OSPF Page

OSPF Parameters Enter the operating parameters for the OSPF Interface. Valid ranges are provided in parentheses.

OSPF – Select the OSPF operating interface as Disabled or Enabled.

Area Network Address – Enter the IP address for the area.

Area Subnet Mask (8-30) – Enter the subnet mask for the area.

OSPF Area (0 - 4294967295) – An area is a set of networks and hosts within an Autonomous System (AS) that have been administratively grouped together. The SLM-5650A NP Interface supports only one OSPF Area at a time. A group of (adjacent) routers which cooperate by exchanging their routing data base for the specified network range – i.e., an OSPF router – will only send its database to other routers that advertise that they are in the same area.

Cost (1 - 65535) – Enter the explicit cost of sending a packet via this interface.

Retransmit Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface.

Transmit Delay (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the parameters used to define the route to the destination network.

Priority (0 - 255) – Set the priority to help determine the OSPF. Note that 0, or not designated, is the default value.

Hello Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number seconds between the ‘Hello’ packets that are sent on an OSPF interface.

Dead Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number seconds that a device’s ‘Hello’ packets must not have been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router down.



Authentication Key – Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF routers on a network segment that is using OSPF’s simple password authentication.

Message Digest Key – Enable OSPG MD5 authentication.



E.7.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP

Use this page to facilitate use of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) with configured multicast routes.

Figure E-29. Routing | IGMP Page

IGMP, when enabled, responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side. If there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic (received from the satellite) to the LAN.

IGMP Parameters IGMP – Select IGMP as Disabled or Enabled.

Query Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 60. The default value is 1. This is the interval between general queries sent by the modem. By varying the query interval, a modem administrator may tune the number of IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger numbers cause the IGMP queries to be sent less often.

Response Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25. The default value is 10. This is the maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries. By varying the Response Interval, a modem administrator may tune the “burstiness” of IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger values make the traffic less “bursty” as host responses are spread out over a large interval.

The number of seconds assigned to the Response Interval must be less than the number of seconds assigned to the Query Interval.

Last Member Query Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25. The default value is 10. This is the maximum response time inserted into group-specific queries that are set in response to Leave Group messages, and is also amount of time between group-specific query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the "leave latency" of the network; a reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.



Robustness – Enter a value from 2 to 10. The default value is b. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP is robust to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses.

The Robustness Variable MUST NOT be 0, and SHOULD NOT be 1.

Version – Enter 1 for IGMPv1 or 2 for IGMPv2.

Click [Submit] to save the desired IGMP configuration changes on this page.



E.7.5.7 Stats (Statistics)

Select Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, WAN, or Clear All to continue.

E.7.5.7.1 Stats | Ethernet Tx

Figure E-30. Stats | Ethernet Tx Statistics Page

Clear/Refresh Ethernet Tx Stats Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Tx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Rx statistics). Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.

Tx Valid Frames Column Description

Port This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and, when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.

Unicast This is the number of valid Unicast frames transmitted.

Broadcast This is the number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.

Multicast This is the number of valid multicast frames transmitted. Pause This is the number of PAUSE frames transmitted.



Tx Collision Frames

The counters provided in this table are applicable in half-duplex only.

Column Description


Collision This is the number of Collision events seen by the GMAC, not including those controls in a single, Multiple, Excessive or Late.

Late Collision This is the number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bits-times into the transmission of the frame.

Single Collision This is the total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision.

Multiple Collision This is the total number of successfully transmitted frames that experienced more than one collision.

Maximum Collision This is the number of frames dropped in the transmit GMAC because the frame experienced 16 consecutive collisions.

Tx Discarded/Filtered Column Description


Discarded This is the total number of frames received with either FCS errors or Tx Maximum Collision frames.

Filtered Currently not implemented.



E.7.5.7.2 Stats | Ethernet Rx

Figure E-31. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics Page

Clear/Refresh Ethernet Rx Stats Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Rx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Tx statistics). Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.

Rx Valid Frames Column Description


Unicast This is the number of valid Unicast frames received.

Broadcast This is the number of valid broadcast frames received.

Multicast This is the number of valid multicast frames received.

Pause This is the number of PAUSE frames received.



Rx Error Frames Column Description


Invalid FCS This is the total frames received with CRC error. Alignment This is the total frames received with either Fragments Error or Jabber Error.

Undersized This is the total frames received with a length of less than 64 bytes but with a valid FCS.

Oversized This is the total frames received with a length of more than 1536 bytes but with a valid FCS.

Rx Discarded/Filtered Column Description


Discarded This is the total frames received with Undersized, Fragments, Oversized, Jabber, or invalid FCS errors.

Filtered Currently not implemented.



E.7.5.7.3 Stats | IP

Figure E-32. Stats | IP Statistics Page

Clear/Refresh IP Statistics Click [Clear] to delete all statistics. Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.

Router Statistics Item Description

Received Packets This is the total packets received by router.

Forwarded Packets This is the total packets forwarded by router.

Dropped Packets This is the total packets dropped by router.

End Station Packets This is the total packets directed to the NP Interface.



Router Errors Item Description

Bad Header Packets Counts the packets received with IP header length are less than 20 bytes OR IPV4 version is NOT 4. Applies in non-switch mode only.

Bad Total Length Packets This counter updates if the ingress packet total length (PACKET_SIZE) less than the Ethernet header size (if present, only from LAN and END station) and total length in IPV4 total length filed. Applies in non-switch mode only.

TTL Expired Packets This counter updates if the IPV4 packet received with TTL zero and need to be forwarded. Applies in non-switch mode only.

No Route Packets Counts the packets received with IPV4_DEST_ADDR has no match in Route Table. Applies in non-switch mode only.

Length Too Small Packets This counter updates if total length filed in IPV4 header is less than 20 bytes OR PACKET_SIZE is less than 20. Applies in non-switch mode only.

Bad Header Protocol Packets If incoming packet has Ethernet type was not IPV4, IPv6, ARP, PPP_SESSION, or PPP_DISCOVERY and non-switch mode. It accepts all the Ethernet types in switch mode.

Bad Header Checksum Packets

Counts the packets received with bad IPV4 header checksum. Applies in non-switch mode only.

Bad Header Destination Address Packets

This counter updates if the IPV4 destination address is either 255.255.255.255, or 0.X.X.X, or 127.X.X.X, or (224-255).X.X.X. Applies in non-switch mode only.

Internal Processing Error Packets

Non-Switch mode: This counter updates if the Ingress packet cannot traverse within the ME components due to resources scarcity. Switch mode: This counter updates if a) the ingresses packet destination MAC address is NP’s MAC but the IP address is NOT the NP’s IP, or b) if the ingress packet cannot traverse within the MEs components due to internal resources scarcity.

End Station Statistics Item Description

Received Packets This is the total packets destined to the NP Interface. Forwarded Packets This is the total packets forwarded by router.

Local Delivery Packets This is the number of packets delivered to management applications running on the NP Interface.

Created Fragment Packets This is the number of IP fragments created by the NP Interface because the packet being sent exceeds the maximum transmit unit (MTU).



End Station Errors Item Description

Invalid Header Packets This is the total End Station packets dropped due to incorrect length or IP Header Checksum.

Invalid Address Packets This is the number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of an invalid destination address.

No Route Packets This is the number of IP Packets dropped by the NP Interface because no “route destination” matched in the rout table.

Invalid Fragment Packets This is the number of IP packets dropped by the NP Interface because IP fragments could not be reassembled.

ICMP Statistics Where ICMP is Internet Control Message Protocol:

Item Description

Created ICMP Message Packets This is the total ICMP message packets.

Created ICMP Destination Unreachable Packets This is the total ICMP Destination Unreachable message packets.

Created ICMP Time Exceeded Packets This is the total ICMP Time Exceeded message packets.

Created ICMP Parameter Problem Packets This is the total ICMP Parameter Problem message packets.

Created ICMP Redirect Packets This is the total ICMP Redirect message packets

ICMP Errors ICMP Send Errors Packets – This is the number of ICMP packets dropped by the NP Interface because of an unknown ICMP error.



E.7.5.7.4 Stats | WAN

Figure E-33. Stats | WAN Statistics Page

Clear/Refresh WAN Statistics Click [Clear] to delete all statistics. Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.

WAN Tx Frames Column Description

Network Layer This is the total packets sent to data link layer.

Data Link Layer This is the total frames sent to satellite layer.

Satellite Layer This is the total frames sent over satellite.

WAN Tx Errors Column Description

Network Layer This counter increments if the packets cannot traverse from WAN_DLL_OUT component to ETH_TX-3 component to due to internal resource scarcity.

Data Link Layer This is the total data link layer Tx errors.

Satellite Layer This is the total satellite layer Tx errors.

WAN Rx Frames Column Description

Network Layer This is the total packets received from data link layer. Data Link Layer This is the total frames received from satellite layer.

Satellite Layer This is the total frames received over the satellite.



WAN Rx Errors Column Description

Network Layer This counter updates for every WAN ingress packets with size more than 1700 bytes.

Data Link Layer These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors

Satellite Layer These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors.

Detailed Satellite Rx Errors Column Description

WAN Rx Bad Address Errors HDLC Address of the received frame does not match one of the eight configured HDLC addresses.

WAN Rx Undersized Errors For a given CEFD WAN Control byte setting, received frame is too short to be valid.

WAN Rx HDLC Frame Errors Any one of the following HDLC error conditions: Abort, Octet Alignment, or Frame Length shorter than 32-bits.

WAN Rx Overrun Errors HDLC receive FIFO has overflowed.

WAN Rx Packet CRC Errors The Packet CRC checksum failed.

WAN Rx HDLC CRC Errors The received HDLC frame has failed the HDLC CRC checksum.



E.7.5.7.5 Stats | Clear All

Use this page to simultaneously clear the statistics for the Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, and WAN Stats pages.

Figure E-34. Stats | Clear All Statistics Page

Clear All Statistics (Ethernet / IP / WAN) Click [Clear All Statistics] to execute.



E.7.5.8 Vipersat Pages

Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional pages.

Figure E-35 shows the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages with Vipersat installed on the SLM-5650A. Vipersat is a FAST Option which must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. See Section E.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.

Note that if the SLM-5650A does not have the Vipersat FAST Option installed, the hyperlinks associated with the Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible or otherwise available to the user.

Figure E-35. Vipersat Pages



E.7.5.9 Redundancy Page

This page provides read-only status information on the configured redundant configuration.

Figure E-36. Redundancy Page

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of equipment failure.

If the Redundancy tab is selected without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, per Figure E-36 the 1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.



E.7.5.10 Save

To make any Network Processor modifications permanent, you must use this page to save Unit Configuration before rebooting the unit.

Figure E-37. Save Page

Use this page to save the current unit configurations to Flash memory. This makes all configuration changes made under the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface permanent until either a new round of setting updates is initiated and saved, or all settings are restored to the original factory defaults via the ‘Admin | Defaults’ page (see Section E.2.5.2.6 for full details).

Click [Save Now] to begin the save process. At the prompt (shown at right), click [OK] to complete the process, or Cancel to abort the command.



E.8 Network Processor (NP) Telnet/SSH CLI Interface Operation

This appendix section defines the CLI user menu system provided with the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional NP (Network Processor) Module Interface. Access to the CLI depends on the IP Interface Security Mode setting that has been selected for the NP Interface.

E.8.1 Important Operational Considerations


Before you proceed with using the NP Interface module for secure Ethernet remote product management, make sure the following is true:

• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its entirety, and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure applications.

• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files.

• The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.

• You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address and the NP Interface IP Address.

• The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface.

• The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the Telnet Remote Control features.

• For the Telnet/SSH CLI Interface Operations note that:

• The CLI is accessible via Telnet when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to “Low Level Security”. SSH (Secure Shell) will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.

• The CLI is accessible only via SSH when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to “High Level Security”. Telnet will not be available for CLI operations at this security level.

• See Section E.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’ (Account Information) in this appendix for detailed information about the IP Interface Security Mode features for the NP Interface, including overviews on using Telnet and SSH.



E.8.1.1 Telnet User Access

Telnet operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to “Low Level Security”. See Section E.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’ (Account Information) in this appendix for instructions on setting the security level to allow for Telnet (non-secure) operation of the CLI.

When connecting via Telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the NP Interface. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another modem.

E.8.1.1.1 Telnet Operational Guidelines

Telnet access is available on TCP Port 23. The default user name and password are both comtech.

The user name and password are required to gain access to system through the HTTP/HTTPS and CLI interfaces. For security reasons, the “Restore Factory Defaults” command (see Section E.3.2.2.5 in this appendix) does NOT reset the user name and password.

The Telnet CLI allows, at most, seven (7) concurrent logins to the Telnet menu via multiple Telnet sessions.

The CLI user name and password are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.

E.8.1.2 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access

SSH access and operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has been set to “High Level Security”. See Section E.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’ (Account Information) in this appendix for instructions on setting the security level to allow for SSH (secure) operation of the CLI.

At login, note that the CLI user name and password when starting an SSH CLI session are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.

See Section 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface for initial setup and operational examples for using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations.



E.8.1.3 Using the Command Line Interface

E.8.1.3.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality


The CLI, accessible via Telnet and SSH, allows you to change operating parameters in a manner similar to the functionality as provided for the monitoring, configuration, and control via the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s front panel menus (see Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION) and in the NP Module HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces (see Section E.3 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface in this appendix).

E.8.1.3.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features

Certain operational menu selections (e.g., Vipersat Configuration) are visible/selectable only when that FAST Option has been purchased and enabled for operation. The menu pages that follow show all available options as installed – the configuration in use may or may not provide the level of functionality depicted in this appendix.

With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this appendix feature the following common informational or navigational aids:

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description

[Text field example] [RO] Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the field as a read-only status/informational message. There is no user action required for this item.

Save Parameters to Flash S Allows user to save the current configuration of the NP Interface to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.

Logout of CLI Session L Allows user to log out of the CLI session.

Exit Menu X Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent menu. Alternately, the user may press the Esc key to perform the same action.

Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user is prompted to type in a functional selection, an alphanumeric configuration string, or an operational value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the active page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to the right:



If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist the user in the re-entry of information, as shown in this example:

Save Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the CLI session. Although changes are retained after a CLI session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A remains running), take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted or the NP Interface is reset or loses power. Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. You are prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:

Logout When you attempt to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”, the CLI prompts you to confirm that you wish to end your session:



E.8.2 Command Line Interface Pages

E.8.2.1 Main Menu

The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made on this page take the user to submenus listed in this table (operation features nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are described in the appendix sections listed):

Submenu Entry Function/Description Section

Administration A The Administration Menu provides a basic set of standard admin functions to the NP Interface. Sect. E.4.2.2

Satellite Modem Configuration M

The Satellite Modem Configuration option displays nested menus that allow the user to configure and monitor the satellite Base Modem.

Sect. E.4.2.3

LAN N The LAN menu allows the user to change the IP address and view the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table.

Sect. E.4.2.4

WAN W The WAN menu allows the user to configure QoS (Quality of Service) and DiffServ (Differentiated Services).

Sect. E.4.2.5

Route Table R The Route Table menu allows the user to configure the Unicast/Multicast routing tables. Sect. E.4.2.6

OSPF F The OSPF Menu allows the user to configure Open Shortest Path First routing parameters. Sect. E.4.2.7

IGMP I The IGMP Menu allows the user to configure Internet Group Management Protocol parameters Sect. E.4.2.8

Vipersat Configuration V

The FAST-Feature-enabled Vipersat Configuration menu allows the user to configure Vipersat functionality. This menu selection is visible/available only after the Vipersat option has been purchased.

Sect. E.4.2.9

Redundancy Configuration E The Redundancy Configuration Menu allows the user to

view the 1:1 IP redundancy status. Sect. E.4.2.10




Operations and Maintenance O

The Operations & Maintenance menu allows the user to configure various options used to control and maintain the system. This menu also provides diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and statistics.

Sect. E.4.2.11



E.8.2.2 Administration Menu (A)


The Administration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


Information I Displays information for NP and Modem Bootrom running status, load images, and current configuration status.

System Working Mode

W Prompts you to select: Vipersat modes: 0 – Vipersat Hub 1 – Vipersat Hub Expansion 2 – Vipersat Remote 3 – Vipersat Remote Expansion Non-Vipersat modes: 4 – Multipoint Hub Router 5 – Multipoint Remote Router 6 – Vipersat Remote Expansion Bridge Mode: 7 – Gigabit Ethernet Bridge

BPM Mode B Prompts you to select BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode of operation: 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled




FAST Feature Code F Displays currently installed FAST options.

Security A Allows you to set admin user name and password, and set IP Interface Security Mode.

SNMP P Displays SNMP configuration parameters.

Restore Factory Defaults D

Allows you to restore NP card to factory default configuration settings.

This Reset selection only resets the NP Card. The Base Modem and TRANSEC (if installed) are not reset using this Reset selection.

Set Time T Allows you to configure automatic time synchronization through Network Time Protocol (NTP).

Event Log E Displays summary of faults and events.

Boot Network Processor From [#] N

Prompts you to enter NP boot image: 1 – Image 1 2 – Image 2 3 – Newest

Boot Base Modem From [#] M

Prompts you to enter modem boot image: 1 – Image 1 2 – Image 2

Reboot Now R Prompts you to enter Y to reboot, N to exit command without rebooting.



E.8.2.2.1 Administration Menu | Information (I)

The read-only SLM 5650 Network Processor – System Images page, opened from the Administration Menu, displays the information for NP and Modem bulk images, and current NP running bulk image:

Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.



E.8.2.2.2 Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code (F)

The read-only FAST Features page, opened from the Administration Menu, displays the status (i.e., Installed or Not Installed) of all available FAST options:

Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.



E.8.2.2.3 Administration Menu | Security (A)

The HighLevel Security setting will disable the Telnet menu interface. Do not enable High Level Security if using Telnet or connectivity will be lost! When the High Level Security setting is selected, SSH can be used to interface with the CLI menu system.

The Security Menu page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the following options or fields:


Admin User Name A Allows you to set the Admin User Name (excluding < > ” ~, a minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).

Admin Password P Allows you to set the Admin Password (excluding < > ” ~, a minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).

IP Interface Security Mode M

Prompts you to select the IP Interface Security Level:

Press For User Accessibility

0 Low Level Security HTTP and Telnet allowed

1 High Level Security Only HTTPS/SSH allowed

SSH Host Key Signature [RO]

This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. You can then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the host key the NP displays to verify that they are the same

Generate New Host Key G

Generates a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP. NOTE: After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.



E.8.2.2.4 Administration Menu | SNMP (P)

The SNMP page, opened from the Administration Menu, allows the user to change the parameters associated with Simple Network Management Protocol, an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices.

The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, v2c and, when the IP Interface Security Level has been set to High, SNMPv3. The page contains the following options or fields:


Read Community [RO]

For complete details on SNMP and using this menu, see Chapter 8.2 SNMP Interface.

Write Community [RO]

Trap Community T

Trap I

System Contact C

System Location N

Once all changes have been made using this menu, in order for the configuration to take effect, the user must press ‘S’ to save these SNMP configuration changes, then reboot the modem using the Reboot Now prompt (press ‘R’ using the Administration Menu) as outlined in this appendix in Section E.3.2.2.8.

E.8.2.2.5 Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults (D)

Select ‘D’ from the Administration Menu to restore all previously-configured modem parameters to their Factory Default Configuration settings. You are prompted:

Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)

Press ‘Y’ to begin the restoration process, or ‘N’ to abort the command and return to the previous menu.

Using ‘Restore Factory Defaults’ does not change the user name and password settings.



E.8.2.2.6 Administration Menu | Set Time (T)

The Time Control (Set Time) page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the following options or fields:


Time Zone Z

See Section E.2.5.2.7 ‘Admin | Time’ (Date and Time) for full details on this page’s functionality.

Automatic Synchronize T

Primary Internet Time Server P

Secondary Internet Time Server Q

Current Date [RO]

Current Time [RO]

Internet Time Status [RO]

Update Date & Time D



E.8.2.2.7 Administration Menu | Event Log (E)

Once the System Event Log page is opened from the Administration Menu, the system is polled for summary events and faults, the following message appears:

Please wait for the event log to appear

This may take up to a minute

When ready, the page displays a scrollable list as per the following example:

From here, the page contains the following options or fields:


Previous Page P

Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Event Log.

Next Page N

Top T

Bottom B

Logging On/Off O See Section E.2.5.2.8 ‘Admin | Event Log’ for full details on this page’s functionality. Logging Level L

Clear Event Log C



E.8.2.2.8 Administration Menu | Reboot Now Prompt (R)

Before rebooting, the user must remember to SAVE PARAMETERS TO FLASH (Select ‘S’ from the Administration Menu); otherwise, all changes made prior to reboot will be lost.

Select ‘R’ from the Administration Menu to reboot the system. You are prompted: Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)

Press ‘Y’ to begin the reboot process, or ‘N’ to abort the command and return to the previous menu.

Pressing ‘Y’ causes the entire modem to reboot; this includes the Base Modem, NP Interface, and the TRANSEC Module.



E.8.2.3 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) (M)

The Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options/fields:


Modem Type [RO] Displays modem type

Interface [RO] Displays installed interface

Reference [RO] Displays active reference (internal / external)

Frequency Band B Prompts you to select: 0 – 70/140 MHz 1 – L-Band

Modulator Settings M Allows you to configure modulator operating parameters

Demodulator Settings D Allows you to configure demodulator operating parameters

Receive Monitor R Read-only – displays active Rx operating parameters

Events E Displays the Modem Event Log and allows you to set or adjust display parameters for logging

Stats T Displays the System Event Log and allows you to set or adjust display parameters for logging

Utility U

Allows you to select/set: T – Time (in HH:MM:SS format) D – Date (in DD/MM/YY format), or C – Circuit ID (exactly 24 characters).



E.8.2.3.1 Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu (M)

The Modulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:


FEC Type T

Prompts the user to select: 0 – None 1 – Viterbi 2 – Turbo 3 – Sequential

Modulation M

Prompts the user to select: 0 – BPSK 1 – QPSK 2 – OQPSK 3 – 8-PSK 4 – 16-QAM

FEC Code Rate C

Prompts the user to select: 0 – 1/1 1 – 1/2 2 – 3/4 3 – 7/8 4 – 2/3 5 – 5/6 6 – 21/44 7 – 5/16 8 – 17/18

Data Rate D Allows user to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.

Frequency F Allows user to edit Frequency using arrow keys.

Spectrum I Prompts user to select: 0 – Normal 1 – Inverted




Scrambler R

Prompts the user to select: 0 – Off 1 – OM73 2 – V.35 3 – Modified V.35 4 – SYNC 5 – IBS 6 – TURBO

Power Level P Allows user to edit Power Level using arrow keys.

Carrier A

Prompts the user to select 0 – OFF 1 – ON 2 – RTS 3 – VSAT



E.8.2.3.2 Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu (D)

The Demodulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:


FEC Type T

Prompts the you to select: 0 – None 1 – Viterbi 2 – Turbo 3 – Sequential

Demodulation M

Prompts the you to select: 0 – BPSK 1 – QPSK 2 – OQPSK 3 – 8-PSK 4 – 16-QAM

FEC Code Rate C

Prompts the you to select: 0 – 1/1 1 – 1/2 2 – 3/4 3 – 7/8 4 – 2/3 5 – 5/6 6 – 21/44 7 – 5/16 8 – 17/18

Data Rate D Allows you to edit Data Rate using arrow keys.

Frequency F Allows you to edit Frequency using arrow keys.

Spectrum I Prompts you to select: 0 – Normal 1 – Inverted




Descrambler R

Prompts the you to select: 0 – Off 1 – OM73 2 – V.35 3 – Modified V.35 4 – SYNC 5 – IBS 6 – TURBO



E.8.2.3.3 Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor (R)

The read-only Receive Parameters (i.e., Receive Monitor) page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays the Rx parameters:

Press ‘X’ to return to the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page.



E.8.2.3.4 Satellite Modem Configuration | Events (E)

The Modem Event Log page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays a scrollable list as per the following example:

When ready, the page contains the following options or fields:


Previous Page P

Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Event Log.

Next Page N

Top T

Bottom B

Clear Event Log C See SectionE.2.5.3.3 Modem | Events for full details on this page’s functionality.



E.8.2.3.5 Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats (T)

Once the Modem Statistics (Stats) page is opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, as the system is polled for summary events and faults, the following message appears:

Please wait for the event log to be read

This may take up to a minute

When ready, the page displays a scrollable list of as per the following example:

The page contains the following options or fields:


Previous Page P Allows you to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Stats Log. Next Page N

Add Entry A

See Section E.2.5.3.4 Modem | Stats for full details on this page’s functionality.

Modify Entry M

Delete Entry D

Logging Level L

Clear Event Log C



E.8.2.3.6 Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility (U)

The Modem Utility Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:


Time T Allows you to set the time in HH:MM:SS format.

Date D Allows you to set the date in International format (DD/MM/YY).

Circuit ID C

Allows you to define a name for the Circuit ID.

This ID must consist of exactly 24 characters in UPPER CASE ONLY. No spaces are permitted in this ID; use a dash [-] instead.



E.8.2.4 LAN Menu (N)

The LAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


Interface I The LAN Interface menu allows you to view the MAC address of the Network Processor and set the IP address and mask of the Network Processor:

Ethernet Ports E The Ethernet Ports menu allows you to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and set each port to auto-negotiate or for manual configuration.

ARP Menu A The ARP Menu allows you to view and edit the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table.

Flow Control F Prompts you to select 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Proxy ARP P Prompts you to select 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Port VLAN Enable M Prompts you to select 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Port VLAN Select N

Prompts you to select 0 – Port 1 1 – Port 2 2 – Port 3 3 – Port 4

Port VLAN Id O Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified VLAN only will ingress and egress from the NP Interface port specified via "VLAN Port Select" (Entry “N”).



E.8.2.4.1 LAN Menu | Interface (I)

The Interface page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:


MAC Address [RO] The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that cannot be modified by the you.

IP Addressing Mode A Prompts you to select: 0 – Single (Traffic IP Address only) 1 – Dual (Traffic and Management IP Addresses)

Traffic IP Address T Allows you to edit the Traffic IP Address using the arrow keys.

Management IP Address M Allows you to edit the Management IP Address using the arrow keys.

Submit Changes C Saves any changes made to the Traffic and Management IP Addresses.



E.8.2.4.2 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu (E)

The Ethernet Ports Menu page, opened from the LAN Menu page, provides read-only NP Interface Ports 1 through 4 Link Status information, and allows the user to manually change the Ethernet Port Speed/Duplex Configurations for each port by pressing ‘1’ through ‘4’ as needed.

E.8.2.4.2.1 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu | Ports 1-4 Speed/ Duplex Configuration

When you press ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’ or ‘4’ on the Ethernet Ports Menu page, you are then prompted to configure NP Interface Ports 1 through 4, on a per-port basis, with one of the following selections:

0 – Auto

1 – 10 Mbps Half Duplex

2 – 10 Mbps Full Duplex

3 – 100 Mbps Half Duplex



See Section E.2.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports for an overview of this functionality.



E.8.2.4.3 LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A)

The ARP Table page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following options or fields:


Add entry A See Section E.2.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) for an overview of command functionality. Modify Entry M

Delete Entry D

Previous Page P Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the ARP Table. Next Page N



E.8.2.5 WAN Menu (W)

The WAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


QoS Feature Q Prompts you to select: 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Global Config & Statistics G

See Section E.2.5.5 WAN Pages for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.

Global Con Display A

Global Statistics B

Class Selector 6 C

Expedited Forwarding E

Assured Forwarding Class 1 1




Default D Provides you with read-only display of the DiffServ default queue.

Clear (reset) Statistics R Allows you to reset all DiffServ statistics.



E.8.2.6 Routing Table (R)

With the Routing Table page (opened from the Main Menu), static routes can be entered into the IP Module to route IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of Unicast and Multicast routes. The Routing Table page contains the following options or fields:


Add entry A See Section E.2.5.6.1 Routing | Routes for an overview of command functionality. Modify Entry M

Delete Entry D

Previous Page P Allows you to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and end of the Routing Table. Next Page N



E.8.2.7 OSPF Configuration (F)

The OSPF Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


OSPF E

Enables or Disables the Open Shortest Path First operation. Typing ‘E’ prompts user to select: 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Area Network Address N

See Section E.2.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.

Area Subnet Mask M

OSPF Area A

Cost C

Retransmit Interval R

Transmit Delay T

Priority P

Hello Interval H

Dead Interval D

Authentication Key K

Message Digest Key J

Submit Changes Z Saves any changes made on this page to the OSPF operating parameters.



E.8.2.8 IGMP Configuration (I)

The IGMP Menu page, activated from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


IGMP E

Enables or Disables the Internet Group Management Protocol operation. Typing ‘E’ prompts user to select: 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Query Interval Q

See SectionE.2.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP for an overview of command functionality and/or information presented for these functions.

Response Interval R

Last Member Query Interval M

Robustness O

IGMP Version V

Submit Changes Z Saves any changes made on this page to the IGMP operating parameters.



E.8.2.9 Vipersat Configuration (V)

Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these optional menu pages.

Vipersat is a FAST Option that must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. See Section E.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information about FAST options.

If the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the functionality associated with this FAST Option will not be visible/available to the CLI user.

The appearance of this page changes depending on the selected Vipersat Mode of operation (see Section E.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option). The example shown here depicts the menu when the Vipersat Remote mode is selected.



E.8.2.10 Redundancy Configuration (E)

The 1:1 Redundancy Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, provides the user with read-only status information on the redundant operations configuration.

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet traffic in the case of equipment failure. Refer to the pertinent redundancy switch Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information on the use of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in redundant operations.

If the user selects the Redundancy tab without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, the 1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.



E.8.2.11 Operations & Maintenance (O)

The Operations & Maintenance page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following options or fields:


Statistics T Provides you with read-only access to Ethernet Tx/Rx, LAN, WAN operating statistics; allows you to clear existing statistics.

Ping/TraceRoute Target IP I Allows you to edit target IP address for ping and trace route using the

arrow keys.

Ping Above Address P Allows you to ping on IP Address.

Max Trace Route Hops M Allows you to set the maximum number of trace route hops using the arrow keys.

Trace Route Above Address R Allows you to trace route on IP address.

Base Management Port B Allows you to edit the Vipersat base management UDP/TCP port using the arrow keys.

WAN to WAN Internal Mcast Addr W Allows you to edit the WAN-WAN Internal Multicast Address using the

arrow keys.

Debug Menu D Password-restricted for factory use only.

Ping and Trace Route are only available through the CLI Operations & Maintenance page. For ping and trace route to work, the you must enter a target IP address. You can then choose to issue a Ping or Trace Route to the Target IP Address. When doing a Trace Route, the maximum trace route hops can also be specified.



E.8.2.11.1 Operations & Maintenance | Statistics (T)

The Statistics page, opened from the Operations & Maintenance page, provides read-only statistics pages for varied operating parameters and commands used to clear those statistics.


Ethernet TX T

See Section E.2.5.7 Stats (Statistics) pages for an overview of the information provided on these read-only pages.

Ethernet RX R

IP I

WAN W

Clear Ethernet Statistics (Tx & Rx) 1

Allows you to clear all statistics. Clear IP Statistics 2

Clear WAN Statistics 3



BLANK PAGE


Appendix F F–1 MN-SLM-5650A


F.1 Overview

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is equipped with the optional FIPs 140 Level 2 certified TRANSEC Moduleinterface. The TRANSEC Module operates in standalone mode with the SLM-5650A Base Modem, or in tandem with the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module.

The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable in all specified modes of operation with KIV-19 Provisional and KG-95-1 Provisional Transmission Security (TRANSEC) equipment currently used by the Government.

EIA-422 data rates higher than 20 Mbps (for complete interoperability with the KG-95-1) are provisional.

For either configuration, the TRANSEC Module provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables secure user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters through this indirect proxy connection.

When the TRANSEC Module is installed, Management Security is mandatory and therefore security is always enabled: Network management M&C limitations that are enacted when High Level Security is in effect therefore always apply.



F.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface

F.2.1 HTTPS Interface Introduction

You can fully control and monitor operation of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module from its HTTPS (Secure HTTP) Interface.

The pages in the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface have been designed for optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Ver. 7.0 or higher or Mozilla Firefox Ver. 2.0 or higher. With TRANSEC Module firmware version 2.2.4 or later, only web browsers with TLS 1.2 or higher is supported.

The examples shown in this appendix use Internet Explorer Version 7.0.

F.2.1.1 Secure Management – TRANSEC Module PLUS NP Interface


When the optional NP Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the optional TRANSEC Module and with Management Security enabled, the network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply.

The TRANSEC Module provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:

Base Modem Network Processor Interface TRANSEC Module

HTTPS Proxy via TRANSEC Module

HTTP HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC Module) SSH

HTTPS SSH



F.2.2 User Login

From the PC, type https://www.xxx.yyy.zzz (where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” represents the IP Address of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:

You are then prompted with a Security Alert:

Figure F-1. Security Alert Page

Click [Continue to this website] to proceed.



From the login page in the TRANSEC Module HTTPS interface, use the Interface Navigator to select one of three modes of operation.

Figure F-2. TRANSEC Login Page

• Crypto Officer: Connects to the secure TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (User Name and Password required).

• Modem Operator: Connects to the Base Modem HTTP Interface. See Chapter 7. Web Browser for more information.

• Network Operator: Not Available.

Once the login page opens, Crypto Officer appears as the default.

On the Login page, type in a valid Crypto Officer User Name and Crypto Officer Password. The default for both is comtech. Click Log In.

The TRANSEC Module User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).

Once the User Name and Password are accepted, the TRANSEC Module Configure page opens.



F.2.2.1 Interface Instructions for Older Browsers

While legacy IE browser versions (e.g., Internet Explorer 6.0), can be used, Comtech EF Data Technical Support does not support services for these older browsers. If you have problems connecting to the secure web interface using an older browser, try this troubleshooting tip:

1. From the browser tool bar, go to the Tools | Internet Options | Advanced tab. SeeFigure F-3

2. Under the Security heading, use the check boxes to:a. Disable the Secure Sockets Layers (SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0).b. Enable the Transport Layer Security (TSL1.0 with TRANSEC firmware version

earlier than 2.2.4 or TSL1.2 with TRANSEC firmware version 2.2.4 or later).3. Make sure to enable SSL again, once troubleshooting is finished.

Figure F-3. Tools | Internet Options | Advanced | Security Settings

Operation of the TRANSEC Module may be fully monitored and controlled from the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page, you can select from the available nested hyperlinks.

F.2.3 HTTPS Interface – Operational Features


See Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION, Section 9.2 for an overview of the navigational and operational features common with using this interface.



F.2.4 HTTPS Menu Tree

The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface:

Interface Navigator

Drop-down Menu

Page Navigation Tabs

Configure Monitor Log Firmware Upload

Crypto Officer

Modem Operator

Network Operator

The Interface Navigator Drop-down Menu and its selections (shown in green) allow secure access to one of the SLM-5650A's three, distinct Web interfaces.

Once Crypto Officer (i.e., the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface) is selected, the four, available navigation tabs (above, shown in blue) are available.




F.3 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions

F.3.1 Configure Pages

The Configure page provides configuration and management functions.

Figure F-4. Configure Page



Active Key

Item Description

Key Signature (read-only)

This is a signature, or fingerprint, of the Transmission Encryption Keys (TEKs) generated by the Seed Key and Passphrase. The user can compare signatures on different modems to ensure that each has the same Seed Key and Passphrase.

NOTE: The TEKs are updated only when a Passphrase is submitted.

Current TEK (read-only)

The user may generate 26 TEKs from the Seed Key and Passphrase (described below). The active TEK (1 through 26) is displayed here. When it is desired to change the encryption key being used to encrypt traffic, click Next TEK to select the next key in the set of 26 TEKs. Note the following:

• The Next TEK button is disabled when the module is in secondary mode, and the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected primary modem uses.

• The TEK only increments and never decrements; the user cannot re-use a previous key. The only way to reset the TEK to 1 is by clicking Activate Future Key (described below).

Seed Key (write-only)

Enter a 32-character Seed Key in this text box to generate TEKs when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).

Confirm Seed Key (write-only)

Re-enter the newly created Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.

Once the Seed Key is entered and confirmed, click Update Seed Key to finalize this change.

Enter Passphrase (write-only)

Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs. Once the Passphrase is entered, click Update Passphrase to finalize this change.



Future Key

Item Description

Future Key Signature The user can program a second seed key and passphrase to generate a second set of TEKs. These keys will lie dormant until the user activates them by clicking Activate Future Key. At that time, the following happens:

1. The active TEKs are replaced by the ones generated with the Future Seed Key and Future Passphrase.

2. The Current TEK gets reset to 1. 3. Secondary modems connected to this one will also activate their Future Keys.

NOTE: The [Activate Future Key] button is active only when the following conditions are met:

1. The modem is in Primary mode (see Encryption Mode, explained below). 2. The Current TEK is greater than 1.

Future Seed Key (write-only)

Enter a 32-character Future Seed Key in this text box to generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Future Passphrase (described below).

Confirm Future Seed Key (write-only)

Re-enter the newly created Future Seed Key in this text box to ensure its accuracy.

Once the Future Seed Key is entered and confirmed, click Update Seed Key to finalize this change.

Future Passphrase (write-only)

Accepts a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs.

Once the Passphrase is entered, click Update Passphrase to finalize this change.



Encryption Parameters

Item Description

Operating Mode Set encryption in the TRANSEC Module as Primary or Secondary.

Note the following:

• If Primary is selected, the TRANSEC Module will allow the user to advance the TEK and activate the future key independently of any other modems.

• If Secondary is selected, the TRANSEC Module's TEK automatically mirrors the TEK of the primary modem and the module will activate the future key when the primary modem activates its future key.

Click Update Mode when done.

Encryption Click Change Encryption State to display the On and Off radio buttons. The “layered” appearance of this control is intended to prevent the user from accidentally toggling the Encryption State.

By selecting the Encryption State as ‘On’, this causes the data traffic to be encrypted by the TRANSEC Module using the current TEK. This encrypted data is then delivered to the base modem for transmission, regardless of the state of the receiving modem.

Three user-defined parameters must match in order for encrypted communication to commence between two TRANSEC Module-equipped modems:

1. Seed Key. 2. Passphrase. 3. Encryption Frame Length.

Select the desired operational state, then click Update Encryption to save the selected state and then return this selection to its “protected” mode; the On/Off radio buttons will be hidden once again and the operational state message will update accordingly (i.e., “Encryption is On” or “Encryption is Off”).

Encryption Frame Length

Use this text box to specify the length of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 256 encryption frame. Acceptable range is from 1 (fast acquisition, high overhead) to 255 (slower acquisition, low overhead).

Once the desired Encryption Frame Length has been entered, click Update Frame Length to implement this change.

Reset all keys Click Zeroize to reset all encryption keys in the module’s memory and flash to default values.



Network Parameters

Item Description

Secure Management IP

Allows users to change the IP address of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment. NOTE: If this text box changes, it will be necessary to repeat the process in Section F.4 using the newly-designated IP address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Web Interface.

Subnet Bits Allows users to modify the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment.

Gateway IP

Allows users to modify the default gateway of the TRANSEC Module to suit their own operational environment.

NOTE: The IP address entered in the text box must match the subnet of the Secure Management IP. If it does not then the Gateway IP text box will default to 0.0.0.0.

Click Update Settings to apply changes made to any of these parameters.

Crypto Officer Credentials This section is used to create a TRANSEC Module Crypto Officer Username and Crypto Officer Password. Note that are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).

The default for both the Crypto Officer Username and Password is transec.

Item Description

Crypto Officer Username

Use this text box to create the desired username.

Password Use this text box to create the desired password for the username being created.

Confirm Password Use this text box to re-enter the previously entered password.

Once the Username is entered and the Password is confirmed, click Update Credentials to finalize this update.

Key Generation This section is only available for TRANSEC firmware version 2.2.4 or later. Prior firmware versions will only operate in the Legacy mode.

Item Description

Key Generation Mode Allows the user to select the Legacy mode, which is compatible with firmware versions prior to 2.2.4, or the FIPS approved mode.



SSH (Secure Shell) Console

Item Description

Host Key Signature This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for the first time. The user can then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the host key the TRANSEC Module displays to verify that they are the same.

Click Generate New Host Key to generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the TRANSEC Module. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the TRANSEC Module before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they connect again.

SSH Console Click On or Off to set administrative access to the console, then click Update SS to implement this setting.

HTTPS

Item Description

Certificate Signature Displays the digital fingerprint of the installed SSL certificate, which helps identify the certificate.

CA File Signature Displays the digital fingerprint of the installed CA File, which helps identify the file.

Reset certificate Resets the SSL certificate to the factory default.



F.3.2 Monitor Page

Figure F-5. Monitor Page

Encryption Parameters

Item Description AES256 Firmware Version Identifies the version of the AES 256 core.

Encryption Frame Length Displays the currently configured AES 256 frame length.

Board Temp Displays the temperature of the TRANSEC Module. TRANSEC Clock Status Displays the DCM locked status for the AES 256 core.

Transmit Status

Item Description TX Frame Count Displays the number of transmitted AES 256 frames. TX Status Describes the value of the Tx Status register. DCM Lock Displays the state of the Tx DCM lock. Bypass Traffic Displays the encryption status (Bypass on means Encryption off).

Crypto Traffic When Detected, the module has sampled outgoing traffic and verifies it has been encrypted. When Not Detected, encryption is off, or the module cannot verify encrypted traffic.



Receive Status

Item Description RX CRC Errors Displays the count of received CRC errors. RX Frame Count Displays the number of received AES 256 frames. RX Status Displays the value of the Rx Status register. DCM Lock Displays the state of the Rx DCM lock.

Unique Word Lock Indicates that the decryption engine has successfully found the unique word and has been able to lock to it.

Out of Sync Indicates that an out-of-sync condition has been detected by the encryption engine.

Automatic Refresh Status Timer The page updates itself automatically for the duration of the countdown timer. When the timer reaches 0:00, the page will stop updating to help conserve system resources.

To manually override the timer, click Stop to interrupt or Reset to restart the timer.



F.3.3 Log

Figure F-6. Log Page

Event Log Control

Item Description Logging State On/Off Enables/disables logging of event messages.

Logging Level This drop-down menu controls the maximum filtering level of displayed messages. Choices are Errors Only, Errors and Warnings, and All Information. Click Save to save the settings.

Event Log

Inde

Column Description Index The event messages are numbered in the order they are received. Type Describes the severity of the event. Date Displays the date that the event was logged in using MONTH/DAY/YEAR format. Time Displays the time of day that the event was logged in 24-hour format. Description Displays a brief description of the logged event.



Table F-1. Event Log Message Types

Event Type (By order of severity – from least to worst case)

Event Type Event Description Level of Severity / User Action

Informational Normal operational status change; e.g., successful password or configuration setting change.

Minimum. Event logged is for user reference only.

Warning

Status change that the system might not accept or expect; e.g., setting the future passphrase without first setting the future seed key, entering an invalid remote command, etc.

Moderate. User should consult the pertinent sections of this manual to troubleshoot, and then repeat command or procedure as needed.

Minor

Error condition that the system should be able to recover from without affecting the operation of the system; e.g., encountering software ‘bug’, etc. Such events are not recorded into the Events Log.

Moderate. User should report issues when convenient to Comtech EF Data Customer Support.

Major A more severe error that may indicate a degradation of the stability of the system; e.g., out-of-range temperature readings for the TRANSEC Module, etc.

Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support as soon as possible to address issue.

Critical The most severe error level indicating that system failure has occurred or is imminent; e.g., memory allocation failure, OS failure, etc.

Maximum. User should contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support immediately to arrange for RMA / in-factory service.

Click Clear Log to clear the event log of all messages. The event log is reset to zero entries.

Figure F-7. Event Log Page Cleared



F.3.4 Firmware


See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for instructions regarding the use of the ‘Admin | Update’ page, and for detailed information on the procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update process.

Figure F-8. Firmware Information Page

Firmware Information

Item Description Security Module Bootrom Info Boot Loader version information.

Image 1 Info Slot 1 firmware image version information. Image 2 Info Slot 2 firmware image version information. Running Image Indicates the active firmware image.

Upload New Firmware

Item Description Upload New Firmware Click to navigate to the Upload page.



Active Boot Slot Configuration

Item Description Boot From Select the firmware image to load on the next boot. Click [Submit] to save the selection. [Reboot] Reboot the modem.



F.3.5 Upload

Figure F-9. Upload Page

Firmware Use this area to select a file, and then upload updated firmware.

See Section F.4 for detailed information on the procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update process.

HTTPS Certificate Use this area to upload an X509 private key and certificate in PEM format to replace the current HTTPS certificate.

HTTPS access will be lost if a bad certificate is installed. If this happens, restore the HTTPS access by resetting the SSL certificate through the SSH interface.

Splash Page Use this area to upload a text file (up to 1MB in size) to replace the current splash page.



F.4 TRANSEC Module Update Procedure

Firmware updates for the TRANSEC Module (also referred to in front panel menu screens as the “Option Card”) are not available from the Comtech EF Data Web site, but they may be obtained from Comtech EF Data on an as-needed basis. To obtain these updates, contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support to request access to the modem firmware update files online FTP site. The CEFD Customer Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.

Step Task

1 Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support during normal business hours to request delivery of the DMD1050TS’s TRANSEC Module firmware update files. The Customer Support representative will arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at that time.

Note: To aid identification, use the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface > Firmware Info to see the Bootrom, Bulk1, and Bulk2 firmware loads information.

2 Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC (note that the drive letter c: is used in this example; any valid writable drive letter can be used):

• For Windows Explorer: Select File > New > Folder to create a new folder, and then rename it from “New Folder” to "temp" or another convenient, unused name. Assuming "temp" works, a "c:\temp" folder should now be created.

• For Windows Command-line: Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and then click the “Run...” icon (or, depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95, click the “MS-DOS Prompt” icon from the Main Menu). Then, to open a Command-line window…

o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – Type “command”.

o For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – Type “cmd” or “command”.

Alternately, from Start, select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. At the Command-line prompt (c:\>), type “mkdir temp” or “md temp” (without quotes – mkdir and md stand for make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder from Windows Explorer. There should now be a "c:\temp" subdirectory created.

3 Download the correct firmware file that was obtained from Comtech EF Data Customer Support to this temporary folder. The SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module firmware is FW-0020567x, where "x" denotes the firmware revision letter.

4 Extract the file in the temporary folder on the PC:

Fw-0020567x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the module bulk image file.

5 Confirm that the files have been extracted to the specified temporary folder on the PC.

Using Command-line, type “cd c:\temp” to change to the temporary directory created in Step 2, then use the “dir” command to list the files extracted from the downloaded archive file.

6 Connect the PC to the modem’s Ethernet via a hub or a switch, or directly to the PC with a crossover cable.



Step Task

7 Send a “ping” command to the TRANSEC Module to verify the connection and communication.

First, determine the IP address of the TRANSEC Module from the front panel:

SELECT: Configure Transec Module IP Address menus.

Then, using Command-line to “ping” the modem – at the prompt, type “ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ is the TRANSEC Module’s IP address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is connected and communicating.

8 Initiate a secure Web session with the DMD1050TS TRANSEC Module via its HTTPS Interface. The example uses Internet Explorer Version 7.0. From the PC, type https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the IP address of the TRANSEC Module) into the Address area of the Web browser:

To log in to the secure interface, select Crypto Officer from the navigation list that is provided in the upper left-hand corner of each page, then click [Go!]. When prompted, enter the User Name and Password at the Login page:

• Factory Default User Name is comtech

• Factory Default Password is comtech



Step Task

9 Update the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware: a) Open the Upload page:

b) In the Firmware section of the page, locate the update file downloaded to the PC during Steps 2

through 4:

• Click Browse. The Choose File dialog box will open.

• Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click on the folder name to open the folder.

c) Select the update file, and then click Open. The filename should appear in the Replace stand-by firmware text box.

d) Click Upload to begin the Firmware Application Process.



Step Task

10 Wait while the file transfers. After Upload is clicked, the Image Upgrade Process page appears while the TRANSEC Module transfers, and then uploads the update file from the PC.

Allow sufficient time for the file to be uploaded – approximately five minutes is required for the process to be completed. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer, the message Please Wait will display.

Any power failure during this process will result in failure of the TRANSEC Module.

In the event that an error occurs during the Image Upgrade Process, then a message stating that an error occurred will appear.

For troubleshooting purposes, three common reasons for disruption of the Firmware Application Process are:

• Power Failure;

• Loss of Ethernet signal (e.g., disconnection of Ethernet cable);

Attempting to load firmware other than the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware (i.e., FW-0020567x.bin).

Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar shows 100%.

11 On the Firmware page, verify that the newly-uploaded firmware is reported in the proper Security Module Bulk Info slot. If not, update the Active Boot Slot Configuration by using the drop-down menu to select Newest to force the TRANSEC Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent build date. Click Submit when done.



Step Task

12 Click Reboot to boot the TRANSEC Module with the new firmware.

The modem will reboot with the new firmware.

It will be necessary to restart the DMD1050TS TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface session once the modem has returned online.

13 To load the second image, repeat Steps 9 through 11.



F.5 Command Line Interface (CLI)


F.5.1 Overview

This section defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu system provided with the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional TRANSEC Module via a SSH (Secure Shell) interface.

The SSH interface allows you to change operating parameters similar to those found on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, and with the monitoring, configuration, and control operations available via the modem front panel. See Section F.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface or Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION, respectively, for detailed information about the command functionality outlined in this appendix.



F.5.1.1 Secure Shell (SSH) User Access


See Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION, Section 8.4 Secure Shell (SSH) Interface for initial setup and operational examples for using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations

As explained in Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION, Section 8.4 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface, this appendix section uses PuTTY (Figure F-9), a free and open source terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly – this appendix assumes user familiarity with the preferred SSH interface.

Figure F-10. PuTTY Examples

Once connected to the TRANSEC Module via the SSH interface, you will need to provide a login name and password (the defaults for both are comtech). When the valid login and password are provided, you are taken directly to the CLI Main Menu, as shown in the Figure F-10 examples.



F.5.2 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality


The CLI, accessible via SSH, allows you to change operating parameters in a manner similar to the functionality as provided for the monitoring, configuration, and control via the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s front panel menus (see Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION) and in the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface (see Section F.2 in this appendix).

F.5.2.1 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation Features

With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this appendix feature the following common informational or navigational aids:


[Text field example] [RO] Typically found in the body of the page. This designates the field as a read-only status/informational message. There is no user action required for this item.

Logout of CLI Session L Found at the bottom of the screen. Allows user to log out of the CLI session.

Exit Menu X Found at the bottom of the screen. Allows user to exit the current menu and return to the parent menu. Alternately, you may press the Esc key to perform the same action.

Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, you are prompted to type in a functional selection, an alphanumeric configuration string, or an operational value. This prompt is provided at the bottom of the active page and takes the form of a selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid bar), as shown in the example to the right:

If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist you in the re-entry of information, as shown in these examples:



Save Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior to terminating the CLI session. Although changes are retained after a CLI session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A remains running), take note also that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted or the NP Interface is reset or loses power. Modified parameters can be saved by issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. You are prompted to confirm that all changes should be made permanent:

Logout When you attempt to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”, the CLI prompts you to confirm that you wish to end your session:



F.5.3 Command Line Interface Pages

F.5.3.1 Main Menu

Figure F-11. Main Menu Page

The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made on this page take you to submenus listed in this table (operational features nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are outlined in the appendix sections listed):

Table F-2. Main Menu Options


Configuration C The Configuration Menu page provides configuration access to the TRANSEC Module encryption features. F.5.3.2

Module Status M The Module Status page (no nested menus). This read-only page compiles the TRANSEC Module’s current operating parameters.

F.5.3.3

Event Log E Opens the Event Log page. You monitor and control operational faults and alarms here. F.5.3.4

Firmware F Opens the Unit Info Page which displays the loaded firmware information. F.5.3.5



F.5.3.2 Configuration Menu [C]

Figure F-12. Configuration Menu Page

Table F-3. Configuration Menu Options

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description Section

Active Encryption Key A Opens the nested Active Encryption Key Menu page. F.5.3.2.1

Future Encryption Key F Opens the nested Future Encryption Key Menu page. F.5.3.2.2

Encryption Settings E Opens the nested Encryption Menu page. F.5.3.2.3

Network Configuration N Opens the nested Network Menu page. F.5.3.2.4

Crypto Officer Credentials C Opens the nested Credentials Menu page. F.5.3.2.5

Key Generation* K Opens the nested Key Generation Menu page. F.5.3.2.6

SSH Console S Opens the nested SSH Console Menu page. F.5.3.2.7

HTTPS Configuration H Opens the nested HTTPS Menu page. F.5.3.2.8

* This menu option is only available with TRANSEC firmware version 2.2.4 or later. Prior firmware versions will only operate in the Legacy mode.



F.5.3.2.1 Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu [A]

Figure F-13. Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu Page

Table F-4. Active Encryption Key Menu Options

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description/User Prompt

Key Signature [RO] Current Active Key Signature is identified here.

Seed Key K Enter a 32-character Active Seed Key to generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).

Confirm Seed Key C Confirm to the Active Seed Key just entered.

Seed Key fields [RO] Displays the status of the Active Seed Key in real time.

Passphrase P Enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Active Seed Key to generate TEKs.

Current TEK [RO] Identifies the Current TEK (1 through 26).



F.5.3.2.2 Configuration | Future Encryption Key [F]

Figure F-14. Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu Page

Table F-5. Future Encryption Key Menu Options

Menu Options/Fields Entry Description/User Prompt

Key Signature [RO] Future Key Signature is identified here.

Seed Key K Enter a 32-character Future Seed Key to generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase (described below).

Confirm Seed Key C Confirm to the Future Seed Key just entered.

Seed Key fields [RO] Displays the status of the Future Seed Key in real time.

Passphrase P Enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is combined with the previously entered Future Seed Key to generate TEKs.

Activate Future Key I

(not shown)

Activates the future Seed Key and resets the TEK index to 1. Note: This option shows only when all of these are true:

a. the module is in primary mode b. you have entered a future Seed Key and Passphrase c. you have advanced the current TEK so that it is in the range of 2 to 26



F.5.3.2.3 Configuration | Encryption [E]

Figure F-15. Configuration | Encryption Menu Page

Table F-6. Encryption Menu Options


Encryption E Sets the Encryption Mode operation: 0 – Disabled 1 – Enabled

Operating Mode O Sets the Operating Mode operation: 0 – Primary 1 – Secondary

Frame Length F Specifies the length of the AES 256 encryption frame from 1 to 255.

Zeroize All Keys Z Resets all encryption keys in the module’s memory and flash to default values.



F.5.3.2.4 Configuration | Network [N]

Figure F-16. Configuration | Network Menu Page

Table F-7. Network Menu Options


Secure Management IP M

Change the TRANSEC Module IP Address as needed. Note: If this address is changed, it will be necessary to repeat the login process for the SSH interface, as described in Section 8.4, using the newly-designated IP Address, to regain access to the TRANSEC Module SSH CLI.

Subnet Bits B Change the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module as needed.

Gateway IP G

Change the TRANSEC Module IP Gateway Address as needed.

If this address is changed, it must match the subnet of the Secure Management IP. If it does not, then the Gateway IP Address text box will default to 0.0.0.0.



F.5.3.2.5 Configuration | Crypto Officer Credentials [C]

Figure F-17. Configuration | Crypto Officer Credentials Menu Page

Table F-8. Crypto Officer Credentials Menu Options


Crypto Officer User Name U Use to create the desired User Name.

Crypto Officer Password P Use to create the desired Password.

Confirm Password C Use to confirm the Password just entered.

Password Fields [RO] Provides the status of the password field in real time.

The Crypto Officer User Name and Password are each restricted to a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters. Excluded are:

: ASCII Code 58

< ASCII Code 60

> ASCII Code 62

“ ASCII Code 34

~ ASCII Code 126



F.5.3.2.6 Configuration | Key Generation Method Menu [K]

This menu option is only available with TRANSEC firmware version 2.2.4 or later. Prior firmware versions will only operate in the Legacy mode.

Figure F-18. Key Generation Menu Page

Table F-9. Key Generation Menu Options


Key Generation Method K

Displays a prompt to set the key generation mode to legacy method compatible with firmware version prior to 2.2.4 or the FIPS approved mode. 0 – Legacy 1 – FIPS



F.5.3.2.7 Configuration | SSH Console Menu [S]

Figure F-19. Configuration | SSH Console Menu Page

Table F-10. SSH Console Menu Options


Host Key Signature [RO] Displays the key signature, or fingerprint, which helps to identify the TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH.

Generate new host Key G Generate a new host key that uniquely identifies the TRANSEC Module.

SSH S Toggle Secure Shell Console operation: 0 – Off 1 – On



F.5.3.2.8 Configuration | HTTPS Configuration [H]

Figure F-20. Configuration | HTTPS Menu Page

Table F-11. HTTPS Menu Options


SSL Certificate Fingerprint CA File Fingerprint [RO] Displays the SSL Certificate Fingerprint and CA File Fingerprint.

Zeroite Certificate Z Opens a page used to reset the SSL certificate to the factory default. See Figure F-21.

Zeroite Certificate [Z]

Figure F-21. SSL Certificate Reset



F.5.3.3 Module Status [M]

Figure F-22. Module Status (Encryption Parameters) Page

The read-only Module Status page, opened from the Main Menu, provides you with the TRANSEC Module Interface’s current operational parameters:

• AES 256 Version

• Encryption Frame Length

• Operating Mode

• Board Temperature

• TRANSEC Clock Status

• Transmit Status

• Receive Status

Press any key to return to the Main Menu page.



F.5.3.4 Event Log [E]

See Section F.2.5.2.3 Admin | Event for detailed information about the operating parameters addressed by this menu.

Figure F-23. Event Log Menu Page

Table F-12. Event Log Menu Options


Logging M Sets recording of events and alarms: 0 – Off 1 – On

Logging Level E

Sets the level of information collected for the Events Log: 0 – Errors Only 1 – Errors and Warnings 2 - All Information

View Event Log V Displays the tally of events logged since the last time the Log was cleared.

Clear Event Log C

Clears the event log of all messages. Once selected, you are prompted with the following message: This action will clear the event log. Are you sure? (Y/N)

Enter ‘Y’ or ‘N’. If ‘Y’ is entered, the event log is reset to zero entries, and the following message is displayed: Event log cleared. Press Any Character to Continue.

Press any key to return to the Event Log Menu page.



F.5.3.5 Firmware [F]


See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for detailed information on the procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update process.

Figure F-24. Firmware (Unit Info) Menu Page

Table F-13. Firmware (Unit Info) Menu Options


Bootrom Info [RO] Displays the bootrom firmware.

Bulk 1 Info [RO] Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 1 location.

Bulk 2 Info [RO] Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 2 location.

Boot From B Selects the firmware boot source for modem operations as follows:

0 – Newest (automatically selects the most current version firmware residing in either Slot 1 or Slot 2);

1 – Slot 1 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 1 location;

2 – Slot 2 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 2 location.

If the ‘Boot From’ selection is changed, you must reboot the modem in order for that firmware selection to be loaded for operation.




Reboot R Reboots the modem. Once selected, the following message displays: This action will reboot the TRANSEC module. Are you sure? (Y/N)

Enter ‘Y’ or ‘N’. If ‘Y’ is entered, the reboot process begins by closing the SSH CLI. On the SLM-5650A front panel VFD, three messages will display at minimum (depending on the modem’s installed options): THIS MODEM WILL REBOOT IN FIVE SECONDS! BOOTING MODEM… …PLEASE WAIT INITIALIZING MODEM…

Once the modem reboots, you must initialize a new SSH CLI session to resume use of this interface.


Appendix H G–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix G. OPTIONAL DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-

CARRIER

BEFORE YOU ATTEMPT TO COMMISSION A SATELLITE LINK USING CARRIER-IN-CARRIER (CnC), YOU MUST ENSURE THAT THE LINK IS ROBUST ENOUGH FOR NORMAL OPERATION. ONLY WHEN YOU HAVE DONE THIS – AND YOU RESOLVE ALL SYSTEM ISSUES (E.G., ANTENNA-POINTING, CABLING, TERRESTRIAL INTERFERENCE, SATELLITE INTERFERENCE, ETC.) – SHOULD YOU ATTEMPT THE USE OF CARRIER-IN-CARRIER.

G.1 Overview

Space segment costs are typically the most significant operating expense for any satellite-based service, having a direct impact on the viability and profitability of the service. For a satellite transponder that has finite resources in terms of bandwidth and power, the leasing costs are determined by bandwidth and power used. Therefore, a satellite circuit should be designed for optimal utilization to use a similar share of transponder bandwidth and power.

The traditional approach to balancing a satellite circuit – once the satellite and earth station parameters are fixed – involves trade-off between modulation and coding. A lower order modulation requires less transponder power while using more bandwidth; conversely, higher order modulation reduces required bandwidth, albeit at a significant increase in power.

Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option adds a new dimension to satellite communication optimization.



G.1.1 What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier?

The SLM-5650A’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option uses a patented signal processing algorithm developed by Raytheon Applied Signal Technology that allows both the forward and reverse carriers of a full duplex link to share the same segment of transponder bandwidth, using patented “Adaptive Cancellation.” Raytheon Applied Signal Technology uses the term DoubleTalk, and Comtech EF Data refers to it as DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC)1.

CnC was first introduced in Comtech EF Data products such as the CDM-Qx Satellite Modem, CLO-10 Link Optimizer, and CDM-625 Advanced Satellite Modem. The implementation of DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier in the SLM-5650A has been further refined, and some of the limitations that existed in the prior offerings have been overcome.

CnC technology provides a significant improvement in bandwidth and power utilization, beyond what is possible with FEC and modulation alone, allowing users to achieve unprecedented savings. When combined with advanced modulation and FEC, it allows for multi-dimensional optimization:

• Reduced operating expense (OPEX) – e.g., Occupied Bandwidth & Transponder Power;

• Reduced capital expenditure (CAPEX) – e.g., Block Up Converter/High-Power Amplifier (BUC/HPA) size and/or antenna size;

• Increased throughput without using additional transponder resources;

• Increased link availability (margin) without using additional transponder resources;

• A combination of any of the above to meet different objectives.

Conclusion: When using the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option, up to 50% savings in transponder utilization is possible when carriers share common bandwidth.

1 DoubleTalk® is licensed from Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.

DoubleTalk® is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.

Carrier-in-Carrier® is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.



G.2 Application Requirements

These conditions are necessary in order to operate DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier:

• Link must be full duplex:

• A SLM-5650A must be used at the end of the link where the cancellation needs to take place. Normally, this is both ends of the link.

• The transponder is operated as Loopback. That is, each end of the link must be able to see a copy of its own signal in the downlink path from the satellite. The looped back signal is then subtracted, which leaves the signal from the distant end of the link. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier cannot be used in spot beam systems.

• The transponder needs to be “bent-pipe” – meaning no on-board processing, demodulation, regeneration can be employed. Demodulation/remodulation does not preserve the linear combination of the forward and return signals and the resulting reconstituted waveform prevents recovery of the original constituent signals.

Figure G-1 shows a simplified conceptual block diagram of CnC processing. The two ends of the link are denoted 'A' and 'B' and the uplink and downlink are shown.

This performance is achieved through advanced signal processing algorithms that provide superior cancellation while tracking and compensating for these common link impairments:

• Time varying delay: In addition to the static delays of the electronics and the round-trip delay associated with propagation to the satellite and back, there is a time-varying component due to movement of the satellite. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this variation.

• Frequency offset and drift: Common sources are satellite Doppler shift, up and down converter frequency uncertainties, and other drift associated with the electronics in the SLM-5650A itself. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this frequency offset and drift.

• Atmospheric effects: Fading and scintillation can affect amplitude, phase, and spectral composition of the signal and the degree to which it correlates with the original signal. The CnC module tracks and compensates for these atmospheric related impairments.

• Link Asymmetries: Various asymmetries in the forward and return link can produce differences in the relative power of the two received signal components. These can be both deterministic (static) or random (and time varying). An example of the former would be the differences resulting from antenna size/gain variations between the two ends of the link. An example of the latter would be transient power differences due to different levels of atmospheric fading in the uplinks. CnC compensates for the asymmetries, up to a certain extent.



Figure G-1. Conceptual Block Diagram

In a number of ways, CnC carriers behave similar to conventional carriers in satellite links. Both are exposed to adjacent carriers, cross-polarization, and rain fade, and exhibit impairments when any of these become too great. CnC additionally operates in an environment where:

• Carriers intentionally occupy the same spectral slot, and

• Performance depends upon desired and co-located interfering carrier. The interfering carrier is canceled, leaving the desired carrier for demodulation.

G.2.1 Operational Recommendations

The rules for CnC operation are summarized as follows:

• Both earth stations share the same footprint so each sees both carriers.

• CnC carriers are operated in pairs.

• One outbound with multiple return carriers is not allowed.

• Asymmetric data rates are allowed (no restrictions).

• The ratio of power spectral density is normally less than 11 dB.

• CnC operates with modems – not modulators only or demodulators only.



In addition, to minimize ‘false’ acquisition, observe the following:

• Use of IESS-315 V.35 Scrambler is highly recommended.

• Keep the search delay range as narrow as possible – once the modem has reported the search delay, narrow the search delay range to the nominal reported value ±5 ms – for example, if the modem reported delay is 245 ms, narrow the search range to say 240-250 ms.

• Use external data source (e.g. Fireberd) or internal BER tester when testing CnC performance.

• To prevent self-locking in case the desired carrier is lost, it is recommended that the two carriers have some configuration difference – for example, use different settings for Spectrum Inversion.



G.3 System Functionality and Operational Considerations

Figure G-2 illustrates a conventional, full duplex satellite link where two carriers are placed in non-overlapping channels. Figure G-3 shows the same link using the SLM-5650A equipped with the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option. Note that only 50% of the bandwidth is being used, as both carriers are now occupying the same bandwidth.

The transponder downlinks the composite signal containing both carriers on the same band to the SLM-5650A, which then translates the signal to near-baseband where it can be filtered (decimated) and then processed as a complex envelope signal. The SLM-5650A then suppresses the version of the near-end carrier on the downlink side, and then passes the desired carrier to the demodulator for normal processing.

To further illustrate, as shown in Figure G-4, without CnC, the two carriers in a typical full duplex satellite link are adjacent to each other. With CnC, only the composite signal is visible when observed on a spectrum analyzer. Carrier 1 and Carrier 2, shown here for reference only, are overlapping, thus sharing the same spectrum.

Figure G-2. Conventional FDMA Link



Figure G-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier

Figure G-4. Duplex Link Optimization

The SLM-5650A CnC module operates on the near-zero signal before the demodulator, and is waveform-agnostic. This means that no prior knowledge of the underlying modulation, FEC, or any other waveform specific parameter is required in order to perform the signal suppression operation. The only caveat to this is that the waveform must be sufficiently random.

Because acquiring the delay and frequency offset of the interfering carrier is fundamentally a correlation operation, anything deterministic in the interfering carrier (within the correlation window of the algorithm) will potentially produce false correlation peaks and result in incorrect delays and/or frequency. Normally, this is not a problem, since energy dispersal techniques are used in the vast majority of commercial and military modems. However, it is something that must be kept in mind when troubleshooting a system that uses the CnC technique for signal suppression.



One possible way to mitigate false peaks is to narrow the correlation window. For example, if the delay is known to be around 240ms, set the minimum search delay to 230ms and the maximum search delay to 250ms.

As all advances in modem technologies – including advanced modulation and FEC techniques – approach their theoretical limits of power and bandwidth efficiencies, CnC allows satellite users to achieve spectral efficiencies (bps/Hz) that cannot be achieved with modulation and FEC alone. Table shows how CnC, when used with 16-QAM, approaches the bandwidth efficiency of 256-QAM (8bps/Hz).

Table G-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier

As shown here, CnC allows equivalent spectral efficiency using a lower order modulation and/or FEC Code Rate; CAPEX is therefore reduced by allowing the use of a smaller BUC/HPA and/or antenna. And, as CnC can be used to save transponder bandwidth and/or transponder power, it can be successfully deployed in bandwidth-limited as well as power-limited scenarios.

G.3.1 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process

The signal processing technology employed via CnC continually estimates and tracks all parametric differences between the local uplink signal and its image within the downlink. Through advanced adaptive filtering and phase locked loop implementations, it dynamically compensates for these differences by appropriately adjusting the delay, frequency, phase and amplitude of the sampled uplink signal, resulting in optimal cancellation performance.

When a full duplex satellite connection is established between two sites, separate satellite channels are allocated for each direction. If both directions transmitted on the same channel, each side would normally find it impossible to extract the desired signal from the aggregate due to interference originating from its local modulator. However, since this interference is produced locally, it is possible to estimate and remove its influence prior to demodulation of the data transmitted from the remote location.



For the CnC cancellation, it is necessary to provide each demodulator with a copy of its local modulator’s output.

As shown in Figure G-5, Modem 1 and Modem 2 transmit signals S1 and S2 respectively. The satellite receives, translates, and retransmits the composite signal. The downlink signals S1* and S2* received at Modem 1 and Modem 2 differ from the transmit signals primarily in terms of phase, frequency, and delay offsets.

Figure G-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals

: For round trip delay estimation (Figure G-6), a search algorithm is used that correlates the received satellite signal to a stored copy of the local modulator’s transmitted signal. The interference cancellation algorithm uses the composite signal and the local copy of S1 to estimate the necessary parameters of scaling (complex gain/phase), delay offset and frequency offset. The algorithm continuously tracks changes in these parameters as they are generally time-varying in a satellite link.

Figure G-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram

The resulting estimate of the unwanted interfering signal is then subtracted from the composite signal. In practical applications, the estimate of the unwanted signal can be extremely accurate. Unwanted interfering signal suppression of 30 dB or more has been achieved in commercial products with minimal degradation of the demodulator performance.



G.3.2 Margin Requirements

Typical interfering signal cancellation is 28 to 35 dB (depending on the product). The residual interfering signal appears as noise causing a slight degradation of the Eb/No. To compensate for the residual noise, a small amount of additional link margin is required to maintain the BER. Margin requirements depend on the product, modulation and power ratios:

For the SLM-5650A, the additional margin requirements are as follows:

Modulation Nominal Margin*

* Equal power and equal symbol rate for the interfering carrier and the desired carrier, i.e., 0 dB PSD ratio. Measured at IF with AWGN, +10 dBc Adjacent Carriers, 1.3 spacing.

BPSK 0.3 dB

QPSK/OQPSK 0.3 dB

8-PSK 0.5 dB

8-QAM 0.4 dB

16-QAM 0.6 dB

G.3.3 Carrier-in-Carrier Latency

Carrier-in-Carrier has no measurable impact on circuit latency.

G.3.4 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design

Carrier-in-Carrier link design involves finding the FEC and modulation combination that provides optimal bandwidth utilization. Just like conventional link design, it is an iterative process that involves trying different FEC and modulation combinations with Carrier-in-Carrier until an optimal combination is found.

For optimal Carrier-in-Carrier performance, it is recommended that the two carriers have similar symbol rate and power. This can be achieved by selecting appropriate MODCODs as shown in following sections.



G.3.4.1 Symmetric Data Rate Link

Consider this example:

Satellite & Transponder Galaxy 18 @ 123º W, 13K/13K

Earth Station 1 Phoenix, AZ – 4.6 m

Earth Station 2 Phoenix, AZ – 2.4 m Data Rate 512 kbps / 512 kbps

The traditional link was based on QPSK TPC 3/4 and required 0.96 MHz of leased BW. The LST (Intelsat’s Lease Transmission Plan Program) summary for the traditional link is as follows:

Carrier-in-Carrier link design involved trying different Modulation & FEC Code Rates to find the optimal combination:

• 8-QAM, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier

• QPSK, LDPC 3/4 with Carrier-in-Carrier





Link parameters and LST summary for QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier is as follows:

The link budget summary for the different MODCOD combinations is as follows:

Signal No. Modulation & FEC Allocated BW

(MHz) PEB (MHz) Leased BW (MHz)

Savings Compared to Original

PSD Ratio (dB)

1 8-QAM, LDPC 2/3 0.3584 1.1468 1.1468 -20% 2.1

2 QPSK, LDPC 3/4 0.47785 0.6734 0.6734 30% 2.1

3 QPSK, LDPC 2/3 0.53735 0.5777 0.5777 40% 2.1

4 QPSK, LDPC 1/2 0.7168 0.5184 0.7168 25% 2.1

Based on this analysis, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier provides the maximum savings of 40%.



In addition to 40% reduction in Leased Bandwidth, using Carrier-in-Carrier also reduced the required HPA Power by almost 40%:

HPA Power Traditional Link (QPSK, TPC 3/4)

CnC Link (QPSK, LDPC 2/3) HPA Power Reduction

HPA @ 4.6 m 0.7 W 0.5 W 40%

HPA @ 2.4 m 1.5 W 1.1 W 36%

G.3.4.2 Asymmetric Data Rate Link

As occupied (or allocated) bandwidth of a Carrier-in-Carrier circuit is dictated by the larger of the two carriers, it is strongly recommended that the smaller carrier be spread as much as possible using a lower order modulation and/or FEC, while meeting the PSD ratio spec. Spreading the smaller carrier using a lower order modulation has multiple benefits:

• Lower order modulation is always more robust;

• Lower order modulation uses less transponder power – this reduces total transponder, and increases available link margin;

• Lower order modulation uses less transmit power on the ground – this can significantly reduce the BUC/SSPA size by not only reducing the transmit EIRP, but also reducing the BUC/SSPA backoff.

Consider this example:

Satellite & Transponder IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)

Earth Station 1 Africa – 4.5 m


Data Rate 3000 Mbps / 1000 Mbps



While the traditional link was based on QPSK, TPC 3/4 and required 3.9 MHz of leased bandwidth, the Carrier-in-Carrier link was based on QPSK, LDPC 3/4 and QPSK, LDPC 1/2 and required 2.8 MHz of leased bandwidth.

The savings summary is as follows:

Item Original Link With Carrier-in-Carrier and LDPC

Savings Hub to Remote

Remote to Hub Total Hub to

Remote Remote to

Hub Total

Data Rate (kbps) 3000 1000 3000 1000 Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK

FEC TPC 3/4 TPC 3/4 LDPC 3/4 LDPC 1/2

Occupied BW (MHZ) 2.8 0.9 3.7 2.8 1.4 2.8

Power Eq. BW (MHz) 3.3 0.6 3.9 2.5 0.3 2.8 Leased BW (MHz) 3.9 2.8 27.5%

Hub HPA (W) 26.0 20.3 22%

Remote HPA (W) 10.6 6.4 40%

If this link was designed using QPSK, LDPC 3/4 in both directions, it would have required:

• Occupied BW – 2.8 MHz

• Power Eq. BW – 3.0 MHz (a 7.2% increase in Power Eq. BW)

• Leased BW – 3.0 MHz (a 7.2% increase in Leased BW)

• Hub HPA – 20.3 W

• Remote HPA – 8.3 W (a 30% increase in Remote power)



G.3.4.3 Power Limited Links

Carrier-in-Carrier can provide substantial savings even when the original link is power limited. Spreading the carrier by using a lower modulation and/or FEC along with latest FEC such as VersaFEC can substantially reduce the total power which can then be traded with bandwidth using Carrier-in-Carrier. The concept is illustrated with the following examples:

The conventional link is using 8-PSK, TPC 3/4:

Switching to VersaFEC and using a lower order modulation – e.g., QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 increases the total occupied bandwidth, while reducing the total power equivalent bandwidth:

Now using CnC, the second QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 carrier can be moved over the first carrier – thereby significantly reducing the total occupied bandwidth and total power equivalent bandwidth when compared to the original side-by-side 8PSK, TPC 3/4 carriers:

To continue, consider this example:

Satellite & Transponder IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)



Data Rate 2.048 Mbps / 2.048 Mbps



Whereas the original link used 8-PSK TPC 3/4, the Carrier-in-Carrier link used QPSK VersaFEC 0.803. The savings summary is as follows:

Item Original Link With Carrier-in-Carrier and

VersaFEC Savings

Hub to Remote

Remote to Hub Total Hub to

Remote Remote to

Hub Total

Data Rate (kbps) 2048 2048 2048 2048 Modulation 8-PSK 8-PSK QPSK QPSK

FEC TPC 3/4 TPC 3/4 0.803 0.803

Occupied BW (MHZ) 1.3 1.3 2.6 1.8 1.8 1.8

Power Eq. BW (MHz) 2.2 1.0 3.2 1.1 0.5 1.6 Leased BW (MHz) 3.2 1.8 44%

Hub HPA (W) 5.0 2.0 60%

Remote HPA (W) 11.6 4.7 60%

Note: 1 dB HPA BO for QPSK, 2 dB HPA BO for 8-PSK, 1 dB Feed Loss.

Using Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC reduced the leased bandwidth by almost 44% and HPA power by 60%.



G.3.5 Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment

Prior to commissioning a Carrier-in-Carrier link, it is critical that the link is fully tested in non Carrier-in-Carrier mode and all system issues including external interference, antenna pointing, cabling, SSPA backoff are resolved. Only after the link is robust, should the user attempt turning on Carrier-in-Carrier.

The following procedure is recommended for Carrier-in-Carrier commissioning and deployment.

Step Task

1 Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘A’. Carrier from Site ‘B’ is OFF. CnC function is OFF at both sites. a. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at Site ‘A’. b. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at Site ‘B’. c. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘B’. Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC. d. Measure/record Receive Signal Level (RSL) at Site ‘B’.

2 Turn OFF the carrier at Site ‘A’. Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘B’. CnC function is OFF at both sites. a. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at Site ‘A’. b. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the modem at Site ‘B’. c. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’. Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC. d. Measure/record RSL at Site ‘B’.

3 Using Co+No/No readings calculate PSD ratio at Site ‘A’ and Site ‘B’. If it is not within specification, make necessary adjustments to bring it within specification and repeat measurements in Steps 1 and 2. Also verify that the RSL is within spec.

4 Without changing the transmit power levels, turn ON both the carriers (on the same frequency) and turn CnC ON.

a. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’ b. Measure/record RSL at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’ c. Compare Eb/No in presence of two over lapping carriers with CnC with Eb/No when only

one carrier was ON. Eb/No variation should be within spec for that modulation, FEC and PSD ratio.

5 Repeat the test for different PSD ratio and Eb/No.



G.3.6 Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance

Carrier-in-Carrier performance can be easily validated by verifying that Eb/No degradation due to Carrier-in-Carrier is within published specification for the observed Power Spectral Density Ratio.

The following procedure is recommended for validating Carrier-in-Carrier performance.

Step Task

1 Setup a conventional side-by-side link of the desired Eb/No. a. Carrier-in-Carrier should be OFF. b. Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems. c. Observe the two carriers on a spectrum analyzer and record the PSD ratio.

Example Link:

• Full duplex 512 kbps, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 circuit between 4.6 m and 2.4 m antennas • Recorded Eb/No = 2.6 dB (at both modems) • PSD Ratio = 1.2 dB (measured at larger Antenna)

2 Relocate one of the carriers on top of the other carrier: a. Enable Carrier-in-Carrier. b. Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.



Step Task

3 Calculate change in Eb/No and verify against specification. Example Link:

• Recorded Eb/No = 2.4 dB • Change in Eb/No = 0.2 dB • Eb/No Degradation (Spec.) at 1.2 dB PSD = 0.3 dB • Modem performance is within spec



G.4 Operational References

G.4.1 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation

The following procedure is required for calculating the link budget for a Carrier-in-Carrier Link.

Step Task

1 Calculate the link budget for both carriers in the duplex link, with required CnC margin:

2 Verify that the PDS ration is within spec for the SLM-5650A.

3 Calculate the Allocated Bandwidth (BW) and Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) for the duplex link:

• BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWCarrier 1, BWCarrier 2)

• PEBDuplex Link = PEBCarrier 1 + PEBCarrier 2

• Leased BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWDuplex Link, PEBDuplex Link)

4 For an optimal link, the Leased Bandwidth and the Power Equivalent Bandwidth should be equal / nearly equal.

5 Repeat the link budget process by selecting different Modulation and FEC, until the BW and PEB is nearly balanced.



G.4.2 Estimating PSD Ratio

PSD can be estimated from a link budget using Downlink EIRP and Symbol Rate: PSD = Downlink EIRP – 10 * Log (Symbol Rate)

PSD Ratio Example:

Carrier Downlink EIRP Symbol Rate Power Spectral Density

A to B 27 dBW 500 ksps -29.99 dBW/Hz

B to A 24 dBW 375 ksps -31.74 dBW/Hz

PSD Ratio (@ A) = -29.99 – (-31.74) = 1.75 dB

PSD Ratio (@ B) = -31.74 – (-29.99) = -1.75 dB

G.4.2.1 Estimating PSD Ratio from LST



G.4.2.2 Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster

G.4.2.3 Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer

PSD Ratio or CnC Ratio can also be estimated using a Spectrum Analyzer capable of integrating the signal power in a given bandwidth.

CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) – PowerC2 (in dBm)

PSD Ratio (in dB) = (PowerC1 – 10 log BWC1 (in Hz)) – (PowerC2 – 10 log BWC2 (in Hz))

= CnC Ratio – 10 log (BWC1 / BWC2)

If the two carriers have same Symbol Rate / Bandwidth, then the CnC Ratio is same as the PSD Ratio.



G.5 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications

Operating Mode:

Requires the two links to share a common carrier frequency (Outbound and Inbound symbol rates do not have to be equal)

Power Spectral Density Ratio and CnC Ratio:

• BSPK/QPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM: –7 dB to +11 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound interferer to desired inbound)

• 16-QAM: –7 dB to +7 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound interferer to desired inbound)

With asymmetric carriers the absolute power ratio (or CnC ratio) would be different, depending on the ratio of the symbol rates.

For Example:

• Outbound interferer = 1 Msymbols/sec

• Desired Inbound = 500 ksymbols/sec

• Ratio of power spectral density = +7 dB

• Absolute power ratio (CnC Ratio) = +7dB + (10 log Outbound/desired symbol rate) = +10 dB

Maximum Symbol Rate Ratio:

3:1 (TX:RX or RX:TX)

Inbound/Outbound frequency uncertainty:

Within the normal acquisition range of the demod, as follows:

• Below 64 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ±(Rs/2) kHz, where Rs = symbol rate in ksymbols/sec

• Between 64 and 389 ksymbols/sec: ± 1up to a maximum of ± 32kHz

• Above 389 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ± (0.1Rs) kHz, up to a maximum of ± 200 kHz

Delay range:

0-330 ms

Eb/No Degradation (equal Inbound/Outbound power spectral density):

BPSK = 0.3dB QPSK = 0.3dB OQPSK = 0.3dB 8-PSK = 0.5dB 8-QAM = 0.4dB 16-QAM = 0.6dB

For +10 dB power spectral density ratio (outbound interferer 10 dB higher than desired inbound) add an additional 0.3 dB

Monitor Functions:

• Delay, in milliseconds

• Frequency offset (between outbound interferer and desired inbound). 100 Hz resolution

• CnC ratio, in dB (ratio of absolute power, outbound interferer to desired inbound)

CnC Monitor Accuracy:

±1.0 dB for symmetric symbol rate



G.6 Carrier-in-Carrier Summary

Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier can provide significant savings in operational expenses. The following should be considered when evaluating CnC:

• CnC can only be used for full duplex links where the transmitting earth station is able to receive itself.

• CnC can be used in both bandwidth limited and power limited situations.

• The maximum savings is generally achieved when the original link is symmetric in data rate.

G.7 Glossary of Terms

Bandwidth, Allocated or Occupied: Bandwidth or Allocated Bandwidth or Occupied Bandwidth is the frequency space required by a carrier on a transponder.

For example: A Duplex 10 Mbps Circuit with 8PSK Modulation, FEC Rate 3/4 and 1.4 Spacing requires:

• Allocated BW = (DR / SE) * CSF [(Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency) * Carrier Spacing Factor]

• Allocated BW = 6.222 MHz = (10 / 2.25) * 1.4

For a 36 MHz transponder, 6.222 MHz corresponds to 17.3% Bandwidth Utilization.

Bandwidth, Leased (LBW): Almost all satellite operators charge for the Leased Bandwidth (LBW). Leased Bandwidth or Leased Resource is the greater of the Allocated Bandwidth and Power Equivalent Bandwidth.

For example: If a carrier requires 3 MHz of Allocated BW and 4.5 MHz of PEB, the Leased Bandwidth is 4.5 MHz.

Bandwidth, Power Equivalent (PEB): Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) is the transponder power used by a carrier, represented as bandwidth equivalent.

PEB Calculation Example:

• Transponder EIRP = 37 dBW

• Output Backoff (OBO) = 4 dB

• Available EIRP = 37 – 4 = 33 dBW = 103.3 = 1995.26 Watts

• Transponder Bandwidth = 36 MHz

• Power Available / MHz = 1995.26 / 36 = 55.424 W

• If a carrier uses 24 dBW, its PEB = 102.4 / 55.424 = 4.532 MHz

This corresponds to 12.59% of available transponder power.



CnC Ratio: Ratio of Interfering Carrier Power to Desired Carrier Power (unit in dB).

The Interfering Carrier is the Tx Carrier from local modulator; the Desired Carrier is the carrier from the distant end received by the local demodulator.

At the station transmitting C1: CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) – PowerC2 (in dBm)

Eb/No: Ratio of Energy per bit (Eb) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):

• Eb/No = C/No – 10log(DR) [where DR is the Data Rate]

• Eb/No = Es/No – 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]

Es/No: Ratio of Energy per symbol (Es) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):

• Es/No = C/No – 10log(SR) [where SR is the Symbol Rate]

• Es/No = Eb/No + 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]

C/N: Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise (N) (unit in dB):

Equivalent to Es/No when calculated in the Symbol Rate bandwidth.

C/No: Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dBHz)

Co+No/No: Ratio of Carrier Density (Co) + Noise (No) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dB):

• C/N = C/No – 10log(B) [where B is bandwidth in Hz]

• Eb/No = C/No – 10log(DR)

[where DR is data rate in bits/sec]

= C/N + 10 log (B) – 10 log (DR)

= C/N – 10 log (SE)

[where SE is Spectral Efficiency]

• Eb/No = 10 log (10 ((Co+No/No)/10) – 1) – 10 log (SE)

[where SE is Spectral Efficiency]

Spectral Efficiency is in bps / Hz]



Power Spectral Density (PSD): Power Spectral Density (PSD) is the signal power per unit bandwidth: dBW/Hz or dBm/Hz

For example: Signal power = 20 dBm

Signal bandwidth = 5 MHz

PSD = 20 – 10 log (5,000,000) = -46.99 dBm / Hz

PSD Ratio: Ratio of Power Spectral Density (PSD) of the interfering carrier to the desired carrier.

If looking at the two carriers side-by-side on a spectrum analyzer:

Quasi Error Free (QEF): Quasi Error Free (QEF) corresponds to PER ~10-7

PER (packet error rate) is based upon a 188-byte MPEG frame size

Spectral Efficiency (SE): Ratio of the Data Rate to the Symbol Rate.

Symbol Rate & Data Rate: Symbol Rate and Data Rate are related:

• DR = SR * SE [Data Rate = Symbol Rate * Spectral Efficiency]

• SR = DR / SE [Symbol Rate = Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency]


Appendix I H–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix H. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION

EXAMPLES

H.1 Overview

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (also referred to as the “NP Interface” or the “card”), when installed and operating in Router Mode OSPFv2 or Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Mode, makes point-to-multipoint topologies possible. This appendix provides the following Vipersat Network Application Examples:

• OSPFv2

• BPM Mode



H.2 OSPF v2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network

This section examines the challenges and solutions for using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) in a shared outbound/split path satellite network such as Vipersat.

H.2.1 Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview

Figure H-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network

A shared outbound network saves satellite bandwidth and reduces operating expenses by allowing multiple remote terminals to share the same channel from a hub ground station.

Figure H-1 illustrates a satellite shared outbound network. Notably, the outbound interface at the hub is not the same interface at which return traffic received. This is referred to as “split path.”



H.2.2 OSPF Basics

Certain critical features of the OSPF protocol that impact a shared outbound satellite network are as follows:

• OSPF requires that the communication channel between the interfaces that connect any two given OSPF nodes must have ability to pass traffic bidirectionally.

• A router running the OSPF algorithm will send out “Hello” packets on each interface, when the response from a node on the same subnet as the interface is received, OSPF will create a neighbor adjacency with that node. In this way, the subnets and segments of the OSPF network are discovered, mapped and an OSPF database is created. This database is used by all OSPF routers to determine open shortest paths to all remote networks. OSPF nodes that do not follow these rules will not be added to a router's neighbor adjacency database.

H.2.3 OSPF Challenges

Use of a split path violates the requirement whereby OSPF messaging is sent and received on the same interface. Therefore, the hub modems will not achieve “neighbor adjacency” with any of the remote routers. This means that running OSPF on the hub routers will not add any value.

In the example diagram, the SLM-5650A NP Router is essentially a two-port router, thereby requiring that another OSPF node must always be in place “downstream” at the remote.

However, if this downstream router is running OSPF, could the high costs associated with a satellite link be managed and reduced by specifically configuring the router interface? Such a configuration would allow the overall OSPF network to control whether traffic should pass to the satellite link, or to a lower-cost link, such a terrestrial fiber, based upon availability. The possibility of such a solution is examined in the following use case.

H.2.4 OSPF Maritime Use Cases

The maritime use cases presented here depicts application of OSPFv2 as part of a deployed network of routers that includes the SLM-5650A NP Interface.

The primary objective of these use cases is to describe the process of automatically re-routing traffic when alternative transmission links are available in a maritime environment. Specifically, the satellite link should be used when at sea, and the high-speed terrestrial link should be used when at shore. This switch should occur automatically.

If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or back-up lower-speed satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing protocol will select the best path as defined by link cost.



H.2.4.1 OSPF Use Case: At Shore

Figure H-2. OSPF Support at Shore

When at shore, as depicted in Figure H-2, the shipboard OSPF network automatically re-routes packets destined to non-shipboard networks over the high-speed, low-cost network.



H.2.4.2 OSPF Use Case: At Sea

Figure H-3. OSPF Support at Sea

When at sea, all traffic is routed to the satellite network. If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or backup lower-speed satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing protocol selects the best path as defined by link cost.



H.2.5 OSPF Deployment Solution

H.2.5.1 OSPF Test Network

Figure H-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network

Figure H-4 depicts the test network created to demonstrate how OSPFv2 can be used in a large-scale Vipersat deployment.

It has been determined that OSPF can be used with a Vipersat and shared outbound topology by enabling a common router feature: IP Tunneling.



H.2.5.2 OSPF Test Solution

Figure H-5. OSPF Test Solution

Multi- Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub TDM Modem.

As shown in Figure H-5, if an IP tunnel is configured from each of the remote Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBRs) to the OSPF routers at the hub, the two routers will attain neighbor adjacency. All of the necessary OSPF messages will be exchanged to include the remote shipboard network into the OSPF domain.

This configuration allows the network to automatically reconfigure to the lower-cost terrestrial link when connected and automatically return to the higher-cost satellite link when the terrestrial link is disconnected.

It is recommended that the hub OSPF router be a backbone router (area 0.0.0.0), and each of the shipboard networks be a single OSPF area. This will reduce the amount of OSPF messaging required to be transmitted over the satellite network.



H.2.5.3 OSPFv2 Summary

The proposed solution using router-configurable IP tunneling to connect the remotes to the hub OSPF router satisfies the use case with minimal operator configuration.

While the addition of an IP tunnel will add overhead, the overall reduction in satellite bandwidth using the dynamic shared bandwidth functionality of Vipersat will more than offset the added overhead. Load switching, used in conjunction with OSPF, will allow the bandwidth to be automatically returned to the pool once a lower-cost terrestrial link is connected.

Advantages • Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration with minimal

impact to the network.

• Because each ship is its own area, there will be a reduced amount of OSPF traffic over the satellite.

• If the operator uses Vipersat load switching at the remote (i.e. shipboard SLM-5650A NP), then once the terrestrial link is connected, traffic will be redirected to fiber link and the load-switching algorithm will free the satellite link and return it to STDMA operation. This will free up significant satellite bandwidth automatically for use by other ships still at sea.

• Satellite link availability will still be available to the participating OSPF routers because periodic LSA and Hello packets will not be received on the router interface in case of satellite outage.

• Reduces the number of OSPF nodes in the network.

• Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration with minimal impact to the network.

Disadvantages • Because IP tunnels are set up from the remote ASBR to the hub backbone router, an

additional 20-byte IP header will be added to all packets traversing the satellite interface.

• An IP tunnel will have to be configured for each ship to the hub OSPF router.



H.3 Network Processor (NP) Interface Bridge Point-to-Multipoint (BPM) Mode

Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations. Additionally, the NP Interface is limited to 256 allowable route tables. This, in turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.

In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with SLM-5650A Satellite Modems, BPM Mode, an optional FAST feature, has been introduced in the NP Interface’s FW-0000051L Ver. 1.9.1 firmware release.

When BPM Mode is selected, Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate simultaneously – i.e., the users can operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network without interfering with each other.

H.3.1 BPM Mode Functional Description

Figure H-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode

The NP Interface features four Ethernet ports: P1 through P4. When BPM Mode is enabled, the SLM-5650A Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ management port effectively becomes the NP Interface’s fifth Ethernet port. All five Ethernet ports are then segregated into three Ethernet switches.

As shown in Figure H-6:

• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’ forms the red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1. This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic only.

• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’ forms the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2. This group is reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic only.

• The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port ‘C’ forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group. This set is reserved for routed Layer 3 traffic and management use only.

All three switch groups are isolated such that:

• Traffic from NP Interface Port P1 can only transmit to the Data WAN Port ‘A’ or NP Interface port P2. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P3 or P4, the Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, Management WAN Port ‘B’, or VS WAN Port ‘C.’



• The traffic from NP Interface Port P3 can transmit to the Management WAN Port ‘B’ or NP Interface Port P4. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports P1 or P2, the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port, Data WAN Port ‘A’, or VS WAN Port ‘C.’

• The traffic from the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port can transmit to VS WAN Port ‘C.’ It will NOT transmit to NP Interface Ports P1 through P4, Data WAN Port ‘A’, or Management Port ‘B.’



H.3.1.1 Glossary of Terms

Primary Port This is the port that can transmit the traffic those ingresses from any port within its group.

Examples:

• NP Interface Port P1 can transmit the traffic coming from Data WAN Port ‘A’ or NP Interface Port P2.

• NP Interface Port P3 can transmit the traffic coming from Management WAN port ‘B’ or NP Interface Port P4.

• The Base Modem J5 Ethernet port can transmit the traffic coming from VS WAN port ‘C.’

Expansion Port This is the port that can transmit the traffic that ingress from its primary port within that group.

Examples:

• NP Interface Port P2 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P1 only.

• NP Interface Port P4 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface Port P3 only.

WAN Port This is a logical port that transmits the packet only to the primary ports, but it can receive the packets from either the primary port or the expansion port.

Examples:

• Data WAN port ‘A’ Bridge-Group1.

• Management WAN port ‘B’ in Bridge-Group2.

• VS WAN port ‘C’ in Router-Group.



H.3.2 BPM Mode Configuration

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE Capter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE

For more information about FAST, see:

• Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION, Section 1.3.1.7 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST). • Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION, Section 7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST, and Section

7.3.3.9 CONFIG: Remote • Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE,

Section D.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option), and Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features

BPM Mode is available on the NP Interface as a FAST Option. Once the FAST Access Code has been purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF Data Product Support, it is then activated in the NP Interface-equipped modem via the modem front panel. Once activated, BPM Mode must then be enabled for operation.

You may enable BPM Mode operation either from the SLM-5650A front panel menu (CONFIG: Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Network Proc), or from the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface ‘Admin | Vipersat Modes’ page.



H.3.3 BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks

Figure Legend

Equipment Data Type

1 TDM Modem A STDMA Return Link

2 Hub LAN Data Switch B Forward Link

3 Hub router C Network Encryption

4 Other Devices D MAC Learning Disabled (Entire Switch)

5 Hub Demodulator Data Switch E SCPC Return #1

6 Demodulator #1 F SCPC Return #2

7 Demodulator #2 G SCPC Return #N

8 Demodulator #N

Figure H-7. Hub Data Traffic Network



In a point-to-multipoint system, at the hub a split-path topology is used and traffic in the Forward Link and Return Link directions may be processed by different SLM-5650A modems.

Figure H-7 shows a typical Hub Data Traffic Network for one Layer 2 Network (‘P1/P2/A’ shown in red). The other two networks (‘P3/P4/B’ shown in blue and ‘P5/C’ shown in green) can be used in a similar fashion.

Note that the Hub Demodulators used in this configuration are SLM-5650A modems configured for operation with the optional ‘Demodulator only’ FAST Feature enabled.

In the Forward Link direction, all traffic is transmitted by the Hub TDM Modem. Packets received from the Hub Data Network are received by the Hub TDM Modem on a Data LAN Port (P1) and forward to the Data WAN.

The packets received by Return Link channels can come into the Hub in one of two ways:

1. They are processed by the Hub TDM Modem for Self-Organizing Time Division Multiple Access (STDMA) channels.

2. Hub Demodulators are used for Single Channel per Carrier (SCPC) channels.

In Figure H-7, the external hub switch supporting data traffic is shown as two separate switches: The Hub LAN Data Switch, and the Hub Demodulator Data Switch. It is important to note that this is a functional concept only – the physical implementation of this switch can be accomplished in one of three ways:

1. Two separate switches, as illustrated in Figure H-7.

2. One physical switch, partitioned into two logical switches using port isolation. Many commercially available managed switches have this capability.

3. A data-path router directly connected to the Hub TDM Modem’s P1 port, with the functionality of the Hub Demodulator Data Switch implemented by means of daisy-chaining the Hub Demodulator units Data LAN ports (i.e., connecting the P1 port of one Hub Demodulator to the P2 port of the next Hub Demodulator). This third method has the advantage of reducing the required Hub equipment. However, it has the disadvantage of adding between 5 µsec and 0.01 ms of delay per Hub Demodulator unit traversed, depending on packet size (64 – 1500 bytes @ 1000 Mbps GigE negotiation between Hub Demodulators and the Hub TDM Modem).

Note also that for return link packets arriving via SCPC channels, you must make sure to avoid potential issues associated with the split path topology inherent in the point-to-multipoint system architecture. In order to forward the packets received from the Hub Demodulator to the Hub expansion port P2, MAC learning on the HUB demodulators switch should be disabled, as indicated by Data Type ‘D’ in Figure H-7.



H.3.4 Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration

Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE

In BPM Mode, multiple Hub TDM Modem configuration is supported along with dynamic assignment of Hub Demodulators.

In a dynamic Hub Demodulator assignment, the Hub Demodulator can be assigned to any Hub TDM Modem. Packet transmission should therefore be forwarded from the Hub Demodulator to the corresponding Hub TDM Modem. In order to accommodate this, a separate VLAN packet tagging is used.

Packets transmitted from the Hub Demodulator will be tagged with configured VLAN (or double-tagged if the packet already has a VLAN) and then sent to all designated Hub TDM Modems. The corresponding Hub TDM Modem(s) will receive and process these packets, while non-corresponding Hub TDM Modems will ignore them.

Figure H-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages

With this configuration (see Figure H-8), the Hub TDM Modem is set to Vipersat Hub per the ‘Admin | Vipersat Mode’ web page and configured for Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode per the ‘LAN | Interface’ web page (see Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE, Sections D.2.5.2.1 and D.2.5.4.1).

This VLAN communication is configurable as Automatic. When Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode is configured as Manual, then a unique VLAN ID has to be entered.



H.3.5 Remote Data Traffic Handling

Figure Legend

Equipment Data Type 1 Remote Modem A Tx / Rx Data Link from Hub 2 Remote LAN Data Switches B Network Encryption 3 Remote Router 4 Other Devices

Figure H-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network

In BPM Mode, remote operation requires no special configuration – remote role is the same for either point-to-point or point-to-multipoint topologies.

As Figure H-9 shows:

• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’, form the red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1;

• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’, form the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2;

• The SLM-5650A Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port, with internal VS WAN Port ‘C’, forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group.

• Observe the following rules with this configuration:

• NP Interface ports P1, P3, and Base Modem Ethernet Port J5 are the primary ports.

• NP Interface ports P2 and P4 are the secondary ports.

Note that, while the remote LAN switches shown in Figure H-9 are included to illustrate how third party Layer2 switches can be used, their use is not mandatory.


Appendix J I–1 MN-SLM-5650A

Appendix I. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS

I.1 Overview

The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem has several optional features and functions that can add overhead. This appendix describes:

• The processing flow where overhead can be added;

• The amount of overhead added by each feature when enabled;

• The calculation of modem symbol rate and modem chip rate (when optional spreading is enabled), given the programmed modem bit rate.



I.2 Processing Flow and Symbol Rate Calculation

The SLM-5650A supports both serial and Ethernet interfaces, and provides options for framing, modulation and spreading. Figure I-1 shows the processing flow for these functions when the SLM-5650A ‘J6 EIA530’ rear panel connector and the optional Network Processor Module’s Port ‘1’ are used for the Serial and Ethernet interfaces, respectively.

Figure I-1. SLM-5650A – Feature Block Diagram

The symbol rate SR (Carrier 3dB Bandwidth) is a function of the programmed data bit rate BR with FEC encoding, modulation, and transport overhead factors as shown in the equation “SR=BR/MOCRFRSFTFC” (referred to hereafter as “Equation 1”), containing the following Operands:

• Operand 1 – MO = Modulation Order ‘1’ if BPSK

‘2’ if QPSK

‘3’ if 8PSK

‘4’ if 16QAM

• Operand 2 – CR = Code Rate of the Forward Error Correction (FEC) (e.g., CR = 0.75 if stated FEC code rate = “3/4”)

• Operand 3 – FRS = Reed Solomon Framing Factor, where:

o FRS = (n/k) where (201,219) is default RS for MIL-165A

o FRS = 1 where the RS is disabled.

• Operand 4 – Fc = CnC AUPC Mode or ACPC Control Framing Factor, where:

o FC = 15/16 if AUPC Mode is enabled;

o FC = 32605/32768 if ACPC Mode is enabled;

o FC = 1 if neither feature is enabled.

Only one of these two features (AUPC Mode or ACPC Mode) may be enabled at any given time.



• Operand 5 – FT = TRANSEC Framing Factor, where:

o FT = N*16/[N*16+3], where ‘N’ is the selected Frame Length in AES blocks per frame, in the range of 1 to 16.

o FT = 1 if the TRANSEC encryption is disabled.

If the Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) feature is enabled, then the simple equation for Chip Rate (SC) equivalent to (Bw) of the spread signal is: “SC=K*SR” where ‘K’ is the programmed spreading factor (e.g. 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, up to 512)



I.3 Sources of Overhead

I.3.1 Framing Overhead

Several modes of operation add framing overhead to the satellite channel.

IBS and IDR framing are also technically supported in the SLM-5650A, in that these framing modes can be enabled. However, the overhead channel information associated with these framing modes is not available external to the modem in either transmit or receive directions. These framing modes therefore are of limited use in the SLM-5650A, and are not included for consideration in this appendix.

I.3.1.1 Reed–Solomon/Outside FEC Codec Framing Factor

The overhead factor of this feature is referred to as “Operand 3” in Section I.2:

Reed–Solomon can be appended with the Viterbi FEC, but it is only supported in the MIL-165A and IESS modem type configurations. The Reed–Solomon error correction is user selectable to operate within a set of predefined legacy formats.

I.3.1.2 AUPC/ASYNC (ESC) and ACPC Channel Framing

AUPC/ASYNC overhead channel and the Automatic CnC Power Control (ACPC) framing factor are referred to as “Operand 4” in Section I.2:

• The AUPC/ASYNC overhead channel supports an EIA-232 or EIA-422 overhead channel that is asynchronous to the main traffic channel. This legacy communications channel also supports modem-to-modem receiver signal Eb/No status used to automatically adjust the Tx uplink power when (AUPC Power Control) is enabled. If the AUPC framing mode is enabled, 16 framed output bits are created for every 15 input bits of the transport stream regardless if the features are being used. The AUPC/ASYNC overhead factor is a function of the programmed Data Rate.

• The ACPC overhead frame provides modem-to-modem receiver CnC signal status required to implement the CnC ratio balancing ACPC algorithm. When this feature is enabled, 32769 framed output bits are generated for every 32605 input bits of the transport stream.

ASYNC/AUPC and ACPC communications framing are mutually exclusive features. You may not enable these features simultaneously.

I.3.1.3 TRANSEC Framing

When the TRANSEC encryption is enabled the transport Frame size is user selectable as (N * AES block). The parameter “N” is programmable from 1 to 16; each AES block is 16 bytes in length; each frame has a 3 byte header. This leads to the FT factor, identified as “Operand 5” in Section I.2. Larger values of “N” create lower overhead, at the expense of slightly longer TRANSEC frame acquisition times.



I.3.2 Total Framing Overhead

There may be times where the framing overhead is of interest, expressed as a percentage of framing overhead bits within the framed transport stream. Identified as “Operand 5” in Section I.2, this value can be expressed as:

Framing Overhead[%]=[1-FTFC]*100

As per “Equation 1” (see Section I.2), since the factors FT and FC are less than unity, the Framing Overhead (when framing is present) increases the symbol rate. Framing overhead has no effect on the programmed modem bit rate, which is equivalent to the input bit rate of a serial data stream input to the modem.

I.3.3 IP Traffic Encapsulation Overhead

When the Ethernet traffic interface is used, a framed transport overhead is necessary to encapsulate the packets into the transport stream. When the SLM-5650A operates in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet packets received from the interface are encapsulated as-is. When the SLM-5650A operates in Router Modes, the Ethernet MAC header and CRC are removed from the input Ethernet packets, and IP packets are encapsulated into the High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) frame.

In either (Static) Bridge Mode or Router Mode, a form of the HDLC is used to encapsulate the Ethernet or IP packets. A start flag byte (0x7E) is added to each packet and a 2-byte CRC is appended to the end. In addition, in order to enable the receiver to recognize the start flag within the data stream, a “0” is inserted wherever five “1”s occur in a row in the transport data stream. Assuming random bits, the probability of bit stuffing using this technique is 1/62.

See RFC 4814 “Hash and Stuffing: Overlooked Factors in Network Device Benchmarking” for a derivation of this probability.

Considering both sources of HDLC Overhead means that, for a packet length “L”, the ratio of input bits to encapsulated output bits is expressed as “Equation 2”:

FH=L/[L+3+L/62] = L/[(63/62)L+3]

Unlike framing overhead, HDLC Overhead reduces the effective throughput of packet bits relative to the programmed modem data rate. Packet Throughput, in packet bits/second, is expressed as “Equation 3”:

Packet Throughput=(Programmed Modem Data Rate)*FH

HDLC Overhead – referred to as “Equation 4” – is expressed as a percent overhead of the modem date rate:

HDLC OH[%]=(1-FH)*100=([(1/62)L+3]/[(63/62)L+3])*100

The HDLC Overhead ranges from approximately 6% for L=64 to approximately 1.8% for L=1518.



I.4 Product Support

For further information about the SLM-5650A’s overhead support of interfaces and framing options, please call Comtech EF Data Product Support:

By phone:

+1.240.243.1880 (outside USA and Canada)

+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA and Canada)

By email: [email protected]

Web Site: www.comtechefdata.com

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.comtechefdata.com/

2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA 480 • 333 • 2200 PHONE

480 • 333 • 2161 FAX